ML14297A272: Difference between revisions
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol) |
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol) |
||
Line 176: | Line 176: | ||
Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nuclear Power Plant Personnel, IAEA, Vienna, 1998, IAEA TECDOC 1057. ANALYSISDESIGNDEVELOPMENTIMPLEMENTATIONEVALUATION F E E D B A C KConduct Needs AnalysisConduct Job AnalysisConduct Task AnalysisConstruct TestsDevelop Job Performance MeasuresDetermine Training Setting Prepare Learning ObjectivesDevelop Test ItemsDescribe Trainees' Entry LevelOrganize Learning ObjectivesDevelop Training PlanSpecify Learning ActivitiesDevelop Training MaterialsSelect Training MethodsDevelop Lessons PlansConduct Training Program TryoutImplement Training PlanConduct TrainingConduct In-Training EvaluationDocument TrainingMonitor IndicatorsAnalyze InformationInitiate Corrective Actions DG-5043, Page 9 Harmonization with International Standards The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) has established a series of safety guides and standards constituting a high level of safety for protecting people and the environment. IAEA safety guides present international good practices that, while not required, increasingly reflect best practices to help users striving to achieve high levels of safety. Pertinent to this RG, IAEA Nuclear Security Series No. 13, "Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physi cal Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities (INFCIRC/255/Revision 5)," (Ref. 8) issued January 2011 contains recommended training guidance for nuclear security personnel. This RG incorporates similar training recommendations and is consistent with the basic safety principles provided in IAEA Nuclear Security Series No. 13. The systematic approach to training has been accepted by many nuclear utilities as the international best practice for the training and qualification of nuclear power plant personnel. The IAEA International Working Group on Nuclear Power Plant Personnel Training and Qualification has emphasized the importance of sharing the experience gained and lessons learned by Member States in the course of their application of SAT in order to establish and maintain the best possible training program for nuclear power plant personnel. The International Working Group thus recommended the preparation and publication of an IAEA technical report on expe riences in the use of SAT for nuclear power plant personnel. As a result of the working group recommendation, IAEA published "Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nu clear Power Plant Personnel," IAEA, Vienna, 1998, IAEA-Tecdoc-1057 (Ref. 9), which provides significant discussion of the SAT process. Documents Discussed in Staff Regulatory Guidance This regulatory guide endorses, in part, the use of one or more codes or standards developed by external organizations, and other third party guidance documents. These codes, standards and third party guidance documents may contain references to other codes, standards or third party guidance documents ("secondary references"). If a secondary reference has itself been incorporated by reference into NRC regulations as a requirement, then licensees and applicants must comply with that standard as set forth in the regulation. If the secondary reference has been endorsed in a regulatory guide as an acceptable approach for meeting an NRC requirement, then the standard constitutes a method acceptable to the NRC staff for meeting that regulatory requirement as described in the specific regulatory guide. If the secondary reference has neither been incorporated by reference into NRC regulations nor endorsed in a regulatory guide, then the secondary reference is neither a legally-binding requirement nor a "generic" NRC approved acceptable approach for meeting an NRC requirement. However, licensees and applicants may consider and use the information in the secondary reference, if appropriately justified, consistent with current regulatory practice, and consistent with applicable NRC requirements. | Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nuclear Power Plant Personnel, IAEA, Vienna, 1998, IAEA TECDOC 1057. ANALYSISDESIGNDEVELOPMENTIMPLEMENTATIONEVALUATION F E E D B A C KConduct Needs AnalysisConduct Job AnalysisConduct Task AnalysisConstruct TestsDevelop Job Performance MeasuresDetermine Training Setting Prepare Learning ObjectivesDevelop Test ItemsDescribe Trainees' Entry LevelOrganize Learning ObjectivesDevelop Training PlanSpecify Learning ActivitiesDevelop Training MaterialsSelect Training MethodsDevelop Lessons PlansConduct Training Program TryoutImplement Training PlanConduct TrainingConduct In-Training EvaluationDocument TrainingMonitor IndicatorsAnalyze InformationInitiate Corrective Actions DG-5043, Page 9 Harmonization with International Standards The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) has established a series of safety guides and standards constituting a high level of safety for protecting people and the environment. IAEA safety guides present international good practices that, while not required, increasingly reflect best practices to help users striving to achieve high levels of safety. Pertinent to this RG, IAEA Nuclear Security Series No. 13, "Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physi cal Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities (INFCIRC/255/Revision 5)," (Ref. 8) issued January 2011 contains recommended training guidance for nuclear security personnel. This RG incorporates similar training recommendations and is consistent with the basic safety principles provided in IAEA Nuclear Security Series No. 13. The systematic approach to training has been accepted by many nuclear utilities as the international best practice for the training and qualification of nuclear power plant personnel. The IAEA International Working Group on Nuclear Power Plant Personnel Training and Qualification has emphasized the importance of sharing the experience gained and lessons learned by Member States in the course of their application of SAT in order to establish and maintain the best possible training program for nuclear power plant personnel. The International Working Group thus recommended the preparation and publication of an IAEA technical report on expe riences in the use of SAT for nuclear power plant personnel. As a result of the working group recommendation, IAEA published "Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nu clear Power Plant Personnel," IAEA, Vienna, 1998, IAEA-Tecdoc-1057 (Ref. 9), which provides significant discussion of the SAT process. Documents Discussed in Staff Regulatory Guidance This regulatory guide endorses, in part, the use of one or more codes or standards developed by external organizations, and other third party guidance documents. These codes, standards and third party guidance documents may contain references to other codes, standards or third party guidance documents ("secondary references"). If a secondary reference has itself been incorporated by reference into NRC regulations as a requirement, then licensees and applicants must comply with that standard as set forth in the regulation. If the secondary reference has been endorsed in a regulatory guide as an acceptable approach for meeting an NRC requirement, then the standard constitutes a method acceptable to the NRC staff for meeting that regulatory requirement as described in the specific regulatory guide. If the secondary reference has neither been incorporated by reference into NRC regulations nor endorsed in a regulatory guide, then the secondary reference is neither a legally-binding requirement nor a "generic" NRC approved acceptable approach for meeting an NRC requirement. However, licensees and applicants may consider and use the information in the secondary reference, if appropriately justified, consistent with current regulatory practice, and consistent with applicable NRC requirements. | ||
DG-5043, Page 10 C. STAFF REGULATORY GUIDANCE | DG-5043, Page 10 C. STAFF REGULATORY GUIDANCE | ||
: 1. General Requirements and Introduction This RG endorses the methods described in NEI 03-12, Revision 7. The NRC staff has determined that the methods described in th e NEI document constitute procedures and processes generally acceptable to the NRC staff for demonstrating compliance with the regulatory requirements for requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. Licensees may use methods other than those provided in NEI 03-12, Revision 7, to meet the regulatory requirements. The NRC staff will review such methods and determine their acceptability on a case-by-case basis. Licensees and applicants should use this guidance to select, train, equip, test, qualify, and re-qualify armed and unarmed security personnel, watchpersons, and members of the licensee staff that support the licensee's security organization, to ensure that these individuals possess and maintain the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities effectively. During implementation of the requirements of Section VI of Appendix B to part 73, each site must consider site-specific conditions to ensure that the licensee's training and qualification program provides the site-specific knowledge, skills, and abilities that individuals need to effectively protect against the Design Basis Threat (DBT) of radiological sabotage. For the purposes of this document, the physical protection program refers to the prevention of significant core damage and spent fuel sabotage, implementation of the Commission-approved security plans (including the Training and Qualification Plan, licensee response strategy, and implementing procedures). As described in the Introduction to Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, power reactor licensees and applicants subject to 10 CFR 73.55 must comply with the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. | : 1. General Requirements and Introduction This RG endorses the methods described in NEI 03-12, Revision 7. The NRC staff has determined that the methods described in th e NEI document constitute procedures and processes generally acceptable to the NRC staff for demonstrating compliance with the regulatory requirements for requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. Licensees may use methods other than those provided in NEI 03-12, Revision 7, to meet the regulatory requirements. The NRC staff will review such methods and determine their acceptability on a case-by-case basis. Licensees and applicants should use this guidance to select, train, equip, test, qualify, and re-qualify armed and unarmed security personnel, watchpersons, and members of the licensee staff that support the licensee's security organization, to ensure that these individuals possess and maintain the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities effectively. During implementation of the requirements of Section VI of Appendix B to part 73, each site must consider site-specific conditions to ensure that the licensee's training and qualification program provides the site-specific knowledge, skills, and abilities that individuals need to effectively protect against the Design Basis Threat (DBT) of radiological sabotage. For the purposes of this document, the physical protection program refers to the prevention of significant core damage and spent fuel sabotage, implementation of the Commission-approved security plans (including the Training and Qualification Plan, licensee response strategy, and implementing procedures). As described in the Introduction to Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, power reactor licensees and applicants subject to 10 CFR 73.55 must comply with the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. | ||
The regulatory requirements discussed here, for an e ffective Training and Qualification plan include: (a) minimum employment suitability and qualification; (b) minimum physical qualifications; (c) minimum psychological qualifications; (d) duty and on-the-job training; (e) weapons and tactical response training, exercises, and drills; (f) demonstration of individual knowledge, skills, and abilities; (g) readiness of individuals to perform assigned duties and responsibilities; (h) maintenance of equipment; (i) maintenance and retention of program records; (j) the conduct of reviews and self-audits; and (k) performance evaluation program. Requalification is required annually on all attributes contained in a. through g. above. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that the personnel who are assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the Commission-approved security plans meet minimum training and qualification requirements to ensure each individual possesses the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform assigned duties and responsibilities. | The regulatory requirements discussed here, for an e ffective Training and Qualification plan include: (a) minimum employment suitability and qualification; (b) minimum physical qualifications; (c) minimum psychological qualifications; (d) duty and on-the-job training; (e) weapons and tactical response training, exercises, and drills; (f) demonstration of individual knowledge, skills, and abilities; (g) readiness of individuals to perform assigned duties and responsibilities; (h) maintenance of equipment; (i) maintenance and retention of program records; (j) the conduct of reviews and self-audits; and (k) performance evaluation program. Requalification is required annually on all attributes contained in a. through g. above. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that the personnel who are assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the Commission-approved security plans meet minimum training and qualification requirements to ensure each individual possesses the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform assigned duties and responsibilities. | ||
DG-5043, Page 11 1.1 The purpose of the Training and Qualification plan is to describe how each licensee will meet the minimum training and qualification requirements at its site and to establish the site-specific training and qualifications guidelines needed to ensure that each individual is properly suited, trained, equipped, and qualified to effectively perform assigned duties and responsibilities. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.5 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that the training and qualification program simulates, as closely as practicable, the specific conditions under which the indivi dual shall be required to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. 1.2 The licensee may consider establishing a methodology for identifying and accounting for site-specific conditions (e.g., independent spent fuel storage installation patrols, security owner controlled area (SOCA) vehicle search requirements, SOCA alarm response, or armored vehicle deployments). The identification of site-specific conditions will aid the licensee in determining the specific actions, duties, and responsibilities required to sustain the effectiveness of the physical protection program. Site-specific conditions must be accounted for in the development of the site training and qualification program. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.6 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee may not allow any individual to perform any security function, assume any security duties or responsibilities, or return to security duty until that individual satisfies the training and qualification requirements of the Commission-approved Training and Qualification pl an. (The Commission recognizes that knowledge, skills, and abilities are perishable or can be lost or forgotten over time.) As described in Section VI, paragraphs A.7, C.2, and D of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, to ensure that individuals maintain knowledge, skills , and abilities after their initial qualification, the licensee training and qualification program shall pr ovide for periodic requalification and remedial training, as needed. 1.3 When determining appropriate enhanced training frequencies, the licensee should consider the perishable nature of each knowledge, skill, or ability and give the greatest attention to those that are not used for long periods of time (i.e., between training cycles) but are critical when needed and are most likely to be necessary under high-stress conditions. As described in Section VI, paragraph H of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall develop and retain individual qualification records for each individual who receives training required by the Appendix. 1.4 In developing their Training and Qualification Plans, licensees should include within this plan the Knowledge Skills and Abilities Matrix (Attachment 1) or Critical Task Matrix provided in NEI 03-12, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]," as a means to ensure that all of the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B are satisfied. This matrix is composed of knowledge, skills or abilities or critical tasks upon which all individuals who perform physical protection and/or armed response duties must be trained and qualified. Each task is described in detail through sub-tasks found in this guidance and it is these sub-tasks that make up the complete task and upon which each person identified must maintain qualification and proficiency. 1.5 The first row of the matrix describes duty positions and functions within positions for members of the security organization. Licensees may choose to include in the matrix facility personnel who perform limited physical protection duties (e.g., package searches outside of the licensee protected area). The final two columns of the matrix must show the licensee's frequency of performance and the method of performance for each sub-task. Note that knowledge, skills or abilities that are specified in 10 CFR Part DG-5043, Page 12 73 to be completed annually and that must actually be performed successfully to be credited are not subject to change using the SAT process. The following codes are used in the "Performance Method" column of the matrix: (a) M-Must Perform: The individual must actually perform the indicated task under the supervision of a qualified individual. This element or critical task must be performed annually as specified in 10 CFR Part 73 and is not subject to change using the SAT process. (b) P-Perform: The individual performs the actual task. However, where there is an alternate approach listed, then that may be used to demonstrate adequate ability to perform the task (e.g., written examinations). (c) S-Simulate: The individual simulates, under realistic conditions, the completion of the indicated task. (d) D-Discuss: The individual must be orally examined to determine the adequacy of knowledge to perform the indicated task. 1.6 Where multiple codes are listed, the code listed first is the preferred option and should be followed, unless personnel safety or plant operations would be adversely affected. If this occurs, the departure should be documented providing the basis for invoking the alternate method. "Must Perform" steps should not be changed to "Simulate" or "Discuss." 1.7 Bracketed and unbracketed "X"-The brackets "[X]" identify the critical task as one that may be site-specific (may not apply to all sites). The "X" (unbracketed) identifies the responsible duty position/function and assigns the critical task to that duty position/function. 1.8 All critical tasks should be assigned to a duty position/function in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.7 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, training requirements must be scheduled at a nominal twelve (12) month periodicity. | DG-5043, Page 11 1.1 The purpose of the Training and Qualification plan is to describe how each licensee will meet the minimum training and qualification requirements at its site and to establish the site-specific training and qualifications guidelines needed to ensure that each individual is properly suited, trained, equipped, and qualified to effectively perform assigned duties and responsibilities. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.5 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that the training and qualification program simulates, as closely as practicable, the specific conditions under which the indivi dual shall be required to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. 1.2 The licensee may consider establishing a methodology for identifying and accounting for site-specific conditions (e.g., independent spent fuel storage installation patrols, security owner controlled area (SOCA) vehicle search requirements, SOCA alarm response, or armored vehicle deployments). The identification of site-specific conditions will aid the licensee in determining the specific actions, duties, and responsibilities required to sustain the effectiveness of the physical protection program. Site-specific conditions must be accounted for in the development of the site training and qualification program. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.6 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee may not allow any individual to perform any security function, assume any security duties or responsibilities, or return to security duty until that individual satisfies the training and qualification requirements of the Commission-approved Training and Qualification pl an. (The Commission recognizes that knowledge, skills, and abilities are perishable or can be lost or forgotten over time.) As described in Section VI, paragraphs A.7, C.2, and D of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, to ensure that individuals maintain knowledge, skills , and abilities after their initial qualification, the licensee training and qualification program shall pr ovide for periodic requalification and remedial training, as needed. 1.3 When determining appropriate enhanced training frequencies, the licensee should consider the perishable nature of each knowledge, skill, or ability and give the greatest attention to those that are not used for long periods of time (i.e., between training cycles) but are critical when needed and are most likely to be necessary under high-stress conditions. As described in Section VI, paragraph H of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall develop and retain individual qualification records for each individual who receives training required by the Appendix. 1.4 In developing their Training and Qualification Plans, licensees should include within this plan the Knowledge Skills and Abilities Matrix (Attachment 1) or Critical Task Matrix provided in NEI 03-12, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]," as a means to ensure that all of the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B are satisfied. This matrix is composed of knowledge, skills or abilities or critical tasks upon which all individuals who perform physical protection and/or armed response duties must be trained and qualified. Each task is described in detail through sub-tasks found in this guidance and it is these sub-tasks that make up the complete task and upon which each person identified must maintain qualification and proficiency. 1.5 The first row of the matrix describes duty positions and functions within positions for members of the security organization. Licensees may choose to include in the matrix facility personnel who perform limited physical protection duties (e.g., package searches outside of the licensee protected area). The final two columns of the matrix must show the licensee's frequency of performance and the method of performance for each sub-task. Note that knowledge, skills or abilities that are specified in 10 CFR Part DG-5043, Page 12 73 to be completed annually and that must actually be performed successfully to be credited are not subject to change using the SAT process. The following codes are used in the "Performance Method" column of the matrix: (a) M-Must Perform: The individual must actually perform the indicated task under the supervision of a qualified individual. This element or critical task must be performed annually as specified in 10 CFR Part 73 and is not subject to change using the SAT process. (b) P-Perform: The individual performs the actual task. However, where there is an alternate approach listed, then that may be used to demonstrate adequate ability to perform the task (e.g., written examinations). (c) S-Simulate: The individual simulates, under realistic conditions, the completion of the indicated task. (d) D-Discuss: The individual must be orally examined to determine the adequacy of knowledge to perform the indicated task. 1.6 Where multiple codes are listed, the code listed first is the preferred option and should be followed, unless personnel safety or plant operations would be adversely affected. If this occurs, the departure should be documented providing the basis for invoking the alternate method. "Must Perform" steps should not be changed to "Simulate" or "Discuss." 1.7 Bracketed and unbracketed "X"-The brackets "[X]" identify the critical task as one that may be site-specific (may not apply to all sites). The "X" (unbracketed) identifies the responsible duty position/function and assigns the critical task to that duty position/function. 1.8 All critical tasks should be assigned to a duty position/function in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.7 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, training requirements must be scheduled at a nominal twelve (12) month periodicity. | ||
: 2. Employment Suitability and Qualification As described in Section VI, paragraph B.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, individuals who are assigned security duties and responsibilities must meet minimum requirements to determine their initial and continued suitability (i.e., acceptability) and to ensure that they are and continue to be qualified (i.e., proven capable) to provide the required services before employment or assignment to the security organization. To accomplish this, the licensee training and qualification program shall ensure, as described in Section VI of Appendix B, that all personnel assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the Commission-approved security plans achieve and maintain an acceptable level of professional competence in the performance of those tasks. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. The licensee shall document each individual's qualification as a record of that individual's demonstrated abilities. | : 2. Employment Suitability and Qualification As described in Section VI, paragraph B.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, individuals who are assigned security duties and responsibilities must meet minimum requirements to determine their initial and continued suitability (i.e., acceptability) and to ensure that they are and continue to be qualified (i.e., proven capable) to provide the required services before employment or assignment to the security organization. To accomplish this, the licensee training and qualification program shall ensure, as described in Section VI of Appendix B, that all personnel assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the Commission-approved security plans achieve and maintain an acceptable level of professional competence in the performance of those tasks. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. The licensee shall document each individual's qualification as a record of that individual's demonstrated abilities. | ||
Line 240: | Line 240: | ||
2.10 Physical Requalification As described in Section VI, paragraph B.5 of A ppendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed and unarmed individuals assigned security duties and responsibilities must demonstrate the capability to meet the requirements for physical requalification at least annually. | 2.10 Physical Requalification As described in Section VI, paragraph B.5 of A ppendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed and unarmed individuals assigned security duties and responsibilities must demonstrate the capability to meet the requirements for physical requalification at least annually. | ||
2.11 Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraphs B.4.(b)(4) and B.5.(b), a qualified training instructor must document the physical qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. A security supervisor must attest to this qualification. 2.11.1 This record should be based on personal observation or input from (1) other qualified training organization personnel; (2) subject matter experts or field training officers; or (3) a medical, psychological, or other pr ofessional who is qualified to make such determinations consistent with NRC regulations and applicable local, state, and federal laws to provide suitability and qualification determinations for the category of information addressed by the record. | 2.11 Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraphs B.4.(b)(4) and B.5.(b), a qualified training instructor must document the physical qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. A security supervisor must attest to this qualification. 2.11.1 This record should be based on personal observation or input from (1) other qualified training organization personnel; (2) subject matter experts or field training officers; or (3) a medical, psychological, or other pr ofessional who is qualified to make such determinations consistent with NRC regulations and applicable local, state, and federal laws to provide suitability and qualification determinations for the category of information addressed by the record. | ||
DG-5043, Page 17 | DG-5043, Page 17 | ||
: 3. Duty Training As described in Section VI, paragraph C.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all personnel who are assigned to perform security-related duties or r esponsibilities shall be trained and qualified to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. | : 3. Duty Training As described in Section VI, paragraph C.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all personnel who are assigned to perform security-related duties or r esponsibilities shall be trained and qualified to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. | ||
Line 272: | Line 272: | ||
====3.3.1 Personnel==== | ====3.3.1 Personnel==== | ||
should be trained and qualified to perform only those KSA elements applicable to the security duty position they will fulfill as identified in Section 3.1 of this RG. Personnel shall be re-qualified consistent with Section VI, paragraph D.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 and the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. | should be trained and qualified to perform only those KSA elements applicable to the security duty position they will fulfill as identified in Section 3.1 of this RG. Personnel shall be re-qualified consistent with Section VI, paragraph D.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 and the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. | ||
DG-5043, Page 20 3.3.2 The licensee should use the same training methodology, delivery, and implementation to train and qualify non-security personnel on specific security-related KSAs as used to train security personnel in the performance of similar KSAs. | DG-5043, Page 20 3.3.2 The licensee should use the same training methodology, delivery, and implementation to train and qualify non-security personnel on specific security-related KSAs as used to train security personnel in the performance of similar KSAs. | ||
: 4. On-the-Job Training As described in the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee training and qualification program must include on-the-job training (OJT) performance standards and criteria to ensure that each individual demonstrates the requisite knowledge, skills, and abilities to effectively carry out assigned duties and responsibilities in accordance with the Commission-approved security plans, licensee protective strategy, and implementing procedures, before the individual is assigned the duty or responsibility. The licensee shall implement OJT to ensure that individuals have an adequate level of hands-on experience and knowledge in nuclear security functions before they are considered qualified and assigned duties and responsibilities. 4.1 Licensees may consider the use of a formalized OJT checklist to identify those duties and responsibilities associated with each duty position and job KSA. Typically, OJT is conducted by qualified security training instructors and field training officers and/or subject matter experts designated by the security training staff. 4.2 A security supervisor must attest to all OJT, and the records must be documented by a qualified training instructor and retained consistent with 10 CFR 73.55(q), "Records." As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, Individuals who are assigned duties and responsibilities related to implementing the safeguards contingency plan (e.g., response team leaders, alarm station operators, armed responders, and armed security officers designated as a component of the protective strategy) shall complete a minimum of 40 hours of OJT, in which each individual will be required to demonstrate his or her ability to effectively apply the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform assigned contingency duties and responsibilities in accordance with the approved safeguards contingency plan, other security plans, licensee protective strategies, and implementing procedures. OJT contingency activities and drills must, at a minimum, meet the criteria and objectives stated in regulations. 4.3 Trained and qualified security personnel reassigned or promoted to new or additional duties and responsibilities should receive OJT commensurate with the newly assigned duty positions. 4.4 Basic steps of an OJT training program using the SAT for each duty position include the following: (a) preparation/introduction, (b) demonstration, (c) practice, and (d) documentation of successful demonstration. 4.5 The licensee should identify each duty position separately within the OJT program. Each duty position should include applicable job KSAs or functions, to ensure that the trainee understands the knowledge, skills, and abilities required for effective implementation of the Commission-approved physical security plan, the safeguards contingency plan, and the licensee DG-5043, Page 21 implementing procedures. The KSAs associated with the following Primary Duty Positions and additional Site Specific Duty Positions are described in Attachment 1. Primary Duty Positions: (a) Armed security officer, (b) Armed Responder, (c) Central Alarm Station/Secondary Alarm Station Participants Alarm Station Operator, (d) Response Team Leader, and (e) Security Shift Supervisor. Additional Site Specify Duty Positions: (a) Access Control Officer, (b) Search Officer, (c) Escort Officer, and (d) Patrol Officer. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's OJT programs must include, but are not limited to, hands-on application of knowledge, skills, and abilities related to: (a) response team duties; (b) use of force; (c) tactical movement; (d) cover and concealment; (e) defensive positions; (f) fields-of-fire; (g) re-deployment; (h) communications (primary and alternate); (i) use of assigned equipment; (j) target sets; (k) tabletop drills; (l) command and control duties; and (m) licensee protective strategy. 4.6 Personnel assigned to provide OJT instruction and oversight should themselves possess and have demonstrated the requisite knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively meet the performance standards of the specific duties and r esponsibilities associated with the OJT. 4.7 On-the-Job Training Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, OJT must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. 4.7.1 OJT trainers and evaluators conducting the training should implement a methodology that ensures each KSA has been completed satisfactorily. Licensees should ensure the trainee's completion of each element and KSA of the OJT documentation. | : 4. On-the-Job Training As described in the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee training and qualification program must include on-the-job training (OJT) performance standards and criteria to ensure that each individual demonstrates the requisite knowledge, skills, and abilities to effectively carry out assigned duties and responsibilities in accordance with the Commission-approved security plans, licensee protective strategy, and implementing procedures, before the individual is assigned the duty or responsibility. The licensee shall implement OJT to ensure that individuals have an adequate level of hands-on experience and knowledge in nuclear security functions before they are considered qualified and assigned duties and responsibilities. 4.1 Licensees may consider the use of a formalized OJT checklist to identify those duties and responsibilities associated with each duty position and job KSA. Typically, OJT is conducted by qualified security training instructors and field training officers and/or subject matter experts designated by the security training staff. 4.2 A security supervisor must attest to all OJT, and the records must be documented by a qualified training instructor and retained consistent with 10 CFR 73.55(q), "Records." As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, Individuals who are assigned duties and responsibilities related to implementing the safeguards contingency plan (e.g., response team leaders, alarm station operators, armed responders, and armed security officers designated as a component of the protective strategy) shall complete a minimum of 40 hours of OJT, in which each individual will be required to demonstrate his or her ability to effectively apply the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform assigned contingency duties and responsibilities in accordance with the approved safeguards contingency plan, other security plans, licensee protective strategies, and implementing procedures. OJT contingency activities and drills must, at a minimum, meet the criteria and objectives stated in regulations. 4.3 Trained and qualified security personnel reassigned or promoted to new or additional duties and responsibilities should receive OJT commensurate with the newly assigned duty positions. 4.4 Basic steps of an OJT training program using the SAT for each duty position include the following: (a) preparation/introduction, (b) demonstration, (c) practice, and (d) documentation of successful demonstration. 4.5 The licensee should identify each duty position separately within the OJT program. Each duty position should include applicable job KSAs or functions, to ensure that the trainee understands the knowledge, skills, and abilities required for effective implementation of the Commission-approved physical security plan, the safeguards contingency plan, and the licensee DG-5043, Page 21 implementing procedures. The KSAs associated with the following Primary Duty Positions and additional Site Specific Duty Positions are described in Attachment 1. Primary Duty Positions: (a) Armed security officer, (b) Armed Responder, (c) Central Alarm Station/Secondary Alarm Station Participants Alarm Station Operator, (d) Response Team Leader, and (e) Security Shift Supervisor. Additional Site Specify Duty Positions: (a) Access Control Officer, (b) Search Officer, (c) Escort Officer, and (d) Patrol Officer. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's OJT programs must include, but are not limited to, hands-on application of knowledge, skills, and abilities related to: (a) response team duties; (b) use of force; (c) tactical movement; (d) cover and concealment; (e) defensive positions; (f) fields-of-fire; (g) re-deployment; (h) communications (primary and alternate); (i) use of assigned equipment; (j) target sets; (k) tabletop drills; (l) command and control duties; and (m) licensee protective strategy. 4.6 Personnel assigned to provide OJT instruction and oversight should themselves possess and have demonstrated the requisite knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively meet the performance standards of the specific duties and r esponsibilities associated with the OJT. 4.7 On-the-Job Training Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, OJT must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. 4.7.1 OJT trainers and evaluators conducting the training should implement a methodology that ensures each KSA has been completed satisfactorily. Licensees should ensure the trainee's completion of each element and KSA of the OJT documentation. | ||
The OJT trainers and evaluators conducting the training should document on the form that the trainee has completed the OJT for that section and has achieved the knowledge standard. Once completed, the form would typically be DG-5043, Page 22 submitted to the qualified security training instructor for final assessment and documentation and a security supervisor must attest to the training. 4.7.2 Licensees may consider creating OJT documentation that identifies the critical attributes associated with each KSA required to perform the duties and responsibilities of all duty positions. A duty position may comprise multiple KSAs, and its description should indicate the appropriate level of knowledge standard required for each KSA. The OJT documentation for individuals who are assigned duties and responsibilities related to implementing the safeguards contingency plan may apply any documented process to log time associated with the performance of OJT to ensure that the trainee has met the program minimum OJT time (40 hours). | The OJT trainers and evaluators conducting the training should document on the form that the trainee has completed the OJT for that section and has achieved the knowledge standard. Once completed, the form would typically be DG-5043, Page 22 submitted to the qualified security training instructor for final assessment and documentation and a security supervisor must attest to the training. 4.7.2 Licensees may consider creating OJT documentation that identifies the critical attributes associated with each KSA required to perform the duties and responsibilities of all duty positions. A duty position may comprise multiple KSAs, and its description should indicate the appropriate level of knowledge standard required for each KSA. The OJT documentation for individuals who are assigned duties and responsibilities related to implementing the safeguards contingency plan may apply any documented process to log time associated with the performance of OJT to ensure that the trainee has met the program minimum OJT time (40 hours). | ||
: 5. Performance Evaluation Program As described in the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall develop, implement and maintain a Performance Evaluation Program that is documented in procedures and describes how the li censee will demonstrate and assess the effectiveness of their onsite physical protection program and protective strategy, including the capability of the armed response team to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities during safeguards contingency events. To satisfy the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.3 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must conduct security tactical response drills and force-on-force (FOF) exercises designed to demonstrate and assess the effectiveness of the licensee's physical protection program, and contingency event response by all individuals with responsibilities for implementing the safeguards contingency plan. These drills and exercises are vital components of a comprehensive training program that enables the security force to gain experience and test personnel performance abilities in tactics, the site's protective strategy, and individually assigned duties and group activities within the contingency response plan. | : 5. Performance Evaluation Program As described in the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall develop, implement and maintain a Performance Evaluation Program that is documented in procedures and describes how the li censee will demonstrate and assess the effectiveness of their onsite physical protection program and protective strategy, including the capability of the armed response team to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities during safeguards contingency events. To satisfy the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.3 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must conduct security tactical response drills and force-on-force (FOF) exercises designed to demonstrate and assess the effectiveness of the licensee's physical protection program, and contingency event response by all individuals with responsibilities for implementing the safeguards contingency plan. These drills and exercises are vital components of a comprehensive training program that enables the security force to gain experience and test personnel performance abilities in tactics, the site's protective strategy, and individually assigned duties and group activities within the contingency response plan. | ||
Line 312: | Line 312: | ||
====5.3.3 Individuals==== | ====5.3.3 Individuals==== | ||
who do not participate as a player in scheduled annual FOF exercises because of illness, family leave, military deployment, or other circumstances can fulfill the annual FOF exercise participation requirement by one of the following: (a) completion of initial 40-hour protective strategy OJT and add itional site-specific protective strategy OJT for any additional qualified positions (alarm station operator, response team leader) as outlined in Section 4 of this guide, or (b) participation as a player in a limited scope FOF tactical exercise with the following characteristics: | who do not participate as a player in scheduled annual FOF exercises because of illness, family leave, military deployment, or other circumstances can fulfill the annual FOF exercise participation requirement by one of the following: (a) completion of initial 40-hour protective strategy OJT and add itional site-specific protective strategy OJT for any additional qualified positions (alarm station operator, response team leader) as outlined in Section 4 of this guide, or (b) participation as a player in a limited scope FOF tactical exercise with the following characteristics: | ||
(1) focuses only on the security response by using only the members of the response force and the mock adversary team sufficient to execute the scenario being tested; (2) credibly, realistically, and thoroughly tests a portion of the site protective strategy; (3) evaluates the key security program performance elements bounded by the DBT, as identified in Section 5.4.1.(a) through (f) of this guide; (4) includes appropriate additional program elements as identified in Section 5.4.2.(a) through (o) of this guide; (5) provides scenario controls and exercise controllers; and (6) includes a post-exercise critique and required exercise documentation. | (1) focuses only on the security response by using only the members of the response force and the mock adversary team sufficient to execute the scenario being tested; (2) credibly, realistically, and thoroughly tests a portion of the site protective strategy; (3) evaluates the key security program performance elements bounded by the DBT, as identified in Section 5.4.1.(a) through (f) of this guide; (4) includes appropriate additional program elements as identified in Section 5.4.2.(a) through (o) of this guide; (5) provides scenario controls and exercise controllers; and (6) includes a post-exercise critique and required exercise documentation. | ||
Note: Response team member (player) resources used to support and achieve the objective of the limited scope exercise may receive credit for their annual force-on-force exercise requirement. Licensees may consider using additional response team members who are trained and qualified on multiple-response team duties to assist them or augment them in meeting their participation requirements. | Note: Response team member (player) resources used to support and achieve the objective of the limited scope exercise may receive credit for their annual force-on-force exercise requirement. Licensees may consider using additional response team members who are trained and qualified on multiple-response team duties to assist them or augment them in meeting their participation requirements. | ||
Line 373: | Line 373: | ||
5.14 Training Design, Development, and Implementation As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all controllers shall complete controller training before participating as a controller in any drill or FOF exercise. As described in Section VI, paragraphs C.1.(b) and D.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, controllers shall complete initial or refresher training within the 12 months preceding their partic ipation in an annual FOF exercise to ensure currency of controller knowledge and familiarity with industry and station controller issues. 5.14.1 Licensees should develop controller training lesson plans and learning objectives for initial and refresher controller training. The controller training program should include, but not be limited to, the following: (a) procedures, guidelines, and references; (b) introduction/history; (c) safety and safe drill play; (d) communication (primary and alternate); (e) terminology; (f) command and control; (g) providing acquired information to players; (h) controller knowledge; (i) position and exercise pace; (j) rules of engagement and the use-of-force; (k) use and effects of explosives; (l) rules of conduct; (m) MILES equipment and limitations; (n) site exclusion areas; (o) temporary breaks in drill execution; (p) response team duties; (q) critique process; and (r) use and control of safeguards information. 5.14.2 The training, at a minimum, should include site-specific information (e.g., industrial safety requirements, weapons handling safety requirements, radiological safety, delay barrier movement timelines, and use of state laws related to use of deadly force). It should also include example DG-5043, Page 33 scenarios and/or practical demonstrations related to controller activities and calls such as the following: (a) drill timeline coordination (situational awareness and proper cue injects); (b) cover and concealment assessment; (c) MILES equipment usage and safety; (d) red (training) gun equipment usage, application, and safety; (e) use of assigned equipment; (f) target set equipment; (g) licensee protective strategy; (h) simulations related to gas masks; (i) simulations related to smoke or other chemical agents (e.g., CS gas (chlorobenzylidenemalononitrile), CN gas (chloroacetophenone)); (j) weapons/explosives capabilities and simulation methods; and (k) safety control. 5.14.3 Controllers should maintain proficiency by routine participation in station FOF exercises. 5.14.4 In addition to the described training, the selection of controllers for specific assignments must consider previous experience, skills, and physical abilities. For example, an adversary controller for a FOF exercise should have previously functioned in that position and have the physical capabilities to remain with the adversary force. The controller briefing for FOF exercises should include just-in-time training to remind controllers of specific situational calls, safety issues, and critical communications that they could encounter during the scenario. 5.14.5 The level of support needed for the conduct of a drill will be significantly less than for an exercise, depending on the complexity of the drill. The licensee may consider the following positions of responsibility and personnel when planning for drills and exercises: (a) Lead Controller - the exercise leader w ith an overall knowledge of security shift operations. This individual may be selected from the security staff or other organization as appropriate. (b) Controllers - designated individuals assigned to specific participants or areas that have the necessary training to observe, evaluate, and control the drill or exercise activities of their assigned participant or control area. (c) Adversaries - appropriately equipped and trained mock attackers with the required physical abilities to engage the licensee exercise participants in an armed attack to test their ability to defend against the DBT. Within the control and safety parameters established for the exercise, the adversary team will actually perform the normal physical and tactical activities (i.e., movement, communication, and carrying of simulated explosives and equipment) required to accomplish their assigned mission. To execute such operations and tactics, it is essential that adversary team members are trained in small-unit tactics and scenario planning. In addition, the adversary team should be provided with sufficient time to prepare for the mission (this includes scenario planning and rehearsal opportunities). Typically, the adversary force is from the licensee's security force, from other nuclear plants, or from local law enforcem ent tactical response units. | 5.14 Training Design, Development, and Implementation As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all controllers shall complete controller training before participating as a controller in any drill or FOF exercise. As described in Section VI, paragraphs C.1.(b) and D.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, controllers shall complete initial or refresher training within the 12 months preceding their partic ipation in an annual FOF exercise to ensure currency of controller knowledge and familiarity with industry and station controller issues. 5.14.1 Licensees should develop controller training lesson plans and learning objectives for initial and refresher controller training. The controller training program should include, but not be limited to, the following: (a) procedures, guidelines, and references; (b) introduction/history; (c) safety and safe drill play; (d) communication (primary and alternate); (e) terminology; (f) command and control; (g) providing acquired information to players; (h) controller knowledge; (i) position and exercise pace; (j) rules of engagement and the use-of-force; (k) use and effects of explosives; (l) rules of conduct; (m) MILES equipment and limitations; (n) site exclusion areas; (o) temporary breaks in drill execution; (p) response team duties; (q) critique process; and (r) use and control of safeguards information. 5.14.2 The training, at a minimum, should include site-specific information (e.g., industrial safety requirements, weapons handling safety requirements, radiological safety, delay barrier movement timelines, and use of state laws related to use of deadly force). It should also include example DG-5043, Page 33 scenarios and/or practical demonstrations related to controller activities and calls such as the following: (a) drill timeline coordination (situational awareness and proper cue injects); (b) cover and concealment assessment; (c) MILES equipment usage and safety; (d) red (training) gun equipment usage, application, and safety; (e) use of assigned equipment; (f) target set equipment; (g) licensee protective strategy; (h) simulations related to gas masks; (i) simulations related to smoke or other chemical agents (e.g., CS gas (chlorobenzylidenemalononitrile), CN gas (chloroacetophenone)); (j) weapons/explosives capabilities and simulation methods; and (k) safety control. 5.14.3 Controllers should maintain proficiency by routine participation in station FOF exercises. 5.14.4 In addition to the described training, the selection of controllers for specific assignments must consider previous experience, skills, and physical abilities. For example, an adversary controller for a FOF exercise should have previously functioned in that position and have the physical capabilities to remain with the adversary force. The controller briefing for FOF exercises should include just-in-time training to remind controllers of specific situational calls, safety issues, and critical communications that they could encounter during the scenario. 5.14.5 The level of support needed for the conduct of a drill will be significantly less than for an exercise, depending on the complexity of the drill. The licensee may consider the following positions of responsibility and personnel when planning for drills and exercises: (a) Lead Controller - the exercise leader w ith an overall knowledge of security shift operations. This individual may be selected from the security staff or other organization as appropriate. (b) Controllers - designated individuals assigned to specific participants or areas that have the necessary training to observe, evaluate, and control the drill or exercise activities of their assigned participant or control area. (c) Adversaries - appropriately equipped and trained mock attackers with the required physical abilities to engage the licensee exercise participants in an armed attack to test their ability to defend against the DBT. Within the control and safety parameters established for the exercise, the adversary team will actually perform the normal physical and tactical activities (i.e., movement, communication, and carrying of simulated explosives and equipment) required to accomplish their assigned mission. To execute such operations and tactics, it is essential that adversary team members are trained in small-unit tactics and scenario planning. In addition, the adversary team should be provided with sufficient time to prepare for the mission (this includes scenario planning and rehearsal opportunities). Typically, the adversary force is from the licensee's security force, from other nuclear plants, or from local law enforcem ent tactical response units. | ||
DG-5043, Page 34 (d) Insider - a knowledgeable individual who provides inside intelligence information to the mock adversaries. This individual could be a member of the plant technical staff, operations staff, or the security force. Before a drill or exercise, sufficient time should be allotted for the adversary team to gain intelligence information from the insider. (e) On-Duty Security Force - non-drill personnel who are used during an FOF tactical exercise to ensure that the exercise meets all requirements identified in the site-specific physical security plan and procedures. (f) Central Alarm Station (CAS)/Secondary Alarm Station (SAS) Participants - security force members stationed in the alarm stations who will perform CAS/SAS duties as drill participants during the drills and exercises. They will be briefe d on drill conditions as required. (g) Security Drill or Exercise Players - security responders who respond to the mock security contingency event (i.e., response team leaders, alarm station operators, armed responders, and armed security officers designated as a component of the protective strategy). (h) Plant Operations Participant(s) - individual(s) who would normally be assigned to a command and control function. Plant operations personnel should participate when significant simulated plant operations are expected from the scenario. Only plant operator actions listed in a target set should be used in determining whether an entire target set was compromised. If credit is taken for plant operator actions, an evaluation must be conducted to ensure that actions credited as part of the target set for mitigation or recovery are achievable under the postulated scenario conditions. 5.14.6 Licensees should ensure that sufficient documentation has been retained to demonstrate that training has been completed for exercise controllers. | DG-5043, Page 34 (d) Insider - a knowledgeable individual who provides inside intelligence information to the mock adversaries. This individual could be a member of the plant technical staff, operations staff, or the security force. Before a drill or exercise, sufficient time should be allotted for the adversary team to gain intelligence information from the insider. (e) On-Duty Security Force - non-drill personnel who are used during an FOF tactical exercise to ensure that the exercise meets all requirements identified in the site-specific physical security plan and procedures. (f) Central Alarm Station (CAS)/Secondary Alarm Station (SAS) Participants - security force members stationed in the alarm stations who will perform CAS/SAS duties as drill participants during the drills and exercises. They will be briefe d on drill conditions as required. (g) Security Drill or Exercise Players - security responders who respond to the mock security contingency event (i.e., response team leaders, alarm station operators, armed responders, and armed security officers designated as a component of the protective strategy). (h) Plant Operations Participant(s) - individual(s) who would normally be assigned to a command and control function. Plant operations personnel should participate when significant simulated plant operations are expected from the scenario. Only plant operator actions listed in a target set should be used in determining whether an entire target set was compromised. If credit is taken for plant operator actions, an evaluation must be conducted to ensure that actions credited as part of the target set for mitigation or recovery are achievable under the postulated scenario conditions. 5.14.6 Licensees should ensure that sufficient documentation has been retained to demonstrate that training has been completed for exercise controllers. | ||
5.15 Mock Adversary Force Member Training and Qualification Process 5.15.1 The following sections provide the training performance standards that are necessary to ensure that mock adversary force (MAF) performance is credible and sufficiently well-trained in order to participate in challenging FOF exercises that simulate, as closely as practicable, the specific conditions under which security personnel shall be required to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. These adversary performance standards are essential to creating realistic challenges as a basis for effective evaluation of a licensee's contingency response performance capabilities during FOF exercises. This secti on provides a basic overview of an acceptable process to ensure consistent development and impl ementation of MAF training and qualification. This section also describes the training feedback process to ensure continual improvement in both industry wide and site-specific training programs. The goals of the process are: | 5.15 Mock Adversary Force Member Training and Qualification Process 5.15.1 The following sections provide the training performance standards that are necessary to ensure that mock adversary force (MAF) performance is credible and sufficiently well-trained in order to participate in challenging FOF exercises that simulate, as closely as practicable, the specific conditions under which security personnel shall be required to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. These adversary performance standards are essential to creating realistic challenges as a basis for effective evaluation of a licensee's contingency response performance capabilities during FOF exercises. This secti on provides a basic overview of an acceptable process to ensure consistent development and impl ementation of MAF training and qualification. This section also describes the training feedback process to ensure continual improvement in both industry wide and site-specific training programs. The goals of the process are: | ||
(a) establish a common baseline for MAF knowledge, skills, and abilities; (b) identify and respond to site and industry MAF performance gaps and generic issues; (c) facilitate peer sharing of MAF resources for exercise activities; and (d) support continual improvement in controller performance. | (a) establish a common baseline for MAF knowledge, skills, and abilities; (b) identify and respond to site and industry MAF performance gaps and generic issues; (c) facilitate peer sharing of MAF resources for exercise activities; and (d) support continual improvement in controller performance. | ||
Line 379: | Line 379: | ||
5.16 Mock Adversary Force Member Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(2) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the MAF must replicate, as closely as possible, adversary ch aracteristics and capabilities of the DBT and be capable of exploiting and challenging the licensees protective strategy, personnel, command and control, and implementing procedures. 5.16.1 Each MAF member should have the knowledge, skills and abilities to do the following: (a) Demonstrate qualifications consistent with the requirements applicable to an Armed Responder as provided in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. The licensee should ensure that site-specific requirements needed to ensure individual MAF member performance or participation in site activities have been completed prior to performance or participation in any site activity. (b) Demonstrate competency in individual and team tactical movement under both day and night conditions and in various environmental conditions. (c) Demonstrate tactical communication skills (e.g., radio discipline, use of hand signals) that include providing timely and accurate information to the controllers to ensure consistent and orderly continuation of the drill or exercise in line with the scenario. This includes demonstration of techniques for authenticating human assets (e.g., authentication code, color-coded identification). (d) Understand the entire exercise scenario up to and including the DBT. This includes positioning and exercise/drill pace (timelines). | 5.16 Mock Adversary Force Member Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(2) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the MAF must replicate, as closely as possible, adversary ch aracteristics and capabilities of the DBT and be capable of exploiting and challenging the licensees protective strategy, personnel, command and control, and implementing procedures. 5.16.1 Each MAF member should have the knowledge, skills and abilities to do the following: (a) Demonstrate qualifications consistent with the requirements applicable to an Armed Responder as provided in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. The licensee should ensure that site-specific requirements needed to ensure individual MAF member performance or participation in site activities have been completed prior to performance or participation in any site activity. (b) Demonstrate competency in individual and team tactical movement under both day and night conditions and in various environmental conditions. (c) Demonstrate tactical communication skills (e.g., radio discipline, use of hand signals) that include providing timely and accurate information to the controllers to ensure consistent and orderly continuation of the drill or exercise in line with the scenario. This includes demonstration of techniques for authenticating human assets (e.g., authentication code, color-coded identification). (d) Understand the entire exercise scenario up to and including the DBT. This includes positioning and exercise/drill pace (timelines). | ||
DG-5043, Page 36 (e) Understand the application of the no-play area (to include radiation boundaries), areas described in Section 5.8 of this RG, and control measures. (f) Implement adversary tactics, techniques, a nd tactical decisions to include alternate avenues of approach, entry points, targets of opportunity, and control measures and tools required to facilitate entry. This should include door breaching and dynamic room entries. (g) Demonstrate the application of the use of topical analysis (water, woodland, industrial) and tactical maneuvers in each of these environments, taking advantage of cover and concealment opportunities. This may include the use of smoke. (h) Demonstrate the tactical use of drill/exercise equipment and weapons, including their effective range and capabilities (including specialized equipment and weapons). (i) Understand target identification, acquisition, and engagement by players, including rules of engagement. (j) Demonstrate the tactical use of hand-carried explosive devices and grenades on equipment and personnel and their effects upon detonation. This should include the placement of door charges and equipment charges. (k) Understand the effectiveness of body armor employed by players and its ballistic protection during the exercise. (l) Understand the rapid, violent, individual and small-unit movement, maneuver, and attack characteristics. (m) Understand the techniques to test/defeat detection and assessment sensors and barriers, including microwave (mono and biostatic), E-field, buried sensors (e.g., seismic), infrared (active and passive), and video motion detector. (n) Understand the use, effects, and dispersal characteristics of chemical agents and smoke grenades. (o) Understand the gas mask being used and its limitations in a stressful environment. (p) Understand operational planning including the analysis of a site-protective posture and in planning a mission with available resources (e.g., collusion with an insider). (q) Understand the differences between the various types of insiders and how to use each type of insider effectively to obtain intelligence information and collect data. (r) Understand the use of MILES equipment. (s) Understand red gun equipment usage, application and safety. (t) Demonstrate firearms knowledge, including safety, marksmanship, and manipulation skills with all weapons described in the DBT, or that might reasonably be expected to be deployed. Training should include a course of fire to enhance proficiency to shoot on the DG-5043, Page 37 move and while wearing a gas mask. Firearms training should also include manipulation and malfunction-clearing techniques, fire discipline, and precision-shooting techniques. (u) Demonstrate firearms proficiency with a minimum of 80-percent accuracy with all types of weapons that might reasonably be employed during FOF exercises. The five types of firearms qualification courses for MAF are (1) semi-automatic rifle (both daylight and reduced lighting); (2) submachine gun (both daylight and reduced lighting); (3) light machine gun; (4) precision rifle (both daylight and reduced lighting); and (5) a shoot-on-the-move course with weapons included in the DBT. Refer to Section 11, "Firearms Qualification Courses," of this document for acceptable firearms qualification courses. (v) Understand applicable site-specific delay barriers and movement timelines. (w) Understand the site's policy on the use of deadly force. (x) Understand exercise and site safety procedures including procedures, guidelines and references, and the procedures for the use and control of safeguards information. | DG-5043, Page 36 (e) Understand the application of the no-play area (to include radiation boundaries), areas described in Section 5.8 of this RG, and control measures. (f) Implement adversary tactics, techniques, a nd tactical decisions to include alternate avenues of approach, entry points, targets of opportunity, and control measures and tools required to facilitate entry. This should include door breaching and dynamic room entries. (g) Demonstrate the application of the use of topical analysis (water, woodland, industrial) and tactical maneuvers in each of these environments, taking advantage of cover and concealment opportunities. This may include the use of smoke. (h) Demonstrate the tactical use of drill/exercise equipment and weapons, including their effective range and capabilities (including specialized equipment and weapons). (i) Understand target identification, acquisition, and engagement by players, including rules of engagement. (j) Demonstrate the tactical use of hand-carried explosive devices and grenades on equipment and personnel and their effects upon detonation. This should include the placement of door charges and equipment charges. (k) Understand the effectiveness of body armor employed by players and its ballistic protection during the exercise. (l) Understand the rapid, violent, individual and small-unit movement, maneuver, and attack characteristics. (m) Understand the techniques to test/defeat detection and assessment sensors and barriers, including microwave (mono and biostatic), E-field, buried sensors (e.g., seismic), infrared (active and passive), and video motion detector. (n) Understand the use, effects, and dispersal characteristics of chemical agents and smoke grenades. (o) Understand the gas mask being used and its limitations in a stressful environment. (p) Understand operational planning including the analysis of a site-protective posture and in planning a mission with available resources (e.g., collusion with an insider). (q) Understand the differences between the various types of insiders and how to use each type of insider effectively to obtain intelligence information and collect data. (r) Understand the use of MILES equipment. (s) Understand red gun equipment usage, application and safety. (t) Demonstrate firearms knowledge, including safety, marksmanship, and manipulation skills with all weapons described in the DBT, or that might reasonably be expected to be deployed. Training should include a course of fire to enhance proficiency to shoot on the DG-5043, Page 37 move and while wearing a gas mask. Firearms training should also include manipulation and malfunction-clearing techniques, fire discipline, and precision-shooting techniques. (u) Demonstrate firearms proficiency with a minimum of 80-percent accuracy with all types of weapons that might reasonably be employed during FOF exercises. The five types of firearms qualification courses for MAF are (1) semi-automatic rifle (both daylight and reduced lighting); (2) submachine gun (both daylight and reduced lighting); (3) light machine gun; (4) precision rifle (both daylight and reduced lighting); and (5) a shoot-on-the-move course with weapons included in the DBT. Refer to Section 11, "Firearms Qualification Courses," of this document for acceptable firearms qualification courses. (v) Understand applicable site-specific delay barriers and movement timelines. (w) Understand the site's policy on the use of deadly force. (x) Understand exercise and site safety procedures including procedures, guidelines and references, and the procedures for the use and control of safeguards information. | ||
5.17 Mock Adversary Force Member Training Design, Development, and Implementation 5.17.1 The site adversary training program should build upon the following learning objectives: (a) The adversary force training, knowledge, and skills as described in 10 CFR 73.1; (b) Rules of engagement; and (c) Adversary characteristics as described in 10 CFR 73.1 and the DBT. 5.17.2 Licensees should develop MAF member training lesson plans and learning objectives for initial and refresher MAF training. (a) MAF training should include site-specific information, industrial safety requirements, weapons safety requirements, radiological safety, delay barrier movement timelines and use of deadly force. It should also include example scenarios and/or practical demonstrations related to MAF activities such as the following: | 5.17 Mock Adversary Force Member Training Design, Development, and Implementation 5.17.1 The site adversary training program should build upon the following learning objectives: (a) The adversary force training, knowledge, and skills as described in 10 CFR 73.1; (b) Rules of engagement; and (c) Adversary characteristics as described in 10 CFR 73.1 and the DBT. 5.17.2 Licensees should develop MAF member training lesson plans and learning objectives for initial and refresher MAF training. (a) MAF training should include site-specific information, industrial safety requirements, weapons safety requirements, radiological safety, delay barrier movement timelines and use of deadly force. It should also include example scenarios and/or practical demonstrations related to MAF activities such as the following: | ||
(1) drill timeline coordination (situational awareness and proper cue injects); | (1) drill timeline coordination (situational awareness and proper cue injects); | ||
(2) cover and concealment assessment; (3) individual and team tactical movement; (4) physical security systems and barriers; (5) any specialized equipment; (6) MILES equipment usage and safety; (7) red gun equipment usage and safety; (8) weapons/explosives capabilities and simulation methods; (9) and safety control. (b) All MAF members should complete this basic MAF training before participating in a FOF exercise. Completion of the training should be documented. To ensure currency of MAF knowledge and familiarity with industry and station controller issues, MAF members should complete documented initial or refresher training within the 12 months preceding their participation in an annual FOF exercise. Additionally, MAF members should maintain proficiency by routine participation in station FOF exercises. | (2) cover and concealment assessment; (3) individual and team tactical movement; (4) physical security systems and barriers; (5) any specialized equipment; (6) MILES equipment usage and safety; (7) red gun equipment usage and safety; (8) weapons/explosives capabilities and simulation methods; (9) and safety control. (b) All MAF members should complete this basic MAF training before participating in a FOF exercise. Completion of the training should be documented. To ensure currency of MAF knowledge and familiarity with industry and station controller issues, MAF members should complete documented initial or refresher training within the 12 months preceding their participation in an annual FOF exercise. Additionally, MAF members should maintain proficiency by routine participation in station FOF exercises. | ||
DG-5043, Page 38 (c) In addition to the described training, the selection of MAF members for specific assignments should consider previous experience, skills, and physical abilities. For example, a MAF member for an FOF exercise should have previously functioned in that position and should have the physical capabilities to remain with the MAF. The MAF briefing for FOF exercises should include just-in-time training to remind MAF members of specific situational calls, safety issues, and critical communications that they could encounter during the scenario. | DG-5043, Page 38 (c) In addition to the described training, the selection of MAF members for specific assignments should consider previous experience, skills, and physical abilities. For example, a MAF member for an FOF exercise should have previously functioned in that position and should have the physical capabilities to remain with the MAF. The MAF briefing for FOF exercises should include just-in-time training to remind MAF members of specific situational calls, safety issues, and critical communications that they could encounter during the scenario. | ||
5.18 Conduct of Drills and Exercises 5.18.1 Safety during the conduct of drills and exercises is a significant element of the security-training program. Regardless of the scale of the evolution, preparation, coordination, and control are key elements to the effectiveness of a drill or exercise. 5.18.2 To ensure exercise safety and provide consistent and effective performance, the licensee should consider the following criteria when conducting drills or exercises: (a) Weapons/Ammunition Safety-Weapons and ammunition safety is paramount. It is crucial that proper attention is given during exercise planning and performance to ensure that drill participants do not carry or have available live-fire weapons or ammunition. The adversaries and the response force team should use training weapons that are easily identifiable as such. Weapons should be marked so they can be easily identified as training weapons. Live-fire weapons should not be used during drills or exercises. If a live-fire weapon is used, it should be rendered safe and incapable of firing. (b) Exercise Participant Safety-The following criteria should be part of the safety briefing for exercise participants: | 5.18 Conduct of Drills and Exercises 5.18.1 Safety during the conduct of drills and exercises is a significant element of the security-training program. Regardless of the scale of the evolution, preparation, coordination, and control are key elements to the effectiveness of a drill or exercise. 5.18.2 To ensure exercise safety and provide consistent and effective performance, the licensee should consider the following criteria when conducting drills or exercises: (a) Weapons/Ammunition Safety-Weapons and ammunition safety is paramount. It is crucial that proper attention is given during exercise planning and performance to ensure that drill participants do not carry or have available live-fire weapons or ammunition. The adversaries and the response force team should use training weapons that are easily identifiable as such. Weapons should be marked so they can be easily identified as training weapons. Live-fire weapons should not be used during drills or exercises. If a live-fire weapon is used, it should be rendered safe and incapable of firing. (b) Exercise Participant Safety-The following criteria should be part of the safety briefing for exercise participants: | ||
(1) Physical contact should occur only after a participant has been disabled, surrendered, or neutralized and only with the approval of a controller. | (1) Physical contact should occur only after a participant has been disabled, surrendered, or neutralized and only with the approval of a controller. | ||
(2) No attempt should be made to disarm an opponent in any way. | (2) No attempt should be made to disarm an opponent in any way. | ||
(3) All ascents and descents from elevated positions will involve a ladder, stairway, or other safe method. | (3) All ascents and descents from elevated positions will involve a ladder, stairway, or other safe method. | ||
(4) There should be no jumping from one elevation to another. | (4) There should be no jumping from one elevation to another. | ||
(5) All exercise controllers and participants will be briefed on the radiological and industrial safety restrictions and concerns. | (5) All exercise controllers and participants will be briefed on the radiological and industrial safety restrictions and concerns. | ||
(6) Participants should monitor thei r own condition for overexertion. | (6) Participants should monitor thei r own condition for overexertion. | ||
(7) Anyone who observes an injured or ill participant should immediately call a timeout, render assistance, and notify a c ontroller/evaluator or call the CAS or SAS. (8) The lead controller should discuss plant and weather conditions before the start of each exercise and address limitations on running, jogging, or walking. | (7) Anyone who observes an injured or ill participant should immediately call a timeout, render assistance, and notify a c ontroller/evaluator or call the CAS or SAS. (8) The lead controller should discuss plant and weather conditions before the start of each exercise and address limitations on running, jogging, or walking. | ||
(9) All participants should use personal protective equipment unless otherwise determined by a controller. | (9) All participants should use personal protective equipment unless otherwise determined by a controller. | ||
(c) Initiation and Termination - The lead controller should initiate the exercise with the concurrence of the on duty security supervisor and operations shift manager/supervisor, if applicable. The initiation of the exercise should be communicated on appropriate radio frequencies and/or the plant paging system. The lead controller should conduct radio checks as appropriate to ensure that all controllers are prepared for the initiation or DG-5043, Page 39 resumption of the drill or exercise. The exercise will be terminated when one or more of the following occur: | |||
(1) all adversaries are neutralized or have given up the mission; (2) a complete target set has been destroyed; (3) it is determined that an actual condition exists that cannot be quickly corrected or is of such magnitude as to preclude the continuation of the drill; (4) a condition adverse to personnel or plant safety exists; or (5) the lead controller directs that the exercise stop. 5.18.3 Participant Responsibilities The licensees should consider including the following criteria in the briefing for participants on their duties and responsibilities associated with the exercise: (a) Each participant is personally responsible for his or her safe conduct. (b) Each participant should monitor his or her condition. (c) Participants who hear an announcement to stop the exercise should immediately stop all exercise activity and maintain their position until they receive additional instructions. (d) Participants will comply with all plant operations, security, and radiation protection requirements. The pre-exercise safety briefing will address radiation protection entry and exit procedures. (e) All participants should follow controller commands and requests. Participants should maintain contact with their assigned controller. If during the conduct of the drill or exercise the participant identifies that there is no longer a controller monitoring drill or exercise activity, they should stop and contact the lead controller. The post-exercise critique should address differences in interpretations of scenario evolutions. (f) After the conclusion of the drill or exercise a nd before the critique, all participants should have an opportunity to document their participation in the drill or exercise so that their actions may be discussed and reviewed in the critique process. 5.18.4 Rules of Conduct The licensees should consider the following rules of conduct as part of the briefing for participants on the conduct of the drill or exercise: (a) Safety is paramount. The safety of participants, controllers/evaluators, plant personnel, and the plant should never be compromised. (b) If identifying clothing or items such as armbands are assigned, participants should wear them at all times during the drill or exercise. (c) Participants will follow all instructions given by a controller. (d) Any participant may stop the drill or exercise for safety reasons. The lead controller should determine the resumption of the drill or exercise. | (1) all adversaries are neutralized or have given up the mission; (2) a complete target set has been destroyed; (3) it is determined that an actual condition exists that cannot be quickly corrected or is of such magnitude as to preclude the continuation of the drill; (4) a condition adverse to personnel or plant safety exists; or (5) the lead controller directs that the exercise stop. 5.18.3 Participant Responsibilities The licensees should consider including the following criteria in the briefing for participants on their duties and responsibilities associated with the exercise: (a) Each participant is personally responsible for his or her safe conduct. (b) Each participant should monitor his or her condition. (c) Participants who hear an announcement to stop the exercise should immediately stop all exercise activity and maintain their position until they receive additional instructions. (d) Participants will comply with all plant operations, security, and radiation protection requirements. The pre-exercise safety briefing will address radiation protection entry and exit procedures. (e) All participants should follow controller commands and requests. Participants should maintain contact with their assigned controller. If during the conduct of the drill or exercise the participant identifies that there is no longer a controller monitoring drill or exercise activity, they should stop and contact the lead controller. The post-exercise critique should address differences in interpretations of scenario evolutions. (f) After the conclusion of the drill or exercise a nd before the critique, all participants should have an opportunity to document their participation in the drill or exercise so that their actions may be discussed and reviewed in the critique process. 5.18.4 Rules of Conduct The licensees should consider the following rules of conduct as part of the briefing for participants on the conduct of the drill or exercise: (a) Safety is paramount. The safety of participants, controllers/evaluators, plant personnel, and the plant should never be compromised. (b) If identifying clothing or items such as armbands are assigned, participants should wear them at all times during the drill or exercise. (c) Participants will follow all instructions given by a controller. (d) Any participant may stop the drill or exercise for safety reasons. The lead controller should determine the resumption of the drill or exercise. | ||
DG-5043, Page 40 (e) If the drill or exercise is temporarily halted, all participants should stop at their locations, cease all firing and movement, and wait for direction. (f) Once neutralized, a participant should immediately cease all firing, movement, and communications. The participant should remain in place until the drill or exercise is terminated or the controller directs otherwise. (g) Alarm station operators and/or participants may not engage in pre-drill or pre-exercise intelligence gathering. Participants who attempt to circumvent the rules will be removed from the drill or exercise. (h) The controllers/evaluators observing and evaluating the activity should determine all neutralizations. Training equipment, such as MILES gear, can be used to assist in this determination. (i) At the conclusion of each drill or exercise, par ticipants should ensure that all radiological boundary controls are intact and that security doors involved in the drill or exercise are secure. (j) The announcement "this is a drill" should be transmitted immediately preceding the first drill activity once the drill window is opened. This announcement should also be transmitted periodically throughout the drill and before any drill event after a long period of inactivity. (k) To be successful during an exercise, the MAF should actually perform or simulate all actions necessary (including placing simulated explosives at doors, gates, and inside the target areas). If possible, the MAF should perform or simulate all actions necessary (including placing explosives) at the specific location where the equipment damage is intended to occur. If the actual equipment cannot be reached, the MAF may provide specific detail as to exactly where it intended to perform the action (or place the explosive and the amount to be placed). (l) On-duty security force personnel should not assist or impede the participants in any fashion unless the circumstance pertains to a safety-related issue or to a real security situation or response. (m) Participants should observe the deadly force rules of engagement as authorized by federal or state law and as defined by station policy. In addition, Section 8.2 of this RG provides further guidance regarding the proper use of force within the force continuum. (n) At no time should drill or exercise participant(s) manipulate any plant component. It should be stressed that extreme caution is to be used near plant equipment. Backpacks, mock weaponry, and associated drill or exercise equipment should be kept clear of plant equipment. (o) Controllers/evaluators ensure that drill or exercise participants do not voluntarily or accidentally touch plant equipment, controls, or instrumentation. If at any time inadvertent contact is made with plant equipment, controls, or instrumentation, the controller/evaluator should immediately notify operations of the incident. | DG-5043, Page 40 (e) If the drill or exercise is temporarily halted, all participants should stop at their locations, cease all firing and movement, and wait for direction. (f) Once neutralized, a participant should immediately cease all firing, movement, and communications. The participant should remain in place until the drill or exercise is terminated or the controller directs otherwise. (g) Alarm station operators and/or participants may not engage in pre-drill or pre-exercise intelligence gathering. Participants who attempt to circumvent the rules will be removed from the drill or exercise. (h) The controllers/evaluators observing and evaluating the activity should determine all neutralizations. Training equipment, such as MILES gear, can be used to assist in this determination. (i) At the conclusion of each drill or exercise, par ticipants should ensure that all radiological boundary controls are intact and that security doors involved in the drill or exercise are secure. (j) The announcement "this is a drill" should be transmitted immediately preceding the first drill activity once the drill window is opened. This announcement should also be transmitted periodically throughout the drill and before any drill event after a long period of inactivity. (k) To be successful during an exercise, the MAF should actually perform or simulate all actions necessary (including placing simulated explosives at doors, gates, and inside the target areas). If possible, the MAF should perform or simulate all actions necessary (including placing explosives) at the specific location where the equipment damage is intended to occur. If the actual equipment cannot be reached, the MAF may provide specific detail as to exactly where it intended to perform the action (or place the explosive and the amount to be placed). (l) On-duty security force personnel should not assist or impede the participants in any fashion unless the circumstance pertains to a safety-related issue or to a real security situation or response. (m) Participants should observe the deadly force rules of engagement as authorized by federal or state law and as defined by station policy. In addition, Section 8.2 of this RG provides further guidance regarding the proper use of force within the force continuum. (n) At no time should drill or exercise participant(s) manipulate any plant component. It should be stressed that extreme caution is to be used near plant equipment. Backpacks, mock weaponry, and associated drill or exercise equipment should be kept clear of plant equipment. (o) Controllers/evaluators ensure that drill or exercise participants do not voluntarily or accidentally touch plant equipment, controls, or instrumentation. If at any time inadvertent contact is made with plant equipment, controls, or instrumentation, the controller/evaluator should immediately notify operations of the incident. | ||
Line 400: | Line 400: | ||
5.20 Critique and Evaluation Material As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(g) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each tactical response drill and FOF exercise shall include a documented post-exercise critique in which participants identify failures, deficiencies, or other findings in performance, plans, equipment and strategies. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(i) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, findings, deficiencies, and failures identified during tactical response drills and FOF exercises that adversely affect or decrease the effectiveness of the protective strategy and physical protection program shall be entered into the licensee's corrective action program to ensure that timely corrections are made to the appropriate program areas. 5.20.1 The following criteria should be considered when developing critique material for drill or exercise evaluation purposes: (a) Each position and participant should be evaluated. (b) The ability of each participant to satisfy the performance criteria associated with his or her position should be evaluated. (c) Criteria not evaluated should be indicated on the critique. Evaluators should consider using "NE" (not evaluated) instead of "NA" (not applicable). (d) The form should indicate whether the individual satisfied the performance criteria. (e) Any issues identified as a result of the individual's performance should be documented. Issues should be correlated to their respective evaluation standards. (f) Controller/evaluator performance evaluation comments should be solicited. (g) The critique material should give participants the opportunity to critique their own actions and to provide feedback on the drill or exercise. (h) The critique should include an overall assessment of the success of the drill or exercise in meeting the key program elements identified. (i) Security equipment performance and security system performance should be evaluated as it relates to the licensee's protective strategy. | 5.20 Critique and Evaluation Material As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(g) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each tactical response drill and FOF exercise shall include a documented post-exercise critique in which participants identify failures, deficiencies, or other findings in performance, plans, equipment and strategies. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(i) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, findings, deficiencies, and failures identified during tactical response drills and FOF exercises that adversely affect or decrease the effectiveness of the protective strategy and physical protection program shall be entered into the licensee's corrective action program to ensure that timely corrections are made to the appropriate program areas. 5.20.1 The following criteria should be considered when developing critique material for drill or exercise evaluation purposes: (a) Each position and participant should be evaluated. (b) The ability of each participant to satisfy the performance criteria associated with his or her position should be evaluated. (c) Criteria not evaluated should be indicated on the critique. Evaluators should consider using "NE" (not evaluated) instead of "NA" (not applicable). (d) The form should indicate whether the individual satisfied the performance criteria. (e) Any issues identified as a result of the individual's performance should be documented. Issues should be correlated to their respective evaluation standards. (f) Controller/evaluator performance evaluation comments should be solicited. (g) The critique material should give participants the opportunity to critique their own actions and to provide feedback on the drill or exercise. (h) The critique should include an overall assessment of the success of the drill or exercise in meeting the key program elements identified. (i) Security equipment performance and security system performance should be evaluated as it relates to the licensee's protective strategy. | ||
DG-5043, Page 43 5.20.2 At the conclusion of a drill or exercise, the lead controller should facilitate the critique. All controllers/evaluators, adversaries, and participants should normally participate. These critiques give the participants the opportunity to receive direct feedback from the controllers/evaluators. In addition, they allow the participants to provide direct input to the critique process. (a) At the conclusion of a drill or exercise, the lead controller should facilitate the critique. | DG-5043, Page 43 5.20.2 At the conclusion of a drill or exercise, the lead controller should facilitate the critique. All controllers/evaluators, adversaries, and participants should normally participate. These critiques give the participants the opportunity to receive direct feedback from the controllers/evaluators. In addition, they allow the participants to provide direct input to the critique process. (a) At the conclusion of a drill or exercise, the lead controller should facilitate the critique. | ||
All controllers/evaluators, adversaries, and participants should normally participate. These critiques give the participants the opportunity to receive direct feedback from the controllers/evaluators. In addition, they allow the participants to provide direct input to the critique process. The following format can be an effective means of performing critiques: | All controllers/evaluators, adversaries, and participants should normally participate. These critiques give the participants the opportunity to receive direct feedback from the controllers/evaluators. In addition, they allow the participants to provide direct input to the critique process. The following format can be an effective means of performing critiques: | ||
(1) All participants in the drill or exercise should attend. | (1) All participants in the drill or exercise should attend. | ||
(2) The scenario, including goals and objectives, should be reviewed with the participants. A projector can be useful in providing this overview. | (2) The scenario, including goals and objectives, should be reviewed with the participants. A projector can be useful in providing this overview. | ||
(b) Each participant and corresponding controller/evaluator who had an engagement during the drill or has pertinent feedback will summarize his or her actions and should consider the following when providing an action summary: | |||
(1) If a participant took action that resulted in his or her neutralization or the neutralization of an adversary or adversar ies, then the participant and controller report should provide specific details of the actions taken. The participant/controller information should include engagement distance, number of adversaries engaged, number of rounds fired and number of seconds, the probability of neutralizing the adversary (high, medium, or low), and if the neutralization(s) resulted from MILES. | (1) If a participant took action that resulted in his or her neutralization or the neutralization of an adversary or adversar ies, then the participant and controller report should provide specific details of the actions taken. The participant/controller information should include engagement distance, number of adversaries engaged, number of rounds fired and number of seconds, the probability of neutralizing the adversary (high, medium, or low), and if the neutralization(s) resulted from MILES. | ||
(2) If a participant took action that resulted in friendly fire, then the participant and controller report should provide speci fic details of the actions. | (2) If a participant took action that resulted in friendly fire, then the participant and controller report should provide speci fic details of the actions. | ||
(3) A controller/evaluator whose participant had no interaction with the adversary force and had no effect on the outcome of the drill or exercise should participate (provide lessons learned feedback) to the extent of his or her direct observation | (3) A controller/evaluator whose participant had no interaction with the adversary force and had no effect on the outcome of the drill or exercise should participate (provide lessons learned feedback) to the extent of his or her direct observation | ||
of the exercise or drill. | of the exercise or drill. | ||
(4) A controller/evaluator whose participant was actively involved in the outcome of the drill or exercise and who interdicted the adversaries should concur with the player's comments if applicable. If the controller/evaluator does not concur, he or she should provide details. | (4) A controller/evaluator whose participant was actively involved in the outcome of the drill or exercise and who interdicted the adversaries should concur with the player's comments if applicable. If the controller/evaluator does not concur, he or she should provide details. | ||
(5) At the conclusion of critiques, the lead c ontroller should review the results of the drill or exercise and discuss the positive and negative aspects of the activities. | (5) At the conclusion of critiques, the lead c ontroller should review the results of the drill or exercise and discuss the positive and negative aspects of the activities. | ||
(6) During the review of the results, participants should be asked for suggestions for correcting issues and concerns, and these suggestions should be discussed. | (6) During the review of the results, participants should be asked for suggestions for correcting issues and concerns, and these suggestions should be discussed. | ||
(7) As a conclusion to the critique, the lead controller should review the goals, objectives, and key program elements of the drill or exercise and discuss how each was or was not met. | (7) As a conclusion to the critique, the lead controller should review the goals, objectives, and key program elements of the drill or exercise and discuss how each was or was not met. | ||
DG-5043, Page 44 (8) Any participant or controller/evaluator that identifies a deficiency in the licensee's protective strategy (e.g., equipment, system or performance failure), regardless whether that participant took action in the drill or exercise, should provide specific details during the critique. | DG-5043, Page 44 (8) Any participant or controller/evaluator that identifies a deficiency in the licensee's protective strategy (e.g., equipment, system or performance failure), regardless whether that participant took action in the drill or exercise, should provide specific details during the critique. | ||
Line 426: | Line 426: | ||
===6.3 Annual=== | ===6.3 Annual=== | ||
Written Examination As described in Section VI, paragraph D.1.(b)(3) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall administer an annual examination for armed individuals to verify that they have the required knowledge, skills, and abilities to carry out assigned duties and responsibilities as an armed member of the security organization as identified in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. Personnel must achieve a minimum score of 80 percent to demonstrate an acceptable understanding of assigned duties and responsibilities. | Written Examination As described in Section VI, paragraph D.1.(b)(3) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall administer an annual examination for armed individuals to verify that they have the required knowledge, skills, and abilities to carry out assigned duties and responsibilities as an armed member of the security organization as identified in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. Personnel must achieve a minimum score of 80 percent to demonstrate an acceptable understanding of assigned duties and responsibilities. | ||
6.3.1 This examination should, at a minimum, include the following elements: | 6.3.1 This examination should, at a minimum, include the following elements: | ||
(1) role of security personnel in supporting safe operations of the facility; (2) the use of deadly force, including the principles involved in the application, escalation, and de-escalation of force; (3) 10 CFR Part 73 requirements for the protection of safeguards information; (4) the authority of private security personnel; (5) knowledge of who has power of arrest and authority to detain; (6) authority to search individuals and seize property; (7) offsite law enforcement response; (8) tactics and force that an adversary group might use to achieve its objectives; and (9) response force deployment, tactical movement withdrawal, and use of support fire. 6.4 Requalification Section VI, paragraph D.1.(a), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 requires armed and unarmed individuals to requalify at least annually, consistent with the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. | (1) role of security personnel in supporting safe operations of the facility; (2) the use of deadly force, including the principles involved in the application, escalation, and de-escalation of force; (3) 10 CFR Part 73 requirements for the protection of safeguards information; (4) the authority of private security personnel; (5) knowledge of who has power of arrest and authority to detain; (6) authority to search individuals and seize property; (7) offsite law enforcement response; (8) tactics and force that an adversary group might use to achieve its objectives; and (9) response force deployment, tactical movement withdrawal, and use of support fire. 6.4 Requalification Section VI, paragraph D.1.(a), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 requires armed and unarmed individuals to requalify at least annually, consistent with the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. | ||
6.4.1 The periodicity of task requalification may be determined by applying an analysis of the training program similar to the SAT process. Personnel may demonstrate and be evaluated on knowledge, skills, and abilities during routine performance as part of normal duties or by requalification in a manner similar to the initial qualification, with the exception of M (Must Perform) elements. The individual should actually perform the indicated task under the supervision of a qualified individual. This element or critical task must be performed annually and is not subject to change using the SAT process. | 6.4.1 The periodicity of task requalification may be determined by applying an analysis of the training program similar to the SAT process. Personnel may demonstrate and be evaluated on knowledge, skills, and abilities during routine performance as part of normal duties or by requalification in a manner similar to the initial qualification, with the exception of M (Must Perform) elements. The individual should actually perform the indicated task under the supervision of a qualified individual. This element or critical task must be performed annually and is not subject to change using the SAT process. | ||
DG-5043, Page 47 6.4.2 If unable to achieve the requisite requalification, the individual must not return to security duties until he or she has successfully remediated. Requalification completion must be documented in the individual's training record. | DG-5043, Page 47 6.4.2 If unable to achieve the requisite requalification, the individual must not return to security duties until he or she has successfully remediated. Requalification completion must be documented in the individual's training record. | ||
6.4.3 The qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. As described in Section VI, paragraphs A.7 and D.1.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requalification requirements must be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity (also referred to as the baseline qualification date). The actual scheduled da te (baseline) for the requalification of an annual requirement can be changed (re-baselined) by conducting training earlier than the originally scheduled (baseline) date. The next scheduled date for requalification, from that point forward, must be nominally 12 months from the new (re-baselined) qualification date. Licensees must ensure that, when applying this short-cycle provision to the training schedule for their annual requirements, their schedule for weapons range activities still meets the nominal 4-month periodicity identified in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. | 6.4.3 The qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. As described in Section VI, paragraphs A.7 and D.1.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requalification requirements must be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity (also referred to as the baseline qualification date). The actual scheduled da te (baseline) for the requalification of an annual requirement can be changed (re-baselined) by conducting training earlier than the originally scheduled (baseline) date. The next scheduled date for requalification, from that point forward, must be nominally 12 months from the new (re-baselined) qualification date. Licensees must ensure that, when applying this short-cycle provision to the training schedule for their annual requirements, their schedule for weapons range activities still meets the nominal 4-month periodicity identified in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. | ||
: 7. Certifications of Instructors and Armorers | : 7. Certifications of Instructors and Armorers | ||
Line 454: | Line 454: | ||
As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armorers, whether licensee employees or a contracted service, must be certified. If the licensee does not employ a certified armorer, it may send the weapons to a certified offsite armorer for required maintenance and certification of operability. | As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armorers, whether licensee employees or a contracted service, must be certified. If the licensee does not employ a certified armorer, it may send the weapons to a certified offsite armorer for required maintenance and certification of operability. | ||
DG-5043, Page 49 | DG-5043, Page 49 | ||
: 8. Weapons Training | : 8. Weapons Training | ||
Line 506: | Line 506: | ||
8.12 Weapons Familiarization As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(d)(11) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the objective of firearms familiarization training is to conduct initial and annual firearms drills and courses of fire to improve the skill and ability of armed security personnel. 8.12.1 Firearms familiarization, at a minimum, should include the following: (a) firearms handling drills; (b) clearing, loading, unloading, and reloading procedures for each firearm; (c) training for engaging potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event; (d) drills that demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another; (e) drills that demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds); (f) cover and concealment drills; (g) nonlethal weapons training and drills; and (h) cleaning and maintenance procedures for each firearm. 8.12.2 The licensee should also consider these topics: (a) weapons nomenclature (safety features, cer tain design characteristics such as gas operating system); (b) weapons functioning (cycle of operation, the action of all working parts); (c) dry-fire range familiarization (stressing range safety procedures); (d) live-fire range familiarization (e.g., familiarization with the report and recoil of the weapon); (e) firing positions (e.g., prone, kneeling, sitting); and (f) timed-fire exercises (e.g., from ready, carry, or holster using firing positions such as prone or kneeling). 8.12.3 Advanced training for weapons familiarization should be considered for all assigned weapons systems and should include the following advanced skills: (a) rapid fire techniques; (b) non-dominant (support) hand fire; DG-5043, Page 54 (c) shooting while moving (laterally, advancing, and evading); (d) shooting from elevated positions; and (e) firing with field gas mask donned. | 8.12 Weapons Familiarization As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(d)(11) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the objective of firearms familiarization training is to conduct initial and annual firearms drills and courses of fire to improve the skill and ability of armed security personnel. 8.12.1 Firearms familiarization, at a minimum, should include the following: (a) firearms handling drills; (b) clearing, loading, unloading, and reloading procedures for each firearm; (c) training for engaging potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event; (d) drills that demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another; (e) drills that demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds); (f) cover and concealment drills; (g) nonlethal weapons training and drills; and (h) cleaning and maintenance procedures for each firearm. 8.12.2 The licensee should also consider these topics: (a) weapons nomenclature (safety features, cer tain design characteristics such as gas operating system); (b) weapons functioning (cycle of operation, the action of all working parts); (c) dry-fire range familiarization (stressing range safety procedures); (d) live-fire range familiarization (e.g., familiarization with the report and recoil of the weapon); (e) firing positions (e.g., prone, kneeling, sitting); and (f) timed-fire exercises (e.g., from ready, carry, or holster using firing positions such as prone or kneeling). 8.12.3 Advanced training for weapons familiarization should be considered for all assigned weapons systems and should include the following advanced skills: (a) rapid fire techniques; (b) non-dominant (support) hand fire; DG-5043, Page 54 (c) shooting while moving (laterally, advancing, and evading); (d) shooting from elevated positions; and (e) firing with field gas mask donned. | ||
8.13 Use of Deadly Force As described in 10 CFR 73.55(k)(3), a licensee shall train each armed member of the security organization to prevent or impede attempted acts of radiological sabotage by using force sufficient to counter the force directed at that person, including the use of deadly force when the armed member of the security organization has a reasonable belief that the use of deadly force is necessary in self-defense or in the defense of others, or any other circumstances as authorized by applicable state or federal law. As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(e) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each licensee shall ensure that all armed members of the security or ganization are instructed on the proper use of the force continuum, including the use of deadly force as authorized by applicable state law. Each member of the security organization, commensurate with his or her assigned duties, must thoroughly understand the proper use of the force continuum. 8.13.1 Armed members of the security organization should be instructed on the proper use of deadly force in various situations and circumstances that could justify it in protecting power reactors. For additional information, Information Notice No. 89-05, "Use of Deadly Force by Guards Protecting Nuclear Power Reactors Against Radiological Sabotage" provides some situations and circumstances that could justify the use of deadly force in protecting power reactors. Examples of situations and circumstances that could justify the use of deadly force are as follows: (a) Defending Against Violent Armed Assault. Use of deadly force could be justified in defending a power reactor against a determined violent armed assault. (b) Defending Against Armed Attack by Stealth. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting armed intruders who have penetrated the protected area and are attempting to break into an area containing vital equipment, ignoring defenders' challenges and warnings to stop. (c) Defending Against Attackers Employing Explosives and/or Incendiaries. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting intruders placing explosives or incendiary devices near vital equipment if the intruders ignore defenders' warnings to stop. (d) Defending Against Perceived Armed Attack. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting heavily armed intruders who enter the protected area ignoring challenges and warnings. 8.13.2 Under these and similar conditions, security personnel do not have to abandon cover and concealment or their defensive positions, or wait for the adversaries to fire the first shot. Such actions may expose the security personnel to casua lties and jeopardize their ability to defeat or contain the attacking forces. | 8.13 Use of Deadly Force As described in 10 CFR 73.55(k)(3), a licensee shall train each armed member of the security organization to prevent or impede attempted acts of radiological sabotage by using force sufficient to counter the force directed at that person, including the use of deadly force when the armed member of the security organization has a reasonable belief that the use of deadly force is necessary in self-defense or in the defense of others, or any other circumstances as authorized by applicable state or federal law. As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(e) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each licensee shall ensure that all armed members of the security or ganization are instructed on the proper use of the force continuum, including the use of deadly force as authorized by applicable state law. Each member of the security organization, commensurate with his or her assigned duties, must thoroughly understand the proper use of the force continuum. 8.13.1 Armed members of the security organization should be instructed on the proper use of deadly force in various situations and circumstances that could justify it in protecting power reactors. For additional information, Information Notice No. 89-05, "Use of Deadly Force by Guards Protecting Nuclear Power Reactors Against Radiological Sabotage" provides some situations and circumstances that could justify the use of deadly force in protecting power reactors. Examples of situations and circumstances that could justify the use of deadly force are as follows: (a) Defending Against Violent Armed Assault. Use of deadly force could be justified in defending a power reactor against a determined violent armed assault. (b) Defending Against Armed Attack by Stealth. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting armed intruders who have penetrated the protected area and are attempting to break into an area containing vital equipment, ignoring defenders' challenges and warnings to stop. (c) Defending Against Attackers Employing Explosives and/or Incendiaries. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting intruders placing explosives or incendiary devices near vital equipment if the intruders ignore defenders' warnings to stop. (d) Defending Against Perceived Armed Attack. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting heavily armed intruders who enter the protected area ignoring challenges and warnings. 8.13.2 Under these and similar conditions, security personnel do not have to abandon cover and concealment or their defensive positions, or wait for the adversaries to fire the first shot. Such actions may expose the security personnel to casua lties and jeopardize their ability to defeat or contain the attacking forces. | ||
8.14 Range Periodicity As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization must participate in range activities on a nominal 4-month periodicity. The DG-5043, Page 55 activities may be conducted up to 5 weeks before or 5 weeks after the scheduled date, but the next scheduled date must be 4 months from the original scheduled date. 8.14.1 This provision is intended to account for unexpected site-specific circumstances that may delay an individual's ability to participate in range activities on a specified date. | 8.14 Range Periodicity As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization must participate in range activities on a nominal 4-month periodicity. The DG-5043, Page 55 activities may be conducted up to 5 weeks before or 5 weeks after the scheduled date, but the next scheduled date must be 4 months from the original scheduled date. 8.14.1 This provision is intended to account for unexpected site-specific circumstances that may delay an individual's ability to participate in range activities on a specified date. | ||
: 9. Weapons Qualifications and Requalification In accordance with Section VI, paragraphs D.2, E.1.(b), and F.5.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization shall be qualified a nd requalified on assigned weapons or weapon types. 9.1 Qualifications should be accomplished with the weapon and ammunition assigned for use while on duty or their equivalent (i.e., similar in recoil). 9.2 Non-duty ammunition (i.e., frangible ammunition) may be used in lieu of the duty ammunition for firearms qualifications provided that the ammunition meets the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to10 CFR Part 73 and the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. 9.3 If unable to achieve a requisite qualification or requalification, an individual must not be assigned or returned to armed duty until the individual has completed qualification or been remediated on the requalification item. 9.4 Licensees may provide remedial training for personnel requiring additional firearms instruction to qualify on the specific firearms qualification course. Typical remedial firearms training could include the following: (a) one-on-one instruction on basic fundamentals of marksmanship beginning with dry-firing exercises, if applicable, advancing to live-fire practice, and culminating in a qualification attempt; and | : 9. Weapons Qualifications and Requalification In accordance with Section VI, paragraphs D.2, E.1.(b), and F.5.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization shall be qualified a nd requalified on assigned weapons or weapon types. 9.1 Qualifications should be accomplished with the weapon and ammunition assigned for use while on duty or their equivalent (i.e., similar in recoil). 9.2 Non-duty ammunition (i.e., frangible ammunition) may be used in lieu of the duty ammunition for firearms qualifications provided that the ammunition meets the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to10 CFR Part 73 and the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. 9.3 If unable to achieve a requisite qualification or requalification, an individual must not be assigned or returned to armed duty until the individual has completed qualification or been remediated on the requalification item. 9.4 Licensees may provide remedial training for personnel requiring additional firearms instruction to qualify on the specific firearms qualification course. Typical remedial firearms training could include the following: (a) one-on-one instruction on basic fundamentals of marksmanship beginning with dry-firing exercises, if applicable, advancing to live-fire practice, and culminating in a qualification attempt; and | ||
(b) analysis of all results with the shooter to remedy the identified problem(s). 9.5 A qualified training instructor must document, with input from other qualified training organization personnel, as appropriate, and a security supervisor must attest to, the qualification and requalification of each individual. | (b) analysis of all results with the shooter to remedy the identified problem(s). 9.5 A qualified training instructor must document, with input from other qualified training organization personnel, as appropriate, and a security supervisor must attest to, the qualification and requalification of each individual. | ||
: 10. Alternate Firearms Qualification Programs 10.1 Licensees may utilize a firearms qualification program other than those listed in Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 if the licensee documents how the alternative firearms qualification program satisfies NRC requirements. 10.2 Once the qualification courses have been designed, licensees may submit them to any recognized entity listed in Section 11 below, for certification before the courses are implemented. The licensee may use current qualification courses developed and certified by these entities; however, such courses may not be modified for use unless re-certified. | : 10. Alternate Firearms Qualification Programs 10.1 Licensees may utilize a firearms qualification program other than those listed in Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 if the licensee documents how the alternative firearms qualification program satisfies NRC requirements. 10.2 Once the qualification courses have been designed, licensees may submit them to any recognized entity listed in Section 11 below, for certification before the courses are implemented. The licensee may use current qualification courses developed and certified by these entities; however, such courses may not be modified for use unless re-certified. | ||
DG-5043, Page 56 | DG-5043, Page 56 | ||
: 11. Firearms Qualification Courses In accordance with Section VI, paragraph E.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all armed personnel assigned duties and responsibilities involving the use of weapons must be qualified on each weapon type that the individual will be assigned. In accordance with Section VI, paragraph F.4 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed personnel shall qualify by achieving the standards and scores established by a federal- or state-approved law enforcement qualification course or an equivalent nationally recognized course. Examples of equivalent nationally recognized courses include courses recognized by the National Rifle Association, U.S. Department of Defense, the International Association of Law Enforcement Firearms Instructors, and the firearms qualification courses described in Appendix H, "Weapons Qualification Criteria," to 10 CFR Part 73. 11.1. Handgun As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.3.(a) and (b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall conduct handgun qualification courses for daylight and night fire to evaluate the shooter's marksmanship and firearm manipulation skills under both daylight and reduced-light conditions. The minimum qualifying score for each course must be 70 percent of the maximum obtainable target score. 11.1.1 Qualification courses should include a predetermined amount of ammunition, type of target(s), and scoring system to be used (e.g., 60 rounds fired at a B-27-type target with the maximum score of 300 points divided by 3). 11.1.2 Licensees should develop a typical daylight handgun qualification course which includes the following: (a) moving from one shooting position to another (e.g., standing to kneeling, standing to prone) before, or during, a course of fire; (b) reloading; (c) dominant (firing) hand and non-dominant (supporting) hand shooting; (d) timed stages of fire (e.g., two rounds in 3 seconds, two rounds in 5 seconds, depending on distance from target) and multiple rounds fired at the target (stationary or turning) during the stage of fire (e.g., two rounds, four rounds, eight rounds, and reload); (e) shooters engaging the targets from multiple distances, starting from a close or distant proximity to the target and gradually increasing or decreasing distance from the target (i.e., 7, 10, 15, and 25 yard lines or 25, 15, 10, and 7 yard lines); (f) shooters engaging the targets from the standing, kneeling, and prone positions; and (g) shooters engaging the targets while drawing the firearm from the holster. | : 11. Firearms Qualification Courses In accordance with Section VI, paragraph E.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all armed personnel assigned duties and responsibilities involving the use of weapons must be qualified on each weapon type that the individual will be assigned. In accordance with Section VI, paragraph F.4 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed personnel shall qualify by achieving the standards and scores established by a federal- or state-approved law enforcement qualification course or an equivalent nationally recognized course. Examples of equivalent nationally recognized courses include courses recognized by the National Rifle Association, U.S. Department of Defense, the International Association of Law Enforcement Firearms Instructors, and the firearms qualification courses described in Appendix H, "Weapons Qualification Criteria," to 10 CFR Part 73. 11.1. Handgun As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.3.(a) and (b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall conduct handgun qualification courses for daylight and night fire to evaluate the shooter's marksmanship and firearm manipulation skills under both daylight and reduced-light conditions. The minimum qualifying score for each course must be 70 percent of the maximum obtainable target score. 11.1.1 Qualification courses should include a predetermined amount of ammunition, type of target(s), and scoring system to be used (e.g., 60 rounds fired at a B-27-type target with the maximum score of 300 points divided by 3). 11.1.2 Licensees should develop a typical daylight handgun qualification course which includes the following: (a) moving from one shooting position to another (e.g., standing to kneeling, standing to prone) before, or during, a course of fire; (b) reloading; (c) dominant (firing) hand and non-dominant (supporting) hand shooting; (d) timed stages of fire (e.g., two rounds in 3 seconds, two rounds in 5 seconds, depending on distance from target) and multiple rounds fired at the target (stationary or turning) during the stage of fire (e.g., two rounds, four rounds, eight rounds, and reload); (e) shooters engaging the targets from multiple distances, starting from a close or distant proximity to the target and gradually increasing or decreasing distance from the target (i.e., 7, 10, 15, and 25 yard lines or 25, 15, 10, and 7 yard lines); (f) shooters engaging the targets from the standing, kneeling, and prone positions; and (g) shooters engaging the targets while drawing the firearm from the holster. | ||
Line 525: | Line 525: | ||
11.7 Course of Fire Stages for the Tactical Qualification Course 11.7.1 As with any live firearms training or qualification evolutions, certain aspects of an actual firearms engagement cannot be demonstrated as they might actually occur because of safety concerns. It is also understood that a trained and qualified firearms instructor may have to specifically control certain aspects of a firearms qualification course to cause a shooter to demonstrate all required skills as well as to ensure safety. Actions that address safety and the complete demonstration of all required skills must be considered and implemented in the development and conduct of a tactical qualification course. 11.7.2 Licensees should attempt to minimize instructor controls and interaction during the conduct of tactical qualification courses to ensure that the shooter has the ability to operate in a contingency environment while demonstrating all skills required of an armed officer. | 11.7 Course of Fire Stages for the Tactical Qualification Course 11.7.1 As with any live firearms training or qualification evolutions, certain aspects of an actual firearms engagement cannot be demonstrated as they might actually occur because of safety concerns. It is also understood that a trained and qualified firearms instructor may have to specifically control certain aspects of a firearms qualification course to cause a shooter to demonstrate all required skills as well as to ensure safety. Actions that address safety and the complete demonstration of all required skills must be considered and implemented in the development and conduct of a tactical qualification course. 11.7.2 Licensees should attempt to minimize instructor controls and interaction during the conduct of tactical qualification courses to ensure that the shooter has the ability to operate in a contingency environment while demonstrating all skills required of an armed officer. | ||
DG-5043, Page 62 11.7.3 Safety is paramount during all stages of the tacti cal qualification course. Some stages within the course of fire may require the shooter to have all contingency equipment donned (or available) to demonstrate the ability to effectively implem ent the NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, site contingency procedures, and site implementing procedures. The following guidance for a tactical course of fire is provided below to demonstrate an acceptable approach to address each element of a tactical qualification course. (a) Element 1, Objective: Combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons employed during a contingency event. The requirements contained in Section VI, paragraph F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, "Tactical weapons qualification," state, in part, that licensee developed tactical qualification courses must describe the performance criteria to carry out assigned duties. | DG-5043, Page 62 11.7.3 Safety is paramount during all stages of the tacti cal qualification course. Some stages within the course of fire may require the shooter to have all contingency equipment donned (or available) to demonstrate the ability to effectively implem ent the NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, site contingency procedures, and site implementing procedures. The following guidance for a tactical course of fire is provided below to demonstrate an acceptable approach to address each element of a tactical qualification course. (a) Element 1, Objective: Combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons employed during a contingency event. The requirements contained in Section VI, paragraph F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, "Tactical weapons qualification," state, in part, that licensee developed tactical qualification courses must describe the performance criteria to carry out assigned duties. | ||
(1) The licensee should describe the conditions under which the shooter would be expected to carry or have available, all handguns and shoulder-fired weapons necessary to meet the performance criteria for a tactical weapon s qualification course, and describe the successful completion of the course of fire designed to meet the site's protective strategy as described in the Commission-approved Safeguards Contingency Plan. | (1) The licensee should describe the conditions under which the shooter would be expected to carry or have available, all handguns and shoulder-fired weapons necessary to meet the performance criteria for a tactical weapon s qualification course, and describe the successful completion of the course of fire designed to meet the site's protective strategy as described in the Commission-approved Safeguards Contingency Plan. | ||
(2) The shooter may use any weapon at any stage of the course to effectively engage the required number of targets. | (2) The shooter may use any weapon at any stage of the course to effectively engage the required number of targets. | ||
(3) If the licensee uses more than one type of shoulder-fired weapon as described in its training and qualification plan, contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures (e.g., M-4 and AR-15 or M-4 and shotgun), the licensee should describe how the performance criteria is achieved for each type of shoulder-fired weapon used in the tactical course of fire. | |||
(4) All weapons included in the tactical course of fire should be used in the course of fire consistent with their use and identification in the licensee's training and qualification plan, contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures (e.g., AR-15 in fixed posts, M 4 for armed responders). | |||
(5) Sighting system configuration and use in the tactical course of fire should be consistent with that identified by the licensee as the primary sighting system for the particular weapon system, as employed and identified in the licensee's contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures. | |||
(6) If a gas mask is required to implement the licensee's defensive strategy, the licensee's familiarization firearms training and marksmanship qualification courses should also include the use of secondary sighting systems or other sighting systems for specific applications while wearing a gas mask. | |||
(7) The use of sighting systems other than those identified by the licensee as the primary sighting system for the specific weapon during the conduct of the tactical qualification course is left to the discretion of the licensee. | |||
(8) The shooter would not have to carry more than one shoulder-fired weapon at any one time unless required to do so by the site protective strategy. | (8) The shooter would not have to carry more than one shoulder-fired weapon at any one time unless required to do so by the site protective strategy. | ||
DG-5043, Page 63 (9) Additional shoulder-fired weapons could be located at other stages of the course of fire, and the shooter could transition to those weapons in some situations, at a time specified by the certified firearms instructor or at a predetermined time during the course of fire. | DG-5043, Page 63 (9) Additional shoulder-fired weapons could be located at other stages of the course of fire, and the shooter could transition to those weapons in some situations, at a time specified by the certified firearms instructor or at a predetermined time during the course of fire. | ||
(10) Range designs and range safety should be considered to determine the use of specific contingency or enhanced equipment or weapons (e.g., considering yard line or distance of target engagement and backstop configuration for the safe use of each weapon) during each stage within the course of fire. (b) Element 2, Objective: Firing from a reasonable and representative facsimile of licensee defensive positions, elevations, and distances. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | |||
(1) The licensee's tactical course of fire should have reasonable facsimiles of licensee defensive positions, elevations, and fields of fire and include those facsimiles as a stage or stages in the course of fire. | (1) The licensee's tactical course of fire should have reasonable facsimiles of licensee defensive positions, elevations, and fields of fire and include those facsimiles as a stage or stages in the course of fire. | ||
(2) To provide reasonable assurance of his or her ability to effectively execute the duties required by the protective strategy, the shooter should demonstrate the application of performance criteria needed to negotiate the course and engage the required targets. | (2) To provide reasonable assurance of his or her ability to effectively execute the duties required by the protective strategy, the shooter should demonstrate the application of performance criteria needed to negotiate the course and engage the required targets. | ||
(3) The facsimile of the defensive positions should be constructed out of alternate materials and built with the objective of giving the s hooter a similar perspective of elevations, fields of fire, and distances that exist in the actual defensive positions used for the protective strategy inside the protected area. | (3) The facsimile of the defensive positions should be constructed out of alternate materials and built with the objective of giving the s hooter a similar perspective of elevations, fields of fire, and distances that exist in the actual defensive positions used for the protective strategy inside the protected area. | ||
(4) The elevations and distances of the defensive position facsimiles do not have to exactly match the actual ones in the protected area. | (4) The elevations and distances of the defensive position facsimiles do not have to exactly match the actual ones in the protected area. | ||
(5) The design of the facsimiles should include consideration of actual protected area shooting positions, shooting port size, and approximate fields of fire, and should reasonably replicate the height, distance, and angle on a representative scale to produce similar effects. Firearms training resource manuals and documents for elevated position | (5) The design of the facsimiles should include consideration of actual protected area shooting positions, shooting port size, and approximate fields of fire, and should reasonably replicate the height, distance, and angle on a representative scale to produce similar effects. Firearms training resource manuals and documents for elevated position | ||
design and angle calculations are useful in this task. Smaller targets can be used to simulate distance and distant target acquisition for the shooter. | design and angle calculations are useful in this task. Smaller targets can be used to simulate distance and distant target acquisition for the shooter. | ||
(6) If the licensee's protective strategy requires the armed responder to engage moving targets from ground defensive positions and elevated defensive positions to defend the facility, then the tactical course of fire should include stages for moving target engagement both from ground and elevated positions, to demonstrate how the performance criteria for adversary engagement satisfies the licensee's protective strategy,. | (6) If the licensee's protective strategy requires the armed responder to engage moving targets from ground defensive positions and elevated defensive positions to defend the facility, then the tactical course of fire should include stages for moving target engagement both from ground and elevated positions, to demonstrate how the performance criteria for adversary engagement satisfies the licensee's protective strategy,. | ||
(7) Each licensee should be able to articulate in writing its methodology for replicating and simulating the actual defensive positions used in the training conducted at the firing range | (7) Each licensee should be able to articulate in writing its methodology for replicating and simulating the actual defensive positions used in the training conducted at the firing range | ||
for the tactical qualification course. (c) Element 3, Objective: Appropriate levels of stress and physical demands (e.g., engaging targets while on the move). | for the tactical qualification course. (c) Element 3, Objective: Appropriate levels of stress and physical demands (e.g., engaging targets while on the move). | ||
DG-5043, Page 64 The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs B and E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | DG-5043, Page 64 The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs B and E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | ||
(1) The course of fire should include, as described in E.1.(d)(6), levels of stress and, as described in B.4.(b)(1) physical demands representative of the site's protective strategy. | (1) The course of fire should include, as described in E.1.(d)(6), levels of stress and, as described in B.4.(b)(1) physical demands representative of the site's protective strategy. | ||
(2) Physical stress inducers, such as running, can be used to mimic the actual physical stress a responder experiences during a contingency event in the protected area. If running is used to induce stress, the specific distance associated with the most demanding timeline should be used. | (2) Physical stress inducers, such as running, can be used to mimic the actual physical stress a responder experiences during a contingency event in the protected area. If running is used to induce stress, the specific distance associated with the most demanding timeline should be used. | ||
(3) Physical stress may be induced by actually running the predetermined distance or running in place for a specific period of time before negotiating the course or engaging targets. | (3) Physical stress may be induced by actually running the predetermined distance or running in place for a specific period of time before negotiating the course or engaging targets. | ||
(4) Mental stress inducers (e.g., having the shooter simulate communication with the CAS or demonstrating tactical reloads) can add realism and should be included during the course of fire. (5) In addition, physical and mental stress can be simulated by having the shooter engage targets while on the move between positions of cover. This demonstration or stage would require the shooter to implement reactionary measures such as engaging the target in the open while advancing to cover, or obtaining cover rapidly and returning fire. | (4) Mental stress inducers (e.g., having the shooter simulate communication with the CAS or demonstrating tactical reloads) can add realism and should be included during the course of fire. (5) In addition, physical and mental stress can be simulated by having the shooter engage targets while on the move between positions of cover. This demonstration or stage would require the shooter to implement reactionary measures such as engaging the target in the open while advancing to cover, or obtaining cover rapidly and returning fire. | ||
(6) The course of fire should also include the performance criteria associat ed with target set engagement and cover and concealment as described in E.1.(d)(8) and E.1.(d)(10), (e.g., moving from multiple positions of cover, out of the prone and kneeling positions, or up and down elevated positions or stairwells) that reflect the plant environment and the implementation of the licensee's protective strategy. (d) Element 4, Objective: Proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets. | (6) The course of fire should also include the performance criteria associat ed with target set engagement and cover and concealment as described in E.1.(d)(8) and E.1.(d)(10), (e.g., moving from multiple positions of cover, out of the prone and kneeling positions, or up and down elevated positions or stairwells) that reflect the plant environment and the implementation of the licensee's protective strategy. (d) Element 4, Objective: Proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets. | ||
The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | ||
(1) To successfully complete the course of fire, the shooter should be able to recognize and then use proper techniques for cover and concealment as described in E.1.(d)(10). | (1) To successfully complete the course of fire, the shooter should be able to recognize and then use proper techniques for cover and concealment as described in E.1.(d)(10). | ||
(2) The shooter should demonstrate the performance criteria associated with methods of approaching, moving from, and using cover and concealment while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and situational or decision-making targets (i.e., threat versus non threat-related). | (2) The shooter should demonstrate the performance criteria associated with methods of approaching, moving from, and using cover and concealment while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and situational or decision-making targets (i.e., threat versus non threat-related). | ||
(3) Although the determination of the proper application of this aspect is subjective, licensees should consider some method of accountability for improper application of cover and concealment objectives that may negatively affect the shooter's qualification score. (e) Element 5, Objective: The ability to transition from one type of firearm to another (in the event of a weapons malfunction or change in deployment technique). | (3) Although the determination of the proper application of this aspect is subjective, licensees should consider some method of accountability for improper application of cover and concealment objectives that may negatively affect the shooter's qualification score. (e) Element 5, Objective: The ability to transition from one type of firearm to another (in the event of a weapons malfunction or change in deployment technique). | ||
DG-5043, Page 65 The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs E and F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | DG-5043, Page 65 The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs E and F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | ||
(1) The licensee tactical weapons qualifications course of fire should be constructed such that the shooter demonstrates the performance criteria as described in E. | (1) The licensee tactical weapons qualifications course of fire should be constructed such that the shooter demonstrates the performance criteria as described in E. | ||
1.(d)(4), associated with the ability to safely and effectively transition from one type of weapon to another during the course of fire (e.g., transition from rifle to handgun). | 1.(d)(4), associated with the ability to safely and effectively transition from one type of weapon to another during the course of fire (e.g., transition from rifle to handgun). | ||
(2) The actual weapons transition should take place without the assistance or direction of the certified firearms instructor. | (2) The actual weapons transition should take place without the assistance or direction of the certified firearms instructor. | ||
(3) The certified firearms instructor should always be able to react to safety concerns or unsafe conditions when warranted during the course of fire. | (3) The certified firearms instructor should always be able to react to safety concerns or unsafe conditions when warranted during the course of fire. | ||
(4) A common practice to achieve adequate safety controls for this type of firearms drill is to have an instructor/safety officer accompany each shooter through the course on a one-on-one basis. Safety officers may be other qualified and experienced armed security officers, security supervisors, or other security staff. | (4) A common practice to achieve adequate safety controls for this type of firearms drill is to have an instructor/safety officer accompany each shooter through the course on a one-on-one basis. Safety officers may be other qualified and experienced armed security officers, security supervisors, or other security staff. | ||
(5) Acceptable methods for this stage of fire include a built-in weapon malfunction scenario during the course or an instructor-induced weapon malfunction at a certain stage which would require the shooter to transition to another firearm. This transition may be demonstrated with or without the use of cover or concealment. | (5) Acceptable methods for this stage of fire include a built-in weapon malfunction scenario during the course or an instructor-induced weapon malfunction at a certain stage which would require the shooter to transition to another firearm. This transition may be demonstrated with or without the use of cover or concealment. | ||
(6) Audible commands such as "gun down" or "malfunction" are not recommended as signals for a simulated weapon malfunction as they are inconsistent with the physical stimuli experienced during an actual weapon stoppage or malfunction. | (6) Audible commands such as "gun down" or "malfunction" are not recommended as signals for a simulated weapon malfunction as they are inconsistent with the physical stimuli experienced during an actual weapon stoppage or malfunction. | ||
(7) The use of dummy rounds exactly replicates a weapons stoppage or malfunction through the physical stimuli associated with the even | (7) The use of dummy rounds exactly replicates a weapons stoppage or malfunction through the physical stimuli associated with the even | ||
: t. Exact and realistic re-creation of this event develops the shooter's sense of recognition and reactionary response to actual weapons stoppages or malfunctions. | : t. Exact and realistic re-creation of this event develops the shooter's sense of recognition and reactionary response to actual weapons stoppages or malfunctions. | ||
(8) The weapon failure or malfunction can be accomplished by causing the shooter to perform a retention or tactical reload with a magazine possessing one, two, or three live rounds at the top followed by a dummy round that would cause the malfunction. | (8) The weapon failure or malfunction can be accomplished by causing the shooter to perform a retention or tactical reload with a magazine possessing one, two, or three live rounds at the top followed by a dummy round that would cause the malfunction. | ||
(9) As an alternative, the instructor can provide the magazine to the shooter at the position of cover just before the stage, or the magazine may be color-coded and carried by the officer with pre-designated instructions to use it at the proper stage in the course. This will ensure that the malfunction will occur at the proper stage in the course. | (9) As an alternative, the instructor can provide the magazine to the shooter at the position of cover just before the stage, or the magazine may be color-coded and carried by the officer with pre-designated instructions to use it at the proper stage in the course. This will ensure that the malfunction will occur at the proper stage in the course. | ||
(10) Alternatively, all of the shooters' magazines could be loaded to have a dummy round in either the second, third, or fourth position (each magazine would be different) to ensure that a malfunction occurs on each magazine at the desired stage without the officer's absolute knowledge. | (10) Alternatively, all of the shooters' magazines could be loaded to have a dummy round in either the second, third, or fourth position (each magazine would be different) to ensure that a malfunction occurs on each magazine at the desired stage without the officer's absolute knowledge. | ||
(11) If the shooter performed an immediate ac tion instead of a weapons transition and continued with the primary weapon system, the stage of fire for the weapons transition requirement would be lost. | (11) If the shooter performed an immediate ac tion instead of a weapons transition and continued with the primary weapon system, the stage of fire for the weapons transition requirement would be lost. | ||
DG-5043, Page 66 (12) All reloads for this stage of fire should be performed at a position of cover before negotiating this particular part of the course. (f) Element 6, Objective: The ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds). The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | DG-5043, Page 66 (12) All reloads for this stage of fire should be performed at a position of cover before negotiating this particular part of the course. (f) Element 6, Objective: The ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds). The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | ||
(1) The course of fire should, as described in E.1.(d)(9), give the shooter an opportunity to demonstrate the performance criteria for the appropriate immediate action for failures or malfunctions occurring with each weapon type used during the course of fire. | (1) The course of fire should, as described in E.1.(d)(9), give the shooter an opportunity to demonstrate the performance criteria for the appropriate immediate action for failures or malfunctions occurring with each weapon type used during the course of fire. | ||
(2) Recovery also includes the shooter's ability to reacquire the target after the weapon malfunction is cleared or when the shooter transitions to another weapon. This should be accomplished through the use of dummy rounds that are preloaded in the ammunition magazines before the start of the course. | (2) Recovery also includes the shooter's ability to reacquire the target after the weapon malfunction is cleared or when the shooter transitions to another weapon. This should be accomplished through the use of dummy rounds that are preloaded in the ammunition magazines before the start of the course. | ||
(3) At a minimum, one dummy round should be loaded in each magazine before the beginning of the course and should be staggered to minimize predictability. (g) Element 7, Objective: Adherence to the safe handling of firearms during simulated courses of fire. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | (3) At a minimum, one dummy round should be loaded in each magazine before the beginning of the course and should be staggered to minimize predictability. (g) Element 7, Objective: Adherence to the safe handling of firearms during simulated courses of fire. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | ||
(1) Throughout the various stages of the course of fire, the shooter should, as described in E.1.(d)(4), demonstrate the ability to handle each weapon type safely. | (1) Throughout the various stages of the course of fire, the shooter should, as described in E.1.(d)(4), demonstrate the ability to handle each weapon type safely. | ||
(2) This includes consideration of muzzle control, safe movement with loaded, charged, and drawn weapons, trigger finger placement, and properly clearing and restoring all weapons to a safe condition. | (2) This includes consideration of muzzle control, safe movement with loaded, charged, and drawn weapons, trigger finger placement, and properly clearing and restoring all weapons to a safe condition. | ||
(3) A demonstrated disregard for the safe handling of firearms and range safety should cause the instructor/safety officer to stop the course, provide the officer with remedial training on the safe handling of firearms, and require the officer to perform the course again in its entirety. (h) Element 8, Objective: Firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask. The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs F.2 and G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | (3) A demonstrated disregard for the safe handling of firearms and range safety should cause the instructor/safety officer to stop the course, provide the officer with remedial training on the safe handling of firearms, and require the officer to perform the course again in its entirety. (h) Element 8, Objective: Firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask. The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs F.2 and G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | ||
(1) The course of fire should give the shooter an opportunity to demonstrate the performance criteria associated with the shooter's ability to use the gas mask described in G.2.(b)(1). | (1) The course of fire should give the shooter an opportunity to demonstrate the performance criteria associated with the shooter's ability to use the gas mask described in G.2.(b)(1). | ||
(2) While wearing the gas mask, the shooter should engage a minimum of two targets and demonstrate a reload. For example, a licensee tactical qualification course may require DG-5043, Page 67 the shooter to don his or her gas mask and fire at multiple targets while loading and reloading with the contingency weapon. | (2) While wearing the gas mask, the shooter should engage a minimum of two targets and demonstrate a reload. For example, a licensee tactical qualification course may require DG-5043, Page 67 the shooter to don his or her gas mask and fire at multiple targets while loading and reloading with the contingency weapon. | ||
(3) This same tactical qualification course does not have to include the use of the gas mask with the handgun. However, the use of a gas mask with the handgun should be demonstrated in another area of the training program (e.g., firearms familiarization). | (3) This same tactical qualification course does not have to include the use of the gas mask with the handgun. However, the use of a gas mask with the handgun should be demonstrated in another area of the training program (e.g., firearms familiarization). | ||
(4) The certified firearms instructor can initiate the shooter's use of the gas mask by giving the audible warning of "gas, gas, gas," or the shooter can begin using the mask at a predetermined stage within the course signaled by the deployment of smoke in the immediate vicinity of the shooter. | (4) The certified firearms instructor can initiate the shooter's use of the gas mask by giving the audible warning of "gas, gas, gas," or the shooter can begin using the mask at a predetermined stage within the course signaled by the deployment of smoke in the immediate vicinity of the shooter. | ||
(5) The gas mask, as one element of the personal equipment described in G.2.(a), should be deployed as issued to the individual, or from its ready access location as described in the licensee protective strategy, and within an acceptable timeline identified for the specific mask type consistent with the manufacturer's specifications, and the licensee's Training and Qualification plan and implementing procedures. | (5) The gas mask, as one element of the personal equipment described in G.2.(a), should be deployed as issued to the individual, or from its ready access location as described in the licensee protective strategy, and within an acceptable timeline identified for the specific mask type consistent with the manufacturer's specifications, and the licensee's Training and Qualification plan and implementing procedures. | ||
(6) During this stage of fire, it is important to en sure that officers do not break the seal of the gas mask to accommodate stock-to-cheek weld when firing shoulder-fired weapons. | (6) During this stage of fire, it is important to en sure that officers do not break the seal of the gas mask to accommodate stock-to-cheek weld when firing shoulder-fired weapons. | ||
(7) This stage of the course should require the shooter to demonstrate the ability to communicate while wearing the gas mask. (i) Element 9, Objective: Non-dominant (support) hand shooting. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph F of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | (7) This stage of the course should require the shooter to demonstrate the ability to communicate while wearing the gas mask. (i) Element 9, Objective: Non-dominant (support) hand shooting. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph F of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element. | ||
(8) Once an individual has demonstrated the required level of proficiency with dominant hand shooting, and during any stage of fire within the course, the shooter should, as described in the procedures implemented by the licensee, demonstrate the use of the supporting or non-dominant hand to fire. | (8) Once an individual has demonstrated the required level of proficiency with dominant hand shooting, and during any stage of fire within the course, the shooter should, as described in the procedures implemented by the licensee, demonstrate the use of the supporting or non-dominant hand to fire. | ||
(9) The purpose of this element is for the shooter to gain familiarity with shooting and handling the assigned weapon(s), including reloading and target acquisition, with the supporting or non-dominant hand when aspects of the site's protective strategy or an injury cause the shooter to use this technique to engage a threat. | (9) The purpose of this element is for the shooter to gain familiarity with shooting and handling the assigned weapon(s), including reloading and target acquisition, with the supporting or non-dominant hand when aspects of the site's protective strategy or an injury cause the shooter to use this technique to engage a threat. | ||
(10) This objective may be met by requiring the shooter to engage targets with the shoulder-fired weapon(s), the handgun, or both using the support or non-dominant hand technique. | (10) This objective may be met by requiring the shooter to engage targets with the shoulder-fired weapon(s), the handgun, or both using the support or non-dominant hand technique. | ||
(11) Licensees that develop tactical qualification courses that require support or non-dominant hand firing using only one of the weapons systems carried by their response force members should ensure that this technique is demonstrated for the remaining weapons systems in another area of their training programs (e.g., firearms familiarization). (j) Element 10, Objective: Use of the minimum quantity of combined handgun and shoulder-fired weapon ammunition necessary to demonstrate the ability to effectively implement the licensee's protective strategy. | (11) Licensees that develop tactical qualification courses that require support or non-dominant hand firing using only one of the weapons systems carried by their response force members should ensure that this technique is demonstrated for the remaining weapons systems in another area of their training programs (e.g., firearms familiarization). (j) Element 10, Objective: Use of the minimum quantity of combined handgun and shoulder-fired weapon ammunition necessary to demonstrate the ability to effectively implement the licensee's protective strategy. | ||
DG-5043, Page 68 NEI 03-12, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]" provides the following guidance that is acceptable for use in meeting this objective: | DG-5043, Page 68 NEI 03-12, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]" provides the following guidance that is acceptable for use in meeting this objective: | ||
(1) The amount of ammunition distributed among all weapons and fired during the course should be consistent with the amount of ammunition described in the licensee's security plan. | (1) The amount of ammunition distributed among all weapons and fired during the course should be consistent with the amount of ammunition described in the licensee's security plan. | ||
(2) The shooter should carry the minimum amount of duty ammunition required by the protective strategy at the site during the conduct of the tactical qualification course. | (2) The shooter should carry the minimum amount of duty ammunition required by the protective strategy at the site during the conduct of the tactical qualification course. | ||
(3) The standard ammunition load identified in the licensee's contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures for armed responders should be carried during the tactical course of fire. The total number of rounds includes dummy rounds. | (3) The standard ammunition load identified in the licensee's contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures for armed responders should be carried during the tactical course of fire. The total number of rounds includes dummy rounds. | ||
11.8 General Implementation Guidance 11.8.1 Typically, a tactical qualification course should be a timed evolution for the shooter and consist of a combination of all the elements required in the licensee's contingency response plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures, which must be consistent with the licensee's Training and Qualification plan. 11.8.2 The elements should be presented in a continuous evolution (i.e., elements should not be broken out into discrete training evolutions or other courses of fire), with various stages of fire that constitute a single course. All elements and stages of the tactical qualification course should consider range safety. 11.8.3 The time given to a shooter for completion of the tactical qualification course should be consistent with response timelines in the protective strategy and include the time needed to complete each stage of the course and range safely. Each licensee should document and be able to articulate its methodology for determining an acceptable time interval for safe and successful completion of the course of fire. 11.8.4 If a firing range malfunction or a weapon or equipment malfunction beyond the shooter's ability to safely resolve hinders the shooter's ability to complete the tactical qualification course, the shooter should be allowed to continue after resolution of the problem (if feasible) or repeat the course. If such incidents occur, range safety should always be addressed by first ensuring weapons safety (e.g., by clearing and unloading the weapon and practicing muzzle discipline) and then resolving the specific problem. The shooter's time should also be stopped and the shooter held in place while the issue is resolved. Once the issue has been resolved and the firing range is considered clear, the instructor/safety officer should cause the shooter to load and ready the weapons and then continue the course (along with the shooter's time) when directed. | 11.8 General Implementation Guidance 11.8.1 Typically, a tactical qualification course should be a timed evolution for the shooter and consist of a combination of all the elements required in the licensee's contingency response plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures, which must be consistent with the licensee's Training and Qualification plan. 11.8.2 The elements should be presented in a continuous evolution (i.e., elements should not be broken out into discrete training evolutions or other courses of fire), with various stages of fire that constitute a single course. All elements and stages of the tactical qualification course should consider range safety. 11.8.3 The time given to a shooter for completion of the tactical qualification course should be consistent with response timelines in the protective strategy and include the time needed to complete each stage of the course and range safely. Each licensee should document and be able to articulate its methodology for determining an acceptable time interval for safe and successful completion of the course of fire. 11.8.4 If a firing range malfunction or a weapon or equipment malfunction beyond the shooter's ability to safely resolve hinders the shooter's ability to complete the tactical qualification course, the shooter should be allowed to continue after resolution of the problem (if feasible) or repeat the course. If such incidents occur, range safety should always be addressed by first ensuring weapons safety (e.g., by clearing and unloading the weapon and practicing muzzle discipline) and then resolving the specific problem. The shooter's time should also be stopped and the shooter held in place while the issue is resolved. Once the issue has been resolved and the firing range is considered clear, the instructor/safety officer should cause the shooter to load and ready the weapons and then continue the course (along with the shooter's time) when directed. | ||
11.9 Weapons Requalification Schedule As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.5 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requirements shall be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity. Annual requirements may be completed up to 3 months before or 3 months after the scheduled date. However, the next annual training must be scheduled 12 months from the previously scheduled date rather than from the date the training was actually completed. | 11.9 Weapons Requalification Schedule As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.5 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requirements shall be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity. Annual requirements may be completed up to 3 months before or 3 months after the scheduled date. However, the next annual training must be scheduled 12 months from the previously scheduled date rather than from the date the training was actually completed. | ||
DG-5043, Page 69 11.10 Short-Cycle Requalification As described in Section VI, paragraph D.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requalification must be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity. 11.10.1 The actual scheduled date (baseline) for the requalification of an annual requirement can be changed (re-baselined) by conducting training earlier than the originally scheduled (baseline) date. The next scheduled date for requalification, from that point forward, must be nominally 12 months from the new (re-baselined) qualification date. 11.10.2 Licensees must ensure that, when applying this short-cycle provision to the training schedule for their annual requirements, their schedule for weapons range activities still meets the nominal 4-month periodicity identified in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. | DG-5043, Page 69 11.10 Short-Cycle Requalification As described in Section VI, paragraph D.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requalification must be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity. 11.10.1 The actual scheduled date (baseline) for the requalification of an annual requirement can be changed (re-baselined) by conducting training earlier than the originally scheduled (baseline) date. The next scheduled date for requalification, from that point forward, must be nominally 12 months from the new (re-baselined) qualification date. 11.10.2 Licensees must ensure that, when applying this short-cycle provision to the training schedule for their annual requirements, their schedule for weapons range activities still meets the nominal 4-month periodicity identified in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. | ||
: 12. Weapons, Personal Equipment, and Maintenance As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must ensure that each individual is equipped or has ready access to all personal equipment or devices required for the effective implementation of the Commission-approved security plans, the licensee's protective strategy, and implementing procedures. | : 12. Weapons, Personal Equipment, and Maintenance As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must ensure that each individual is equipped or has ready access to all personal equipment or devices required for the effective implementation of the Commission-approved security plans, the licensee's protective strategy, and implementing procedures. | ||
12.1 Weapons 12.1.1 The security shift supervisor, or another individual designated by the licensee, should conduct weapons and ammunition inspections daily, and at a frequency that ensures the proper care and serviceability of the weapons and ammunition and provides assurance that the weapons and ammunition will operate as in tended, and when needed. 12.1.2 The licensee should provide contingency weapons and ammunition that, at a minimum, meet the following specifications: | 12.1 Weapons 12.1.1 The security shift supervisor, or another individual designated by the licensee, should conduct weapons and ammunition inspections daily, and at a frequency that ensures the proper care and serviceability of the weapons and ammunition and provides assurance that the weapons and ammunition will operate as in tended, and when needed. 12.1.2 The licensee should provide contingency weapons and ammunition that, at a minimum, meet the following specifications: | ||
(1) Semi-automatic rifles: (a) .223 caliber, (b) muzzle velocity of 1,980 feet per second, (c) muzzle energy of 955 foot-pounds, (d) magazine or clip load of 10 rounds, (e) magazine reload of less than 10 seconds, and (f) operable in any environment in which it will be used. | (1) Semi-automatic rifles: (a) .223 caliber, (b) muzzle velocity of 1,980 feet per second, (c) muzzle energy of 955 foot-pounds, (d) magazine or clip load of 10 rounds, (e) magazine reload of less than 10 seconds, and (f) operable in any environment in which it will be used. | ||
(2) 12-gauge shotguns: (a) four-round pump or semi-automatic, (b) operable in any environment in which it will be used, and (c) full or modified choke. | (2) 12-gauge shotguns: (a) four-round pump or semi-automatic, (b) operable in any environment in which it will be used, and (c) full or modified choke. | ||
(3) Semi-automatic pistols or revolvers: (a) .354 caliber, (b) muzzle energy of 250 foot-pounds, (c) full magazine or cylinder reload capability of less than 6 seconds, (d) muzzle velocity of 850 feet per second, (e) full cylinder or magazine capacity of six rounds, and (f) operable in any environment in which it will be used. | (3) Semi-automatic pistols or revolvers: (a) .354 caliber, (b) muzzle energy of 250 foot-pounds, (c) full magazine or cylinder reload capability of less than 6 seconds, (d) muzzle velocity of 850 feet per second, (e) full cylinder or magazine capacity of six rounds, and (f) operable in any environment in which it will be used. | ||
DG-5043, Page 70 (4) Ammunition: (a) two fully loaded licensee-issued handgun magazines per handgun or three fully loaded revolver speed-loaders (minimum of 18 rounds), (b) 100 rounds per semi-automatic rifle, and (c) three basic magazine loads of 00 gauge or slug rounds per shotgun (e.g., a 6 round capacity magazine would have a total of 18 shotgun rounds). 12.1.3 The minimum quantity of ammunition available on site should be twice the amount stated above, or as described in the Commission approved physical security plan, for each weapon. 12.1.4 Ammunition should be readily available for armed personnel to resupply if necessary during a contingency event. | DG-5043, Page 70 (4) Ammunition: (a) two fully loaded licensee-issued handgun magazines per handgun or three fully loaded revolver speed-loaders (minimum of 18 rounds), (b) 100 rounds per semi-automatic rifle, and (c) three basic magazine loads of 00 gauge or slug rounds per shotgun (e.g., a 6 round capacity magazine would have a total of 18 shotgun rounds). 12.1.3 The minimum quantity of ammunition available on site should be twice the amount stated above, or as described in the Commission approved physical security plan, for each weapon. 12.1.4 Ammunition should be readily available for armed personnel to resupply if necessary during a contingency event. | ||
12.2 Personal Equipment As stated in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that each individual is equipped or has ready access to all personal equipment or devices required for the effective implementation of the NRC-approved security plans, the licensee's protective strategy, and implementing procedures. As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall provide armed security personnel, at a minimum, with the following: | 12.2 Personal Equipment As stated in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that each individual is equipped or has ready access to all personal equipment or devices required for the effective implementation of the NRC-approved security plans, the licensee's protective strategy, and implementing procedures. As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall provide armed security personnel, at a minimum, with the following: | ||
(1) Gas Mask, full face; (2) Body Armor (bullet-resistant vest); | (1) Gas Mask, full face; (2) Body Armor (bullet-resistant vest); | ||
(3) Ammunition/Equipment Belt; and (4) Two-Way Portable Radio. | (3) Ammunition/Equipment Belt; and (4) Two-Way Portable Radio. | ||
12.3 Gas Mask, Full Face 12.3.1 Licensees that issue respiratory protection equipment for the purpose of complying with Commission-approved security plans should establish a respiratory protection program consistent with 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection." 12.3.2 Licensees should develop and implement a written respiratory protection program that outlines specific procedures and elements required for gas mask use. A suitably trained program administrator should manage the program. Licensee respiratory protection programs should include the following program elements: | 12.3 Gas Mask, Full Face 12.3.1 Licensees that issue respiratory protection equipment for the purpose of complying with Commission-approved security plans should establish a respiratory protection program consistent with 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection." 12.3.2 Licensees should develop and implement a written respiratory protection program that outlines specific procedures and elements required for gas mask use. A suitably trained program administrator should manage the program. Licensee respiratory protection programs should include the following program elements: | ||
(1) proper selection of respirators, (2) medical evaluation and fit testing, (3) care and maintenance, (4) training program, and (5) program evaluation. | (1) proper selection of respirators, (2) medical evaluation and fit testing, (3) care and maintenance, (4) training program, and (5) program evaluation. | ||
Line 616: | Line 616: | ||
12.6 Two-Way Portable Radio As stated in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each two-way radio shall have a minimum of two channels for security operations; one for operating and one for emergencies. As described in 10 CFR 73.55(j), the licensee shall establish and maintain continuous communication capability with onsite and offsite resources, as required, to ensure effective command and control during both normal and emergency situations. Each on-duty security officer, watch person, vehicle escort, and armed response force member must be capable of maintaining continuous communication with an individual in each alarm station. As described in 10 CFR 73.55(j)(6), alternate means of communication (e.g., plant paging system, telephone) shall be provided for use in areas of the facility where radio communication is not possible because of radio transmission interference or in situations when it is not advisable. | 12.6 Two-Way Portable Radio As stated in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each two-way radio shall have a minimum of two channels for security operations; one for operating and one for emergencies. As described in 10 CFR 73.55(j), the licensee shall establish and maintain continuous communication capability with onsite and offsite resources, as required, to ensure effective command and control during both normal and emergency situations. Each on-duty security officer, watch person, vehicle escort, and armed response force member must be capable of maintaining continuous communication with an individual in each alarm station. As described in 10 CFR 73.55(j)(6), alternate means of communication (e.g., plant paging system, telephone) shall be provided for use in areas of the facility where radio communication is not possible because of radio transmission interference or in situations when it is not advisable. | ||
DG-5043, Page 72 12.6.1 "Dead spots" created by manmade or natural objects can cause transmission interference. Radio transmissions will reflect off any large object located between the transmitter and the receiver or repeater. This commonly occurs when radio transmission is attempted from inside buildings with thick, reinforced concrete walls or at subterranean levels. Cellular telephones are typically used in these instances. Hardwired telephones or intercom systems can also be used, although they create their own set of tactical disadvantages. In many cases, however, dead spots can be eliminated to a degree by installing radio repeaters in appropriate locations. 12.6.2 Radio transmissions have the potential to create problems with solid-state electrical components. The impact of radiofrequency interference (RFI) on electrical components of nuclear power plants should be evaluated to determine where RFI should be avoided. To prevent potential mishaps, areas where RFI has been determined to have a negative impact on electrical components should be identified. The licensee's safety/security interface program should address the shielding of vital electrical components. 12.6.3 Radio transmissions should be avoided when in the proximity of any known or suspected explosive device. Explosive initiators are often designed to use RFI to actuate the explosive train. Cellular and cordless telephones also produce RFI and their use should be avoided under similar circumstances. | DG-5043, Page 72 12.6.1 "Dead spots" created by manmade or natural objects can cause transmission interference. Radio transmissions will reflect off any large object located between the transmitter and the receiver or repeater. This commonly occurs when radio transmission is attempted from inside buildings with thick, reinforced concrete walls or at subterranean levels. Cellular telephones are typically used in these instances. Hardwired telephones or intercom systems can also be used, although they create their own set of tactical disadvantages. In many cases, however, dead spots can be eliminated to a degree by installing radio repeaters in appropriate locations. 12.6.2 Radio transmissions have the potential to create problems with solid-state electrical components. The impact of radiofrequency interference (RFI) on electrical components of nuclear power plants should be evaluated to determine where RFI should be avoided. To prevent potential mishaps, areas where RFI has been determined to have a negative impact on electrical components should be identified. The licensee's safety/security interface program should address the shielding of vital electrical components. 12.6.3 Radio transmissions should be avoided when in the proximity of any known or suspected explosive device. Explosive initiators are often designed to use RFI to actuate the explosive train. Cellular and cordless telephones also produce RFI and their use should be avoided under similar circumstances. | ||
12.7 Additional Personal Equipment As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, and on the basis of its protective strategy and the specific duties and responsibilities assigned to each individual, the licensee should provide, as appropriate, the following additional equipment: 12.7.1 Flashlights and Batteries 12.7.1.1 When choosing a flashlight, licensees should ensure that the flashlight be dependable, strong, and provide sufficient illumination. Armed responders should be trai ned and qualified to operate the flashlight while conducting firearms activities. 12.7.1.2 Spare batteries should be available and a battery replacement schedule should be created. 12.7.2 Baton or Other Nonlethal Weapons 12.7.2.1 Licensees should provide the necessary training for each nonlethal weapon (e.g., baton), electroshock weapon (e.g., stun guns or Tasers), mace, or oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray before issuance. Nonlethal weapons instructors should be certified by an organization recognized nationally (e.g., National Rifle Association, Federal Bureau of Investigation, the military) or by the state (e.g., Police Officer Standards and Training). 12.7.2.2 Certifications described in 12.7.2.1 should specify the nonlethal weapon type(s) that the instructor is qualified to teach. The licensee's instructors should be recertified consistent with the standards recognized by a national or state entity at intervals not to exceed 3 years. The licensee should document the training in accordance with the KSA matrix of the Commission-approved plans. 12.7.3 Handcuffs DG-5043, Page 73 12.7.3.1 Handcuffing is a common method of restraint within the law enforcement community and is used to inhibit an individual's upper body mobility, thereby preventing individuals from using their arms to cause harm to themselves or another individual. Handcuffing may fall into more than one level of the force continuum, depending on the situation and how the techniques are applied. 12.7.3.2 Compliance handcuffing techniques are normally associated with the restraint of a compliant individual who is receptive and cooperative when given verbal commands. Caution should always be exercised when applying compliance handcuffing techniques because a compliant individual may become combative. Because of the lack of physical force associated with compliance handcuffing, it may be associated with soft physical techniques within the force continuum. 12.7.3.3 Noncompliant handcuffing is the act of forceful physical restraint against the will of an individual who has demonstrated combative characteristics by actively attempting to escape, evade, or engage other individuals in a harmful or offensive manner. Extreme caution should be used before and during the application of noncompliant handcuffing techniques to ensure the safety of all involved. Because of the physical force associated with noncompliant handcuffing (i.e., defensive tactics such as blows, strikes, takedowns), it is normally associated with hard physical techniques within the force continuum. 12.7.3.4 It is recommended that licensees include both compliant and noncompliant handcuffing techniques and associated defensive tactics in their training programs to ensure the safety of the security force and other plant personnel. Licen sees should also consider including in their training programs situational training (live scenarios and exercises) that includes the application of the force continuum and the measures within the force continuum (e.g., OC spray, defensive tactics, baton, handcuffing). Before issuing defensive equipment, licensees should be sure that personnel have been trained by a qualified instructor. 12.7.4 Security Enhancements (Other Equipment) 12.7.4.1 Licensees should consider the use of other equipment to augment the equipment they possess and to enhance the capabilities of their physical protection programs. Equipment such as binoculars, night vision aids, illumination devices (i.e., hand-fired flares, remote-operated spotlights), and remote-operated duress alarms may be used to enhance detection, assessment, and identification capabilities. 12.7.4.2 Licensees may use other enhancements, such as nonlethal gas (incapacitating agents) through various delivery methods, to delay the approach of adversaries to vital areas and potential targets within the protected area. | 12.7 Additional Personal Equipment As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, and on the basis of its protective strategy and the specific duties and responsibilities assigned to each individual, the licensee should provide, as appropriate, the following additional equipment: 12.7.1 Flashlights and Batteries 12.7.1.1 When choosing a flashlight, licensees should ensure that the flashlight be dependable, strong, and provide sufficient illumination. Armed responders should be trai ned and qualified to operate the flashlight while conducting firearms activities. 12.7.1.2 Spare batteries should be available and a battery replacement schedule should be created. 12.7.2 Baton or Other Nonlethal Weapons 12.7.2.1 Licensees should provide the necessary training for each nonlethal weapon (e.g., baton), electroshock weapon (e.g., stun guns or Tasers), mace, or oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray before issuance. Nonlethal weapons instructors should be certified by an organization recognized nationally (e.g., National Rifle Association, Federal Bureau of Investigation, the military) or by the state (e.g., Police Officer Standards and Training). 12.7.2.2 Certifications described in 12.7.2.1 should specify the nonlethal weapon type(s) that the instructor is qualified to teach. The licensee's instructors should be recertified consistent with the standards recognized by a national or state entity at intervals not to exceed 3 years. The licensee should document the training in accordance with the KSA matrix of the Commission-approved plans. 12.7.3 Handcuffs DG-5043, Page 73 12.7.3.1 Handcuffing is a common method of restraint within the law enforcement community and is used to inhibit an individual's upper body mobility, thereby preventing individuals from using their arms to cause harm to themselves or another individual. Handcuffing may fall into more than one level of the force continuum, depending on the situation and how the techniques are applied. 12.7.3.2 Compliance handcuffing techniques are normally associated with the restraint of a compliant individual who is receptive and cooperative when given verbal commands. Caution should always be exercised when applying compliance handcuffing techniques because a compliant individual may become combative. Because of the lack of physical force associated with compliance handcuffing, it may be associated with soft physical techniques within the force continuum. 12.7.3.3 Noncompliant handcuffing is the act of forceful physical restraint against the will of an individual who has demonstrated combative characteristics by actively attempting to escape, evade, or engage other individuals in a harmful or offensive manner. Extreme caution should be used before and during the application of noncompliant handcuffing techniques to ensure the safety of all involved. Because of the physical force associated with noncompliant handcuffing (i.e., defensive tactics such as blows, strikes, takedowns), it is normally associated with hard physical techniques within the force continuum. 12.7.3.4 It is recommended that licensees include both compliant and noncompliant handcuffing techniques and associated defensive tactics in their training programs to ensure the safety of the security force and other plant personnel. Licen sees should also consider including in their training programs situational training (live scenarios and exercises) that includes the application of the force continuum and the measures within the force continuum (e.g., OC spray, defensive tactics, baton, handcuffing). Before issuing defensive equipment, licensees should be sure that personnel have been trained by a qualified instructor. 12.7.4 Security Enhancements (Other Equipment) 12.7.4.1 Licensees should consider the use of other equipment to augment the equipment they possess and to enhance the capabilities of their physical protection programs. Equipment such as binoculars, night vision aids, illumination devices (i.e., hand-fired flares, remote-operated spotlights), and remote-operated duress alarms may be used to enhance detection, assessment, and identification capabilities. 12.7.4.2 Licensees may use other enhancements, such as nonlethal gas (incapacitating agents) through various delivery methods, to delay the approach of adversaries to vital areas and potential targets within the protected area. | ||
: 13. Firearms Maintenance Program To satisfy the requirements in 10 CFR 73.55(n) and Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall develop and implement a firearms maintenance and accountability program for all licensee-assigned firearms. In order to ensure that firearms function as designed by the manufacturer, no modifications should be made to any firearms, firearm accessories (magazines, sights, holsters), or contingency equipment that is not approved by the firearm or equipment manufacturer. A qualified armorer or DG-5043, Page 74 gunsmith should make all modifications to any firearm. At a minimum, the licensee must implement the maintenance program described below. | : 13. Firearms Maintenance Program To satisfy the requirements in 10 CFR 73.55(n) and Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall develop and implement a firearms maintenance and accountability program for all licensee-assigned firearms. In order to ensure that firearms function as designed by the manufacturer, no modifications should be made to any firearms, firearm accessories (magazines, sights, holsters), or contingency equipment that is not approved by the firearm or equipment manufacturer. A qualified armorer or DG-5043, Page 74 gunsmith should make all modifications to any firearm. At a minimum, the licensee must implement the maintenance program described below. | ||
13.1 Semiannual Test Firing for Accuracy and Functionality As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all firearms, whether licensee- or contractor-owned, must be test fired semiannually. 13.1.1 A qualified armorer or a qualified training instructor should conduct or observe the test firing, consistent with procedures and criteria approved by a qualified armorer to ensure accuracy and reliability. The test firing shall be conducted semiannually (a nominal 6-month period). The semiannual test fire should include the discharge of 10 or more rounds, at a minimum, to determine the functionality, reliability, and accuracy of each weapon. The assessment should also consider seasonal conditions. 13.1.2 Testing activities can be satisfied during scheduled range activities. 13.1.3 Weapons that are unassigned and those that have not been cycled through the range activities within a 6-month period should be test fired and the results documented. As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(3), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's firearms maintenance program must include program activity documentation. Licensee implementing procedures should detail a method for documenting test-firing results. | 13.1 Semiannual Test Firing for Accuracy and Functionality As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all firearms, whether licensee- or contractor-owned, must be test fired semiannually. 13.1.1 A qualified armorer or a qualified training instructor should conduct or observe the test firing, consistent with procedures and criteria approved by a qualified armorer to ensure accuracy and reliability. The test firing shall be conducted semiannually (a nominal 6-month period). The semiannual test fire should include the discharge of 10 or more rounds, at a minimum, to determine the functionality, reliability, and accuracy of each weapon. The assessment should also consider seasonal conditions. 13.1.2 Testing activities can be satisfied during scheduled range activities. 13.1.3 Weapons that are unassigned and those that have not been cycled through the range activities within a 6-month period should be test fired and the results documented. As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(3), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's firearms maintenance program must include program activity documentation. Licensee implementing procedures should detail a method for documenting test-firing results. | ||
Line 627: | Line 627: | ||
13.6 Records As required by Section VI, paragraph H to 10 CFR Part 73, and consistent with the requirements of 10 CFR 73.55(q), the licensee must retain all reports, records, or other documentation required. | 13.6 Records As required by Section VI, paragraph H to 10 CFR Part 73, and consistent with the requirements of 10 CFR 73.55(q), the licensee must retain all reports, records, or other documentation required. | ||
DG-5043, Page 77 13.7 Authorized Simulation Weapons Licensees should consider implementing a similar firearms maintenance program for their exercise simulation system equipment. | DG-5043, Page 77 13.7 Authorized Simulation Weapons Licensees should consider implementing a similar firearms maintenance program for their exercise simulation system equipment. | ||
: 14. Audits and Reviews As described in Section VI, paragraph I of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall review the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan in accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 73.55(m). | : 14. Audits and Reviews As described in Section VI, paragraph I of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall review the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan in accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 73.55(m). | ||
Line 684: | Line 684: | ||
zero - to adjust a firearm's sighting mechanism(s) to cause a projectile to strike a target at the point of aim. This term may also refer to the number before 1. | zero - to adjust a firearm's sighting mechanism(s) to cause a projectile to strike a target at the point of aim. This term may also refer to the number before 1. | ||
DG-5043, Page 84 REFERENCES 3 1. U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), "Physical Protection of Plants and Materials," Part 73, Title 10, "Energy." | DG-5043, Page 84 REFERENCES 3 1. U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), "Physical Protection of Plants and Materials," Part 73, Title 10, "Energy." | ||
: 2. CFR, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utiliza tion Facilities," Part 50, Chapter 1, Title 10, "Energy." | : 2. CFR, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utiliza tion Facilities," Part 50, Chapter 1, Title 10, "Energy." | ||
: 3. CFR, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants," Part 52, Title 10, "Energy." | : 3. CFR, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants," Part 52, Title 10, "Energy." | ||
: 4. NRC, Regulatory Guide 5.76, "Physical Protection Programs at Nuclear Power Reactors," Washington, DC. | : 4. NRC, Regulatory Guide 5.76, "Physical Protection Programs at Nuclear Power Reactors," Washington, DC. | ||
: 5. NRC, Regulatory Guide 5.81, "Target Set Identification and Development for Nuclear Power Reactors," Washington, DC. | : 5. NRC, Regulatory Guide 5.81, "Target Set Identification and Development for Nuclear Power Reactors," Washington, DC. | ||
: 6. Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI), NEI 03-12, Revision 7, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]." | : 6. Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI), NEI 03-12, Revision 7, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]." | ||
4 7. Institute of Nuclear Power Operations, INPO-AP-921, "Principles of Training System Development," June 1997, Atlanta, GA. | 4 7. Institute of Nuclear Power Operations, INPO-AP-921, "Principles of Training System Development," June 1997, Atlanta, GA. | ||
5 8. International Atomic Energy Agency, Nuclear Security Series No. 13, "Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities (INFCIRC/255/Revision 5), IAEA, Vienna, Austria, 2011. | 5 8. International Atomic Energy Agency, Nuclear Security Series No. 13, "Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities (INFCIRC/255/Revision 5), IAEA, Vienna, Austria, 2011. | ||
: 9. International Atomic Energy Agency, "Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nuclear Power Plant Personnel," IAEA-Tecdoc-1057, Vienna, Austria, 1998. | : 9. International Atomic Energy Agency, "Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nuclear Power Plant Personnel," IAEA-Tecdoc-1057, Vienna, Austria, 1998. | ||
6 10. Lautenberg Amendment (1996) to the Gun Control Act [Public Law 104 208, 18 U.S.C. § 922(g)(9)]. | 6 10. Lautenberg Amendment (1996) to the Gun Control Act [Public Law 104 208, 18 U.S.C. § 922(g)(9)]. | ||
3 Publicly available documents from the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) are available electronically through the NRC Library on the NRC's public Web site at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/. The documents can also be viewed on-line for free or printed for a fee in the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR) at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415 3548; and e-mail pdr.resource@nrc.gov. 4 Publications from the Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI) are available at their Web site: http://www.nei.org/ or by contacting the headquarters at Nuclear Energy Institute, 1776 I Street NW, Washington DC 20006-3708, Phone: 202-739-800, Fax 202-785-4019. | 3 Publicly available documents from the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) are available electronically through the NRC Library on the NRC's public Web site at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/. The documents can also be viewed on-line for free or printed for a fee in the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR) at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415 3548; and e-mail pdr.resource@nrc.gov. 4 Publications from the Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI) are available at their Web site: http://www.nei.org/ or by contacting the headquarters at Nuclear Energy Institute, 1776 I Street NW, Washington DC 20006-3708, Phone: 202-739-800, Fax 202-785-4019. | ||
5 Copies of Institute of Nuclear Power Operations (INPO) documents are available at Website http://www.inpo.info/ or by contacting the headquarters of Institute of Nuclear Power Operations, 700 Galleria Parkway, SE, Suite 100,Atlanta, GA 30339-5943 6 Copies of International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) documents may be obtained through their Web site: WWW.IAEA.Org/ or by writing the International Atomic Energy Agency P.O. Box 100 Wagramer Strasse 5, A-1400 Vienna, Austria. Telephone (+431) 2600-0, Fax (+431) 2600-7, or E-Mail at Official.Mail@IAEA.Org DG-5043, Page 85 | 5 Copies of Institute of Nuclear Power Operations (INPO) documents are available at Website http://www.inpo.info/ or by contacting the headquarters of Institute of Nuclear Power Operations, 700 Galleria Parkway, SE, Suite 100,Atlanta, GA 30339-5943 6 Copies of International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) documents may be obtained through their Web site: WWW.IAEA.Org/ or by writing the International Atomic Energy Agency P.O. Box 100 Wagramer Strasse 5, A-1400 Vienna, Austria. Telephone (+431) 2600-0, Fax (+431) 2600-7, or E-Mail at Official.Mail@IAEA.Org DG-5043, Page 85 | ||
: 11. Violent Crime Control Act of 1994 (Public Law 103 322, H.R. 3355). | : 11. Violent Crime Control Act of 1994 (Public Law 103 322, H.R. 3355). | ||
: 12. CFR, "Fitness for Duty Programs," Part 26, Chapter 1, Title 10, "Energy" | : 12. CFR, "Fitness for Duty Programs," Part 26, Chapter 1, Title 10, "Energy" | ||
: 13. NRC, Regulatory Guide (RG) 5.74, "Managing the Safety/Security Interface," Washington, DC. | : 13. NRC, Regulatory Guide (RG) 5.74, "Managing the Safety/Security Interface," Washington, DC. | ||
: 14. NRC, NUREG-1409, "Backfitting Guidelines," July 1990, NRC, Washington, D.C.(ADAMS Accession No. ML032230247) | : 14. NRC, NUREG-1409, "Backfitting Guidelines," July 1990, NRC, Washington, D.C.(ADAMS Accession No. ML032230247) | ||
: 15. NRC, Management Directive 8.4, "Management of Facility-Specific Backfitting and Information Collection," NRC, Washington, D.C. | : 15. NRC, Management Directive 8.4, "Management of Facility-Specific Backfitting and Information Collection," NRC, Washington, D.C. | ||
Line 714: | Line 714: | ||
Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-1 ATTACHMENT 1: Critical Knowledge, Skills and Abilities Matrix Licensees are not expected to have job position titles that are specifically commensurate with the job titles in this Attachmen | Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-1 ATTACHMENT 1: Critical Knowledge, Skills and Abilities Matrix Licensees are not expected to have job position titles that are specifically commensurate with the job titles in this Attachmen | ||
: t. This guidance applies to the knowledge, skills and abilities associated with job positions or duty functions with in positions and, therefore, the guidance assumes no nexus to job title. Licensees are guided by the performance code definitions provided in Section C.1 item 7 of this Regulat ory Guide. The minimum critical task(s) required for each duty position are identified in the most current revision of NEI 03-12, Appendix B, Critical Task Matrix. Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | : t. This guidance applies to the knowledge, skills and abilities associated with job positions or duty functions with in positions and, therefore, the guidance assumes no nexus to job title. Licensees are guided by the performance code definitions provided in Section C.1 item 7 of this Regulat ory Guide. The minimum critical task(s) required for each duty position are identified in the most current revision of NEI 03-12, Appendix B, Critical Task Matrix. Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 1. Perform Critical Administrative Items: Perform administrative tasks associated with the conduct of security operations consistent with station procedures. | |||
* Identify the role of security personnel in supporting safe operation of the facility [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D | * Identify the role of security personnel in supporting safe operation of the facility [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D | ||
* Identify the 10 CFR 73.21 requirements for the protection of Safeguards Information [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D | * Identify the 10 CFR 73.21 requirements for the protection of Safeguards Information [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D | ||
Line 726: | Line 726: | ||
* Perform pre-job briefing X X X P/S | * Perform pre-job briefing X X X P/S | ||
* Inspect security posts X X X X X P/D | * Inspect security posts X X X X X P/D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-2 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-2 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Issue vital area (VA) keys X X X X X P/S/D | * Issue vital area (VA) keys X X X X X P/S/D | ||
* Identify/perform reportability X X X X X [X] P/S/D | * Identify/perform reportability X X X X X [X] P/S/D | ||
* Change VA keys and cores/safeguards combinations | * Change VA keys and cores/safeguards combinations | ||
[X] [X] | |||
P/S | P/S | ||
* Evaluate individuals for the symptoms, contributing factors, and effects of fatigue X X P/S/D | * Evaluate individuals for the symptoms, contributing factors, and effects of fatigue X X P/S/D | ||
Line 741: | Line 741: | ||
* Issue visitor badges [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] A M | * Issue visitor badges [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] A M | ||
* Issue escort badge and escort instructions [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] S/D | * Issue escort badge and escort instructions [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] S/D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-3 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-3 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 3. Control Personnel Access to Protected and Vital Areas: Verify identity and authoriza tion of individual seeking ingress and permit or deny entry accordingly; communicate required logging information to the alarm station operator or record data, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | |||
* Control access to VA [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] [X] S/D | * Control access to VA [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] [X] S/D | ||
* Control access to PA [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] [X] S/D | * Control access to PA [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] [X] S/D | ||
Line 754: | Line 754: | ||
* Monitor/operate walk-through metal detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | * Monitor/operate walk-through metal detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | ||
* Monitor/operate explosive detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | * Monitor/operate explosive detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-4 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-4 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Conduct hands-on search of personnel [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | * Conduct hands-on search of personnel [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | ||
* Recognize/detect contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | * Recognize/detect contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | ||
Line 768: | Line 768: | ||
* React to detection of radioactive material [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D 6. Perform Vehicle Search: Verify/obtain access authorization; complete search requirements; prepare appropriate forms on vehicle; ensure driver is searched; determine need for escort and complete vehicle entry requirements, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures, including excepted situations. | * React to detection of radioactive material [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D 6. Perform Vehicle Search: Verify/obtain access authorization; complete search requirements; prepare appropriate forms on vehicle; ensure driver is searched; determine need for escort and complete vehicle entry requirements, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures, including excepted situations. | ||
* Search vehicle [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | * Search vehicle [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-5 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-5 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Operate explosive detector (e.g., Itemizer) [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | * Operate explosive detector (e.g., Itemizer) [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M | ||
* Control vehicle access to PA/owner-controlled area (OCA) [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D | * Control vehicle access to PA/owner-controlled area (OCA) [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D | ||
Line 779: | Line 779: | ||
* Escort vehicles with hazardous material [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] X S/D | * Escort vehicles with hazardous material [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] X S/D | ||
* Escort excepted material [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D | * Escort excepted material [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-6 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-6 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 8. Conduct Security Patrols: Patrol and inspect assigned area to include PA, VA, and vehicle barriers and observe area of responsibility for suspicious events, obvious indications of tampering, or unauthorized persons, vehicles, materials, or activities, consistent with station procedures. Make or document appropriate reports in response to alarms and investigations, c onsistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing | |||
procedures. | procedures. | ||
Line 791: | Line 791: | ||
* Respond to confirmed tampering events X X X D 9. Conduct Security Communications: Demonstrate proper operation techniques to transmit and receive messages, consistent with N RC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | * Respond to confirmed tampering events X X X D 9. Conduct Security Communications: Demonstrate proper operation techniques to transmit and receive messages, consistent with N RC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | ||
* Establish radio communications [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Establish radio communications [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-7 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-7 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Establish alternate communications [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Establish alternate communications [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Identify security command and control communication structures during normal and contingency operations [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D | * Identify security command and control communication structures during normal and contingency operations [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D | ||
Line 802: | Line 802: | ||
* Demonstrate operation of active vehicle barrier(s) X X X X X [X] P/S | * Demonstrate operation of active vehicle barrier(s) X X X X X [X] P/S | ||
* Demonstrate motor-operated gate operation X X X X X [X] P/S | * Demonstrate motor-operated gate operation X X X X X [X] P/S | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-8 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-8 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 12. Test Intrusion Detection Equipment and Special-Purpose Detectors: Demonstrate the ability to properly test intrusion detection equipment and/or special-purpose detectors using appropriate test methods and test devices, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | |||
* Test intrusion detection system [X] [X] [X] X X X [X] P/S | * Test intrusion detection system [X] [X] [X] X X X [X] P/S | ||
* Test special-purpose detection system [X] [X] [X] X X X [X] P/S 13. Provide Compensatory Measures: Locate and describe post locations, areas of responsibility, timing of actions and communication requirements for each assigned posting, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | * Test special-purpose detection system [X] [X] [X] X X X [X] P/S 13. Provide Compensatory Measures: Locate and describe post locations, areas of responsibility, timing of actions and communication requirements for each assigned posting, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | ||
Line 814: | Line 814: | ||
* React to loss of PA/VA barrier X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D | * React to loss of PA/VA barrier X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D | ||
* React to loss of vehicle barrier X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D | * React to loss of vehicle barrier X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-9 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-9 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 14. Conduct Area Searches: Demonstrate appropriate search techniques to recognize and properly respond upon discovery of contraband and prohibited items, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | |||
* Search OCA, PA, and VA [X] X X X X X X [X] [X] [X] S/D | * Search OCA, PA, and VA [X] X X X X X X [X] [X] [X] S/D | ||
* Recognize contraband and prohibited items [X] X X X X X X [X] [X] [X] A M | * Recognize contraband and prohibited items [X] X X X X X X [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
Line 823: | Line 823: | ||
* Respond to alarms X X X X X [X] P/S/D 16. Determine Amount of Force Required To Prevent an Unauthorized Act: Demonstrate understanding of situation in which the use of force is authorized and demonstrate the appropriate degree and type of force necessary, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | * Respond to alarms X X X X X [X] P/S/D 16. Determine Amount of Force Required To Prevent an Unauthorized Act: Demonstrate understanding of situation in which the use of force is authorized and demonstrate the appropriate degree and type of force necessary, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | ||
* Conduct arrest/detention X X X X X [X] [X] S/D | * Conduct arrest/detention X X X X X [X] [X] S/D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-10 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-10 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Determine if a legal search may be performed X X X X X [X] [X] | * Determine if a legal search may be performed X X X X X [X] [X] | ||
* Determine if a legal arrest may be made X X X X X [X] [X] | * Determine if a legal arrest may be made X X X X X [X] [X] | ||
Line 830: | Line 830: | ||
* Determine when the use of nonlethal and lethal force is justified (force continuum) X X X X X [X] D | * Determine when the use of nonlethal and lethal force is justified (force continuum) X X X X X [X] D | ||
* Identify situations when search and seizure by private security personnel are legal X X X X X [X] [X] D | * Identify situations when search and seizure by private security personnel are legal X X X X X [X] [X] D | ||
* Handcuff and search a suspect X X X X X [X] [X] P/S/D | * Handcuff and search a suspect X X X X X [X] [X] P/S/D | ||
: 17. Perform Central and Secondary Alarm Station Functions: Demonstrate routine alarm station functions and contingency response procedures, including communications, for alarm | : 17. Perform Central and Secondary Alarm Station Functions: Demonstrate routine alarm station functions and contingency response procedures, including communications, for alarm | ||
Line 842: | Line 842: | ||
* Run required reports X X X A M | * Run required reports X X X A M | ||
* Identify actions upon loss of intrusion detection system X X X P/D | * Identify actions upon loss of intrusion detection system X X X P/D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-11 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-11 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Monitor personnel working in the isolation zone X X X [X] P/D 18. Operate the Base Station Radio and Security Communications Equipment: | * Monitor personnel working in the isolation zone X X X [X] P/D 18. Operate the Base Station Radio and Security Communications Equipment: | ||
Select the proper communications equipment on the appropriate frequency as required, operate equipment by using correct communications procedures, contact fixed posts, patrols, responders, and LLEA recording th e check, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | Select the proper communications equipment on the appropriate frequency as required, operate equipment by using correct communications procedures, contact fixed posts, patrols, responders, and LLEA recording th e check, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | ||
Line 854: | Line 854: | ||
* Operate card access system X X X A M | * Operate card access system X X X A M | ||
* Change status and monitor zones X X X A S | * Change status and monitor zones X X X A S | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-12 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-12 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Activate/deactivate alarm point X X X A S | * Activate/deactivate alarm point X X X A S | ||
* Respond to system errors X X X P/D | * Respond to system errors X X X P/D | ||
Line 870: | Line 870: | ||
* Identify offsite law enforcement response [X] X X X X X D | * Identify offsite law enforcement response [X] X X X X X D | ||
* Identify tactics and force that an adversary group might use to achieve its objectives X X X X [X] D | * Identify tactics and force that an adversary group might use to achieve its objectives X X X X [X] D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-13 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-13 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Identify response force deployment, tactical movement, withdrawal, and use of support fire X X X X [X] D | * Identify response force deployment, tactical movement, withdrawal, and use of support fire X X X X [X] D | ||
* Identify integrated response plan with LLEA and state and federal resources X X X X D | * Identify integrated response plan with LLEA and state and federal resources X X X X D | ||
Line 883: | Line 883: | ||
* Coordinate response team X X X S/D | * Coordinate response team X X X S/D | ||
* Redirect team to respond to threat X X X S/D | * Redirect team to respond to threat X X X S/D | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-14 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-14 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 22. Comply with Physical Fitness Performance Requirements: Demonstrate the level of physical fitness necessary to perform assigned duties and responsibilities, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | |||
* Demonstrate strength, endurance, and agility required to perform the assigned security-related duties X X X X X [X] [X] A M 23. React to Bomb, Hostage, and Civil Disturbance Situations: | * Demonstrate strength, endurance, and agility required to perform the assigned security-related duties X X X X X [X] [X] A M 23. React to Bomb, Hostage, and Civil Disturbance Situations: | ||
Demonstrate the ability to execute station procedures and respond correctly to a potential bomb threat, hostage situation, or civil disturbance near the facility, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | Demonstrate the ability to execute station procedures and respond correctly to a potential bomb threat, hostage situation, or civil disturbance near the facility, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | ||
Line 895: | Line 895: | ||
* Respond to a hostage or duress situation [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A D | * Respond to a hostage or duress situation [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A D | ||
* Conduct an investigation and prepare a report X X X [X] A M | * Conduct an investigation and prepare a report X X X [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-15 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-15 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 24. Perform Nonlethal Defense Measures: Demonstrate proper use of nonlethal defensive measures, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | |||
* Demonstrate the use of chemical agent X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Demonstrate the use of chemical agent X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate CS/CN smoke grenades X X X X X A M | * Demonstrate CS/CN smoke grenades X X X X X A M | ||
Line 902: | Line 902: | ||
* Use shotgun as a gas launcher X X X X X A M | * Use shotgun as a gas launcher X X X X X A M | ||
* Demonstrate the use of baton X X X X X A M | * Demonstrate the use of baton X X X X X A M | ||
* Conduct unarmed self-defense X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Conduct unarmed self-defense X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
: 25. Demonstrate Proficiency with Handgun: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the defensive strategy, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | : 25. Demonstrate Proficiency with Handgun: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the defensive strategy, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | ||
* Engage target with handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Engage target with handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
Line 910: | Line 910: | ||
* Demonstrate weak-hand shooting using handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate weak-hand shooting using handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate use of clearing trap X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate use of clearing trap X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-16 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-16 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate proficiency under simulated tactical situation X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate proficiency under simulated tactical situation X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
Line 922: | Line 922: | ||
* Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-17 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-17 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions and safe handling of firearms simulated as appropriate X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions and safe handling of firearms simulated as appropriate X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 26. Demonstrate Proficiency with 12-Gauge Shotgun: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the | * Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 26. Demonstrate Proficiency with 12-Gauge Shotgun: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the | ||
Line 936: | Line 936: | ||
* Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-18 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-18 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds) X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds) X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
Line 948: | Line 948: | ||
* Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-19 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-19 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 27. Demonstrate Proficiency in Use of Semi-automatic Rifle: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the | * Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 27. Demonstrate Proficiency in Use of Semi-automatic Rifle: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the | ||
Line 963: | Line 963: | ||
* Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-20 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-20 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds) X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds) X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
Line 974: | Line 974: | ||
* Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-21 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-21 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 28. Demonstrate Use of Protective Equipment: Demonstrate proper donning and use of protective response equipment, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | * Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 28. Demonstrate Use of Protective Equipment: Demonstrate proper donning and use of protective response equipment, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures. | ||
Line 985: | Line 985: | ||
* Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke and/or barriers/shields are encountered during a contingency event X X X A M | * Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke and/or barriers/shields are encountered during a contingency event X X X A M | ||
* Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions X X X A M | * Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions X X X A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-22 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-22 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate functional and operational understanding of safety/security interface related to fields of fire X X X 30. Demonstrate proficiency of [enhanced/other weapons] | * Demonstrate functional and operational understanding of safety/security interface related to fields of fire X X X 30. Demonstrate proficiency of [enhanced/other weapons] | ||
* Engage target with [enhanced/other weapons] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Engage target with [enhanced/other weapons] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
Line 1,000: | Line 1,000: | ||
* Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Perform annual daylight Appendix B firearms qualification [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Perform annual daylight Appendix B firearms qualification [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-23 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-23 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Perform annual night fire qualification with [enhanced/other weapons] in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions that would occur because of loss of offsite power [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Perform annual night fire qualification with [enhanced/other weapons] in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions that would occur because of loss of offsite power [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate the ability to load, unload, and clear all assigned weapons in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to load, unload, and clear all assigned weapons in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
Line 1,010: | Line 1,010: | ||
* Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | * Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask [X] [X] [X] [X] A M | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-24 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-24 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions | ||
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** | |||
* Demonstrate functional and operational understanding of the safety/security interface (fields of fire and destructive capability) [X] [X] [X] [X] | * Demonstrate functional and operational understanding of the safety/security interface (fields of fire and destructive capability) [X] [X] [X] [X] | ||
* Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process}} | * Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process}} |
Revision as of 04:49, 28 April 2019
ML14297A272 | |
Person / Time | |
---|---|
Issue date: | 12/31/2015 |
From: | Vaughn J Division of Security Policy, Office of Nuclear Regulatory Research |
To: | |
Bayssie M M | |
Shared Package | |
ML14297A263 | List: |
References | |
DG-5043 RG-5.075, Rev. 1 | |
Download: ML14297A272 (111) | |
Text
U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION December 2015 OFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCH Division 5 DRAFT REGULATORY GUIDE Technical Lead James Vaught This regulatory guide is being issued in draft form to involve the public in the development of regulatory guidance in this area. It has not received final staff review or approval and does not represent an NRC final staff position. Public comments are being solicited on this draft guide and its associated regulatory analysis. Comments should be accompanied by appropriate supporting data. Comments may be submitted throug h the Federal rulemaking Web site, http://www.regulations.gov, by searching for Docket ID
- NRC-2015-0287. Alternatively, comments may be submitted to the Rules, Announcements, and Directives Branch, Office of Administration, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, DC 20555-0001. Comments must be submitted by the date indicated in the Federal Register notice. Electronic copies of this draft regulatory guide, previous versions of this guide, and other recently issued guides are available through the NRC's public Web site under the Regulatory Guides document collection of the NRC Library at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/reg-guides/. The draft regulatory guide is also available through the NRC's Agencywide Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/adams.html, under Accession No. ML14297A272. The regulatory analysis may be found in ADAMS under Accession No. ML142972A274.
DRAFT REGULATORY GUIDE DG-5043 (Proposed Revision 1 of Regulatory Guide 5.75, dated July 2009) TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION OF SECURITY PERSONNEL AT NUCLEAR POWER REACTOR FACILITIES A. INTRODUCTION Purpose This regulatory guide (RG) describes approaches and methodologies that the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) considers acceptable for the training and qualification of personnel who are assigned duties and responsibilities required for the implementation of Commission-approved security plans, licensee response strategies, and implementing procedures at nuclear power reactor facilities. Additionally, this RG describes methods the NRC staff considers acceptable for designing and implementing the performance evaluation program described in Section VI of Appendix B to Title 10 of the Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR) Part 73, "Physical Protection of Plants and Materials" (Ref. 1).
Applicability This RG provides guidance for power reactor applicants and licensees under 10 CFR Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utilization Facilities" (Ref. 2), and under 10 CFR Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 3).
Applicable Regulations
- 10 CFR Part 73, "Physical Protection of Plants and Materials," provides requirements for the establishment and maintenance of a physical protection system which will have the capability for protection of special nuclear material.
o 10 CFR 73.55(c)(4) requires that licensees shall establish, maintain, implement, and follow a Training and Qualification Plan that describes how the criteria set forth in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 will be implemented.
DG-5043, Page 2 o 10 CFR 73.55(d)(3) requires that licensees must ensure that security personnel are trained, equipped, and qualified to perform their assigned duties and responsibilities in accordance with Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 and the Training and Qualification plan.
o 10 CFR Part 73.55(d)(3) provides requirements for non-security personnel who are assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the physical protection plan.
- 10 CFR Part 73, Appendix B, Section VI, Nuclear Power Reactor Training and Qualification Plan for Personnel Performing Security Program Duties," provides performance-based requirements that describe the minimum training and qualifications for individuals assigned to implement the physical protection program at NRC-licensed nuclear power reactor facilities.
o 10 CFR Part 73 Appendix B, Section VI, paragraph C.3.(a), requires that licensees shall develop, implement and maintain a Performance Evaluation Program that is documented in procedures which describe how the licensee will demonstrate and assess the effectiveness of their onsite physical protection program and protective strategy. The strategy includes the capability of the armed response team to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities during safeguards contingency events. Related Guidance
- RG 5.76, "Physical Protection Programs at Nuclear Power Reactors," (Ref. 4) provides approaches the NRC staff has found acceptable for meeting the requirements of 10 CFR Part 73.
- RG 5.81, "Target Set Identification and Development for Nuclear Power Reactors," (Ref. 5) provides guidance on implementation of requirements for physical protection of licensed activities in nuclear power reactors against radiological sabotage. Purpose of Regulatory Guides The NRC issues RGs to describe to the public met hods that the staff considers acceptable for use in implementing specific parts of the agency's regulat ions, to explain techniques that the staff uses in evaluating specific issues or postulated events, and to provide guidance to applicants. RG are not substitutes for regulations and compliance with them is not required. Methods and solutions that differ from those set forth in RG will be deemed acceptable if they provide a basis for the findings required for the issuance or continuance of a permit or license by the Commission. Paperwork Reduction Act This regulatory guide contains and references information covered by 10 CFR Part 73 that are subject to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq
.) These information collections were approved by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB), control number 3150-0002. Public Protection Notification The NRC may not conduct nor sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a request for information or an information collection requirement unless the requesting document displays a currently valid OMB control number.
DG-5043, Page 3 Table of Contents A. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................
....... 1 B. DISCUSSION ....................................................................................................................
............. 6 C. STAFF REGULATORY GUIDANCE ...................................................................................... 10
- 1. General Requirements and Introduction .................................................................................... 10
- 2. Employment Suitability and Qualification ................................................................................. 12
2.1 Suitability
............................................................................................................................... 13 2.2 Physical Qualifications ......................................................................................................... 13
2.3 General
Physical Qualification ............................................................................................ 14
2.4 Vision
and Hearing ............................................................................................................... 14
2.5 Existing
Medical Conditions ................................................................................................ 15
2.6 Addiction
..............................................................................................................................
.. 15 2.7 Other Physical Requirements .............................................................................................. 15
2.8 Psychological
Qualifications ................................................................................................. 15
2.9 Medical
Examinations and Physical Fitness Qualifications ................................................... 15 2.10 Physical Requalification ....................................................................................................... 16 2.11 Documentation ...................................................................................................................... 16
- 3. Duty Training .................................................................................................................
............... 17
3.1 Critical
Knowledge, Skills and Abilities (KSAs) ................................................................... 17
3.2 Security
Personnel Training ................................................................................................ 18
3.3 Training
of Personnel ........................................................................................................... 19
- 4. On-the-Job Training ...........................................................................................................
.......... 20
- 5. Performance Evaluation Program .............................................................................................. 2 2 5.1 Tactical Response Drills and Force-on-Force Exercises ......................................................... 22
5.2 Types
of Tactical Response Drills and Force-on-Force Exercises ......................................... 22
5.3 Defining
Participation
........................................................................................................... 24 5.4 Key Program Elements ......................................................................................................... 26
5.5 Drill
and Exercise Scenario Development .............................................................................. 27
5.6 Identification
of Target Sets ................................................................................................. 27
5.7 Simulations
and Artificialities .............................................................................................. 28
5.8 Cautions
and Restrictions .................................................................................................... 29
5.9 Communications
................................................................................................................... 29 5.10 Scheduling and Planning ...................................................................................................... 29 5.11 Command and Control of Drills and Exercises ....................................................................... 30 5.12 Controller Training and Qualification Process ....................................................................... 31 5.13 Controller Knowledge and Experience ................................................................................... 31 5.14 Training Design, Development, and Implementation ............................................................. 32 5.15 Mock Adversary Force Member Training and Qualification Process .................................... 34 5.16 Mock Adversary Force Member Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities ........................................ 35
DG-5043, Page 4 5.17 Mock Adversary Force Member Training Design, Development, and Implementation ......... 37 5.18 Conduct of Drills and Exercises ..............................................................................................
38 5.19 Critique and Evaluation ....................................................................................................... 41 5.20 Critique and Evaluation Material ............................................................................................ 4 2 5.21 Drill or Exercise Documentation ............................................................................................ 44
- 6. Duty Qualification and Requalification ...................................................................................... 4 5 6.1 Written Examination ............................................................................................................ 45 6.2 Hands-On Performance Demonstration .................................................................................. 46
6.3 Annual
Written Examination .............................................................................................. 46
6.4 Requalification
...................................................................................................................... 46
- 7. Certifications of Instructors and Armorers ................................................................................ 47
7.1 Security
Training Instructors .............................................................................................. 47
7.2 Initial
Instructor Qualification ..............................................................................................
.. 47 7.3 Continuing Training for Security Instructors .......................................................................... 48
7.4 Subject
Matter Experts ........................................................................................................ 48
7.5 Firearms
Instructor .............................................................................................................. 48
7.6 Armorer
..............................................................................................................................
... 48 8. Weapons Training ..............................................................................................................
........... 49
8.1 General
Firearms Training .................................................................................................. 49
8.2 Mechanical
Assembly, Disassembly, Wea pons Capabilities, and Fundamentals of Marksmanship ..................................................................................................................
................... 49
8.3 Weapons
Cleaning and Storage ........................................................................................... 49 8.4 Day and Night Tactical Weapons Training ............................................................................. 49 8.5 Safe Weapons Handling
........................................................................................................ 51 8.6 Clearing, Loading, Unloading, and Reloading ........................................................................ 51
8.7 Firing
Under Stress ............................................................................................................... 51
8.8 Zeroing
Weapons and Weapons Sighting Adjustments .......................................................... 52
8.9 Target
Identification and Engagement .................................................................................... 52 8.10 Weapons Malfunctions ......................................................................................................... 52 8.11 Cover and Concealment ....................................................................................................... 53 8.12 Weapons Familiarization ..................................................................................................... 53 8.13 Use of Deadly Force .............................................................................................................. 54 8.14 Range Periodicity .................................................................................................................. 54
- 9. Weapons Qualifications and Requalification ............................................................................. 55
- 10. Alternate Firearms Qualification Programs .......................................................................... 55
- 11. Firearms Qualification Courses ...............................................................................................
56 11.2 Semi-Automatic Rifle ............................................................................................................ 57 11.3 Shotgun ..............................................................................................................................
.... 57 11.4 Low-Light Qualifications ..................................................................................................... 58 11.5 Tactical Weapons Qualification Course.................................................................................. 59
DG-5043, Page 5 11.6 Course of Fire Requirements for the Tactical Qualification ................................................... 60 11.7 Course of Fire Stages for the Tactical Qualification Course .................................................. 61 11.8 General Implementation Guidance ......................................................................................... 68 11.9 Weapons Requalification Schedule ........................................................................................ 68 11.10 Short-Cycle Requalification ................................................................................................. 69
- 12. Weapons, Personal Equipment, and Maintenance ................................................................ 69 12.1 Weapons ..............................................................................................................................
... 69 12.2 Personal Equipment .............................................................................................................. 70 12.3 Gas Mask, Full Face
.............................................................................................................. 70 12.4 Body Armor, Bullet Resistant Vest ......................................................................................... 70 12.5 Ammunition/Equipment Belt ............................................................................................... 71 12.6 Two-Way Portable Radio ..................................................................................................... 71 12.7 Additional Personal Equipment .......................................................................................... 72
- 13. Firearms Maintenance Program ............................................................................................. 73 13.1 Semiannual Test Firing for Accuracy and Functionality ........................................................ 74 13.2 Firearms Maintenance and Cleaning Schedule ....................................................................... 74 13.3 Program Activity Documentation ........................................................................................ 75 13.4 Weapons and Ammunition Control and Accountability ......................................................... 75 13.5 Firearm and Ammunition Storage ...................................................................................... 76 13.6 Records ..............................................................................................................................
..... 76 13.7 Authorized Simulation Weapons ......................................................................................... 77
- 14. Audits and Reviews ............................................................................................................
....... 77 D. IMPLEMENTATION ................................................................................................................. 78 GLOSSARY ......................................................................................................................
........................ 80 REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................
...................... 84 BIBLIOGRAPHY ..................................................................................................................
................... 86
.
DG-5043, Page 6 B. DISCUSSION Reason for Revision This revision of the guide (Revision 1) clarifies the staff guidance for the training and qualification requirements delineated in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. This revision incorporates lessons learned from operating experience since the original publication of the guide. In particular, this revision provides more comprehensive discussion of the objectives for training and qualifying licensee and contractor security personnel, as well as personnel who support the licensee's security program but are not direct members of the licensee's security staff or contractors to the security organization. This revision also provides add itional clarification on aspects of the training and qualification process that the staff has determined would be helpful for licensees in implementing their performance evaluation programs. This revision cont ains a broad discussion of tactical response drills and Force on Force exercises, including follow-on critiques, which has been added to ensure that licensees have ample guidance for effective and complete drill and exercise management, from planning through conclusion.
Background Revision 0 of this RG was issued in 2009 to provide the staff's initial guidance for training and qualification of security personnel at operating nuclear power facilities. Documents Endorsed in this Guide
- NEI 03-12, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan [and Independent Spent Fuel Storage Installation Security Program]" (Ref. 6).
Systematic Approach to Training A Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) is one technique used in developing Training and Qualification plans. The application of the SAT process during the development of a licensee Training and Qualification Plan is described in NRC staff endorsed Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI) guidance document NEI 03-12. The Training and Qualification Plan is a component of the license. As defined in 10 CFR 55.4, "Definitions," Systems [or Systematic] Approach to Training means a training program that includes the following five elements: Systematic analysis of the jobs to be performed. Learning objectives derived from the analysis which describes desired performance after training.
Training design and implementation based on the learning objectives.
Evaluation of trainee mastery of the objectives during training.
Evaluation and revision of the training based on the performance of trained personnel in the job setting. While 10 CFR Part 55 relates to licensed operators, the NRC has used and applied this definition throughout Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 to address training for all personnel assigned duties and responsibilities directly associated with the effective implementation of the Commission-approved security plans, licensee protective strategy, and implementing procedures.
DG-5043, Page 7 The following example, taken in part from the Institute of Nuclear Power Operations, INPO-AP-21 (Ref. 7), shows one approach or method for evaluating tasks associated with the development of knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform security-related duties and responsibilities. This example is intended to generically represent a Systematic Approach to Training. Example: Training System Development Training System Development (TSD) represents one systematic approach to training and qualification. This overview describes TSD and its inputs, methods, and products. TSD incorporates the attributes of: analysis, design, development, implementation, and evaluation (the ADDIE model), which are discussed in the following paragraphs. Activ ities within each attribute are discussed and their respective products are identified. Although shown in the sequence a ppropriate for initial development, TSD activities should be period based (i.e., the period of time in which training activities are developed and implemented) on the status of existing programs and other practical constraints. TSD offers a framework for action. When used to complement existing efforts and guide new developments, it can help improve training system performance. Analysis provides a method of responding to changes in human resource requirements, solving job performance problems, and learning from operating experience. It begins by gathering the facts needed to make informed training development decisions. This is necessary to make sure that apparent concerns can be resolved through training. If the facts confirm a valid training need, job analysis uses existing job data and incumbent employees to identify and rate job tasks. Tasks rated Difficult and Important are selected for training and emphasized. Their exact methods of correct performance and underlying competencies are then determined through task analysis. Completing this process reveals reliable information on safe work practices. The skills, knowledge, and abilities identified provide a task-specific content reference for both new and existing programs.
Design uses the task performance information collected during analysis to specify, in measurable terms, the job skills, knowledge, and abilities that training will develop in the learner. Job performance measures are prepared for each task. By defining how individual tasks are performed, they focus training development efforts and support in plant training and qualification. Learning objectives are developed for groups of task-related knowledge and skills. These written statements define exactly when, what, and how well the trainee must perform during training. Tests are produced to ensure that these competencies are reliably evaluated. Together, these measures of observable employee behavior serve as the program design basis. Decisions on training setting, trainee entry qualifications, and organization of learning objectives are also made. Design concludes with the development of a training plan. Development organizes the instructional materials needed for trainees to achieve the learning objectives. Emphasis is on maximizing the use of existing materials and resources. Instructor and trainee activities are defined using the job performance measures, learni ng objectives, and tests produced in design. These activities describe how the instructor and trainees will perform during training to achieve the learning objectives. Existing suitable training materials and lesson plans are selected, and new ones are produced as required. Resulting training materials are reviewed for technical accuracy, tried out with a group of trainees, and revised as necessary. Performance-based training materials are the products of this phase. Implementation is the process of putting training programs into operation. It begins by activating the training plan. Instructors are selected and trained, and the availability of trainees, facilities, and resources is confirmed. Training is delivered as planned.
Evaluation ensures training's continuing ability to produce qualified employees. By monitoring such indicators as employee job performance, plant and procedure changes, and operating experience, DG-5043, Page 8 evaluation helps maintain and improve the training program. It is the dynamic process of assessing performance, identifying concerns, and initiating correc tive actions. Trainee and instructor performance is evaluated. These evaluations serve two purposes; verify that trainees have achieved the learning objectives, and detect and solve instructor performance problems. Key records are maintained to support management information needs and to document the performance of both trainees and instructors. The program feedback it yields enables training to respond adaptively to unforeseen problems or changing conditions. Completing evaluation steps produces the performance data and feedback vital to any training system. Feedback The flow chart below may be used as a resource to help understand the ADDIE model. ADDIE Model (Analysis Design Development Implementation and Evaluation)
Reference:
Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nuclear Power Plant Personnel, IAEA, Vienna, 1998, IAEA TECDOC 1057. ANALYSISDESIGNDEVELOPMENTIMPLEMENTATIONEVALUATION F E E D B A C KConduct Needs AnalysisConduct Job AnalysisConduct Task AnalysisConstruct TestsDevelop Job Performance MeasuresDetermine Training Setting Prepare Learning ObjectivesDevelop Test ItemsDescribe Trainees' Entry LevelOrganize Learning ObjectivesDevelop Training PlanSpecify Learning ActivitiesDevelop Training MaterialsSelect Training MethodsDevelop Lessons PlansConduct Training Program TryoutImplement Training PlanConduct TrainingConduct In-Training EvaluationDocument TrainingMonitor IndicatorsAnalyze InformationInitiate Corrective Actions DG-5043, Page 9 Harmonization with International Standards The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) has established a series of safety guides and standards constituting a high level of safety for protecting people and the environment. IAEA safety guides present international good practices that, while not required, increasingly reflect best practices to help users striving to achieve high levels of safety. Pertinent to this RG, IAEA Nuclear Security Series No. 13, "Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physi cal Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities (INFCIRC/255/Revision 5)," (Ref. 8) issued January 2011 contains recommended training guidance for nuclear security personnel. This RG incorporates similar training recommendations and is consistent with the basic safety principles provided in IAEA Nuclear Security Series No. 13. The systematic approach to training has been accepted by many nuclear utilities as the international best practice for the training and qualification of nuclear power plant personnel. The IAEA International Working Group on Nuclear Power Plant Personnel Training and Qualification has emphasized the importance of sharing the experience gained and lessons learned by Member States in the course of their application of SAT in order to establish and maintain the best possible training program for nuclear power plant personnel. The International Working Group thus recommended the preparation and publication of an IAEA technical report on expe riences in the use of SAT for nuclear power plant personnel. As a result of the working group recommendation, IAEA published "Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nu clear Power Plant Personnel," IAEA, Vienna, 1998, IAEA-Tecdoc-1057 (Ref. 9), which provides significant discussion of the SAT process. Documents Discussed in Staff Regulatory Guidance This regulatory guide endorses, in part, the use of one or more codes or standards developed by external organizations, and other third party guidance documents. These codes, standards and third party guidance documents may contain references to other codes, standards or third party guidance documents ("secondary references"). If a secondary reference has itself been incorporated by reference into NRC regulations as a requirement, then licensees and applicants must comply with that standard as set forth in the regulation. If the secondary reference has been endorsed in a regulatory guide as an acceptable approach for meeting an NRC requirement, then the standard constitutes a method acceptable to the NRC staff for meeting that regulatory requirement as described in the specific regulatory guide. If the secondary reference has neither been incorporated by reference into NRC regulations nor endorsed in a regulatory guide, then the secondary reference is neither a legally-binding requirement nor a "generic" NRC approved acceptable approach for meeting an NRC requirement. However, licensees and applicants may consider and use the information in the secondary reference, if appropriately justified, consistent with current regulatory practice, and consistent with applicable NRC requirements.
DG-5043, Page 10 C. STAFF REGULATORY GUIDANCE
- 1. General Requirements and Introduction This RG endorses the methods described in NEI 03-12, Revision 7. The NRC staff has determined that the methods described in th e NEI document constitute procedures and processes generally acceptable to the NRC staff for demonstrating compliance with the regulatory requirements for requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. Licensees may use methods other than those provided in NEI 03-12, Revision 7, to meet the regulatory requirements. The NRC staff will review such methods and determine their acceptability on a case-by-case basis. Licensees and applicants should use this guidance to select, train, equip, test, qualify, and re-qualify armed and unarmed security personnel, watchpersons, and members of the licensee staff that support the licensee's security organization, to ensure that these individuals possess and maintain the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities effectively. During implementation of the requirements of Section VI of Appendix B to part 73, each site must consider site-specific conditions to ensure that the licensee's training and qualification program provides the site-specific knowledge, skills, and abilities that individuals need to effectively protect against the Design Basis Threat (DBT) of radiological sabotage. For the purposes of this document, the physical protection program refers to the prevention of significant core damage and spent fuel sabotage, implementation of the Commission-approved security plans (including the Training and Qualification Plan, licensee response strategy, and implementing procedures). As described in the Introduction to Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, power reactor licensees and applicants subject to 10 CFR 73.55 must comply with the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73.
The regulatory requirements discussed here, for an e ffective Training and Qualification plan include: (a) minimum employment suitability and qualification; (b) minimum physical qualifications; (c) minimum psychological qualifications; (d) duty and on-the-job training; (e) weapons and tactical response training, exercises, and drills; (f) demonstration of individual knowledge, skills, and abilities; (g) readiness of individuals to perform assigned duties and responsibilities; (h) maintenance of equipment; (i) maintenance and retention of program records; (j) the conduct of reviews and self-audits; and (k) performance evaluation program. Requalification is required annually on all attributes contained in a. through g. above. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that the personnel who are assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the Commission-approved security plans meet minimum training and qualification requirements to ensure each individual possesses the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform assigned duties and responsibilities.
DG-5043, Page 11 1.1 The purpose of the Training and Qualification plan is to describe how each licensee will meet the minimum training and qualification requirements at its site and to establish the site-specific training and qualifications guidelines needed to ensure that each individual is properly suited, trained, equipped, and qualified to effectively perform assigned duties and responsibilities. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.5 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that the training and qualification program simulates, as closely as practicable, the specific conditions under which the indivi dual shall be required to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. 1.2 The licensee may consider establishing a methodology for identifying and accounting for site-specific conditions (e.g., independent spent fuel storage installation patrols, security owner controlled area (SOCA) vehicle search requirements, SOCA alarm response, or armored vehicle deployments). The identification of site-specific conditions will aid the licensee in determining the specific actions, duties, and responsibilities required to sustain the effectiveness of the physical protection program. Site-specific conditions must be accounted for in the development of the site training and qualification program. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.6 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee may not allow any individual to perform any security function, assume any security duties or responsibilities, or return to security duty until that individual satisfies the training and qualification requirements of the Commission-approved Training and Qualification pl an. (The Commission recognizes that knowledge, skills, and abilities are perishable or can be lost or forgotten over time.) As described in Section VI, paragraphs A.7, C.2, and D of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, to ensure that individuals maintain knowledge, skills , and abilities after their initial qualification, the licensee training and qualification program shall pr ovide for periodic requalification and remedial training, as needed. 1.3 When determining appropriate enhanced training frequencies, the licensee should consider the perishable nature of each knowledge, skill, or ability and give the greatest attention to those that are not used for long periods of time (i.e., between training cycles) but are critical when needed and are most likely to be necessary under high-stress conditions. As described in Section VI, paragraph H of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall develop and retain individual qualification records for each individual who receives training required by the Appendix. 1.4 In developing their Training and Qualification Plans, licensees should include within this plan the Knowledge Skills and Abilities Matrix (Attachment 1) or Critical Task Matrix provided in NEI 03-12, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]," as a means to ensure that all of the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B are satisfied. This matrix is composed of knowledge, skills or abilities or critical tasks upon which all individuals who perform physical protection and/or armed response duties must be trained and qualified. Each task is described in detail through sub-tasks found in this guidance and it is these sub-tasks that make up the complete task and upon which each person identified must maintain qualification and proficiency. 1.5 The first row of the matrix describes duty positions and functions within positions for members of the security organization. Licensees may choose to include in the matrix facility personnel who perform limited physical protection duties (e.g., package searches outside of the licensee protected area). The final two columns of the matrix must show the licensee's frequency of performance and the method of performance for each sub-task. Note that knowledge, skills or abilities that are specified in 10 CFR Part DG-5043, Page 12 73 to be completed annually and that must actually be performed successfully to be credited are not subject to change using the SAT process. The following codes are used in the "Performance Method" column of the matrix: (a) M-Must Perform: The individual must actually perform the indicated task under the supervision of a qualified individual. This element or critical task must be performed annually as specified in 10 CFR Part 73 and is not subject to change using the SAT process. (b) P-Perform: The individual performs the actual task. However, where there is an alternate approach listed, then that may be used to demonstrate adequate ability to perform the task (e.g., written examinations). (c) S-Simulate: The individual simulates, under realistic conditions, the completion of the indicated task. (d) D-Discuss: The individual must be orally examined to determine the adequacy of knowledge to perform the indicated task. 1.6 Where multiple codes are listed, the code listed first is the preferred option and should be followed, unless personnel safety or plant operations would be adversely affected. If this occurs, the departure should be documented providing the basis for invoking the alternate method. "Must Perform" steps should not be changed to "Simulate" or "Discuss." 1.7 Bracketed and unbracketed "X"-The brackets "[X]" identify the critical task as one that may be site-specific (may not apply to all sites). The "X" (unbracketed) identifies the responsible duty position/function and assigns the critical task to that duty position/function. 1.8 All critical tasks should be assigned to a duty position/function in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. As described in Section VI, paragraph A.7 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, training requirements must be scheduled at a nominal twelve (12) month periodicity.
- 2. Employment Suitability and Qualification As described in Section VI, paragraph B.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, individuals who are assigned security duties and responsibilities must meet minimum requirements to determine their initial and continued suitability (i.e., acceptability) and to ensure that they are and continue to be qualified (i.e., proven capable) to provide the required services before employment or assignment to the security organization. To accomplish this, the licensee training and qualification program shall ensure, as described in Section VI of Appendix B, that all personnel assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the Commission-approved security plans achieve and maintain an acceptable level of professional competence in the performance of those tasks. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. The licensee shall document each individual's qualification as a record of that individual's demonstrated abilities.
DG-5043, Page 13
2.1 Suitability
As described in Section VI, paragraphs B.1.(a) and B.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees must ensure that individuals satisfy suitability requirements.
2.1.1 Before
an individual can be employed by or assigned to the security organization, the licensee shall verify that the individual possesses, at a minimum, a high school diploma or has passed an equivalent performance examination designed to measure basic mathematical, language, and reasoning skills, abilities, and knowledge required to perform security duties and responsibilities.
2.1.2 The Commission has determined that a General E ducation Development, or GED, test designed to measure basic job-related mathematical, language, and reasoning skills is an acceptable alternative to a high school diploma.
2.1.3 All individuals must have reached the age of 21 before they can be assigned duties and responsibilities involving the possession or use of a firearm, and must have attained the age of 18 before they can be assigned duties and responsibilities in an unarmed capacity. The licensee shall establish and implement a reasonable verification process to satisfy this requirement and confirm the age of potential employees before employment or assignment.
2.1.4 To determine suitability, a background check as described in Section VI, paragraph B.1.(a)(4) must be completed for all personnel who are assigned duties and responsibilities involving the possession of firearms.
2.1.5 Licensees
may use the results of background investigations completed c onsistent with 10 CFR 73.56, "Personnel Access Authorization Requirements for Nuclear Power Plants." Licensees must also ensure that all personnel who will perform armed duties are in compliance with applicable state or federal law, to include the Lautenberg Amendment (1996) to the Gun Control Act (Public Law 104 208, 18 U.S.C. § 922(g)(9)) (Ref. 10).
2.1.6 The licensee must ensure that members of the security organization do not have felony convictions that reflect negatively on the individual's trustworthiness and reliability to perform their assigned duties and responsibilities consistent with Commission regulations.
2.1.7 The licensee should adjudicate potentially derogatory information about an individual consistent with 10 CFR 73.56, whether such information is obtained during pre-employment application or after hiring. In addition, as outlined in the Violent Crime Control Act of 1994 (Public Law 103 322, H.R. 3355) (Ref. 11) and the Lautenberg Amendment (1996) to the Gun Control Act (Public Law 104 208, 18 U.S.C. § 922(g)) Firearm Possession Prohibition, the licensee should ensure that armed members of the security organization do not have any felony convictions involving the use of any type of weapon or any legal restraints preventing the possession of a firearm consistent with the requirements of the U.
S. Department of Justice.
2.2 Physical
Qualifications As described in Section VI, paragraph B.2.(a)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, individuals whose duties and responsibilities are directly associated with the effective implementation of the Commission-approved security plans, licensee protective strategies, and implementing procedures may not have any physical conditions that would adversely affect their performance of assigned security duties and responsibilities within required pe rformance standards as described in Sections 2.3 through 2.7 and 2.10 of this document.
DG-5043, Page 14
2.3 General
Physical Qualification As described in Section VI, paragraphs B.2.(a)(1) through (4) and B.5.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, before assignment and annually thereafter, all individuals who are performing security functions for the security organization must be subject to a physical examination administered by a licensed physician or physician's assistant, with final determination of physical suitability being made by a licensed physician.
2.3.1 The purpose of this physical examination is to verify the individual's physical capability to perform assigned duties and responsibilities, as identified in Commission-approved security plans and implementing procedures.
2.3.2 Physical
examinations should be commensurate with assigned duties, and the licensed physician or physician's assistant administering the examination should have knowledge of the assigned security duties. Personnel not assigned to the security organization who are performing watchman-type duties required to implement the physical protection program (i.e., personnel performing material searches and personnel assigned to perform vehicle escort duties) must also have physical examinations. In such cases, physical examinations should be limited to the physical attributes required to perform the specific security function.
2.3.3 Licensees
and licensed physicians should consider the physical demands associated with the specific security duties of security personnel when certifying the individual's physical capability to perform them. The following are examples of factors the licensed physician should consider when conducting medical certifications for personnel, taking into account the individual's specific duties and responsibilities required to implement the Commission-approved security plans, for duty within the security organization: (a) results of medical examination; (b) firearms activities to include the tactical course of fire; (c) central alarm and secondary alarm station activities; (d) contraband searches to include vehicle searches; (e) equipment that individuals need to carry, wear, or operate; (f) protected and vital area posts and patrol routes; and (g) ability to respond to contingency events.
2.4 Vision
and Hearing As described in Section VI, paragraphs B.2.(b) and B.2.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must ensure that personnel assigned duties and responsibilities directly associated with the effective implementation of Commission-approved security plans, licensee protective strategies, and implementing procedures meet minimum requirements for vision and hearing to effectively perform their duties and responsibilities. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.2.(c)(2), the use of a hearing aid is acceptable provided that suitable testing procedures dem onstrate appropriate hearing levels. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.2.(b)(7), for personnel who exhibit a mild color vision defect, an on-the-job evaluation must be performed and the results must be found acceptable.
2.4.1 For personnel who utilize a hearing aid, the hearing aid may not decrease the effective performance of the individual's assigned security duties during normal or emergency operations.
DG-5043, Page 15 2.4.2 The results of evaluations conducted as described in Sections 2.4.1 must be documented.
2.5 Existing
Medical Conditions As described in Section VI, paragraph B.2.(d) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, individuals may not have an established medical history or medical diagnosis of existing medi cal conditions that could interfere with or prevent the individual from effectively performing assigned duties and responsibilities. If a medical condition exists, the individual shall provide, as described in B.2.(d)(2), medical evidence that the condition can be controlled with medical treatment in a manner that does not adversely affect the individual's fitness-for-duty, mental alertness, physical condition, or capability to otherwise effectively perform assigned duties and responsibilities.
2.6 Addiction
As described in Section VI, paragraph B.2.(e) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, individuals may not have any established medical history or medical diagnosis of habitual alcoholism or drug addiction. Where this type of condition has existed, the individual shall provide certified documentation of the completion of a rehabilitation program that would give a reasonable degree of confidence that the individual would be able to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. Additional Commission requirements for certification regarding fitness-for-dut y appear in 10 CFR Part 26, "Fitness for Duty Programs" (Ref. 12).
2.7 Other
Physical Requirements As described in Section VI, paragraph B.2.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, an individual who has been incapacitated due to a serious illness, injury, disease, or operation which could interfere with the effective performance of assigned duties and responsibilities shall, before resumption of assigned duties and responsibilities, provide documented medical evidence of recovery and ability to perform these duties and responsibilities.
2.7.1 A licensed physician familiar with the specific physical demands of the individual's duties and responsibilities at a nuclear facility should concur that the individual is able to perform assigned duties before these individuals are allowed to return to a duty status.
2.8 Psychological
Qualifications As described in Section VI, paragraph B.3 of A ppendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed and unarmed individuals assigned duties and responsibilities directly associated with the effective implementation of the Commission-approved security plans and implementing procedures must demonstrate the required psychological qualifications.
2.9 Medical
Examinations and Physical Fitness Qualifications As described in Section VI, paragraph B.4.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization shall be subject to a medical examination by a licensed physician to determine their fitness to participate in physical fitness tests. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.4.(a)(1), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall obtain and retain a written certification from the licensed physician that the medical examination detected no medical conditions that would preclude the individual from participating in the physical fitness tests or meeting the physical fitness attributes or objectives associated with assigned duties.
DG-5043, Page 16 2.9.1 This examination may be administered by a licensed physician's assistant with the final determination being made by a licensed physician to verify the individual's physical capability to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.4.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, before assignment, armed security personnel shall demonstrate they are physically fit to perform assigned duties and responsibilities through the conduct of a practical physical fitness test. As required by Section VI, paragraph B.4.(b)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the physical fitness test must include elements that simulate site-specific, scenario-specific, or task-specific conditions and actions associated with the required performance standards. These include the strenuous activity, physical exertion, level of stress, and exposure to elements that are required of an individual to ensure that the individual can effectively perform assigned security-related duties.
2.9.2 To ensure the effectiveness of the physical protection program, these simulated elements should equate to the normal and emergency conditions that could be encountered at the site. As described in Section VI, paragraph B.4.(b)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the physical fitness qualification of each armed member of the security organization must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. As described in Section VI, paragraph H of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, records must be retained for security personnel in accordance with the requirements in 10 CFR 73.55(q). As described in Section VI, paragraphs B.4.(b)(2) and B.4.(b)(3) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall describe the physical fitness test to be used in its Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan.
2.9.3 An acceptable Training and Qualification plan sets forth how the physical fitness objectives for determining strength, endurance, and agility are demonstrated by the physical fitness test.
2.9.4 Each licensee should identify and analyze its site-specific conditions to determine the appropriate elements to be applied for training purposes.
2.10 Physical Requalification As described in Section VI, paragraph B.5 of A ppendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed and unarmed individuals assigned security duties and responsibilities must demonstrate the capability to meet the requirements for physical requalification at least annually.
2.11 Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraphs B.4.(b)(4) and B.5.(b), a qualified training instructor must document the physical qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. A security supervisor must attest to this qualification. 2.11.1 This record should be based on personal observation or input from (1) other qualified training organization personnel; (2) subject matter experts or field training officers; or (3) a medical, psychological, or other pr ofessional who is qualified to make such determinations consistent with NRC regulations and applicable local, state, and federal laws to provide suitability and qualification determinations for the category of information addressed by the record.
DG-5043, Page 17
- 3. Duty Training As described in Section VI, paragraph C.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all personnel who are assigned to perform security-related duties or r esponsibilities shall be trained and qualified to perform assigned duties and responsibilities.
This training and qualification ensures that each individual has the minimum knowledge, skills, and abilities required for effective performance of assigned duties and responsibilities. This requirement includes personnel assigned to perform security-related duties such as, but not limited to, material searches and vehicle escort. To accomplish this, each individual's training criteria shall include both general and position-specific training determined to be necessary for the effective implementation of the physical protection program and Commission-approved security plans during normal and emergency conditions.
3.1 Critical
Knowledge, Skills and Abilities (KSAs) As described in the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must identify, in the NRC-approved Trai ning and Qualification pl an, the knowledge, skills, and abilities that are required by assigned personnel to perform assigned duties and responsibilities.
3.1.1 Before
performing security-related duties within the security organization, each individual should be trained and qualified to perform those KSAs applicable to their duty position.
3.1.2 The security-training program should identify specific KSAs necessary for individuals to achieve qualification.
3.1.3 During
the analysis phase, those responsible for security training should develop a comprehensive list of training elements for each of the KSAs listed in the Training and Qualification plan. The Critical Knowledge, Skills and Abilities Matrix in Attachment 1 provides an example of an in-depth training KSA list for the key positions in the security organization.
3.1.4 The licensee's Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan should reflect the KSAs listed in Attachment 1 unless the activity is not applicable at a specific facility. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.1.(a), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall identify in their Commission-approved Training and Qua lification plan the areas of knowledge, skills, and abilities that are required to perform assigned duties and responsibilities.,
3.1.5 Assigned
duties and responsibilities should be identified consistent with licensee implementation of unique performance requirements necessary to implement the licensee's Commission-approved security plans, based on site-specific duties.
3.1.6 If a licensee trains and qualifies armed members of the security organization on an enhanced weapon, specific qualification attributes for that enhanced weapon must be included in the licensee's Training and Qualification plan.
3.1.7 All KSAs should be identified and assigned in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan.
3.1.8 The licensee may assign KSAs to a specific duty function (e.g., search officer, access officer, patrol officer, and escort officer).
DG-5043, Page 18
3.2 Security
Personnel Training As described in Section VI, paragraph C.1.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must describe in the NRC-approved Training and Qualification plan those areas of knowledge, skills, and abilities required by security personnel to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities. In accordance with 10 CFR 73.55(d)(3) and (d)(3)(i), the licensee shall pr ovide training through licensee training programs to each individual who implements any part of the physical protection program to ensure each individual is trained, qualified, and periodically requalified to perform assigned duties.
3.2.1 The licensee may consider the following listing of security program topic areas during the development of site-specific KSAs: (a) protection of nuclear facilities and special nuclear material (SNM); (b) NRC requirements and guidance for physical security at nuclear facilities; (c) the role of private security officers in providing physical protection for the nuclear industry; (d) authority of private officers; (e) use of nonlethal weapons; (f) use of deadly force as authorized by state or federal law; (g) power of arrest and authority to detain individuals consistent with local, state, and federal laws; (h) authority to search individuals and seize property; (i) adversary group operations; (j) motivation and objectives of adversary groups; (k) tactics and force that adversary groups might use to achieve their objectives; (l) recognition of sabotage-related devices and equipment that might be used against the licensee's facility; (m) facility security organization and operation; (n) types of physical barriers; (o) weapons and lock and key control system operation; (p) location of SNM and/or vital areas within a facility; (q) protected area security and vulnerability; (r) types of alarm systems used; (s) response to and assessment of alarm annunciati ons and other indications of intrusion; (t) general concepts of security systems; (u) vulnerabilities and consequences of theft of SNM or radiological sabotage of a facility; (v) protection of security system information; (w) personal equipment use and operation for normal and contingency operations; (x) surveillance and assessment systems and techniques; (y) communications systems and operation; (z) access control systems and operation for individuals, packages, and vehicles; (aa) contraband detection systems and techniques; (bb) barriers and other delay systems around protected access or vital areas; (cc) exterior and interior alarm systems operation; (dd) duress alarm operation; (ee) alarm stations operation; (ff) response force organization; (gg) response force mission; (hh) response force operation; (ii) response force engagement; DG-5043, Page 19 (jj) security command and control system during normal operation; (kk) security command and control system during contingency operation; (ll) fixed-post station operations; (mm) access control system operation; (nn) search techniques and systems for individuals, packages, and vehicles; (oo) escort and patrol responsibilities and operation; (pp) contingency response to confirmed in trusion or attempted intrusion; (qq) security system operation after component failure; (rr) security coordination with law enforcement agencies (local, State, and Federal); (ss) security and situation reporting, documentation, and report writing; (tt) contingency duties; (uu) self-defense; (vv) use of and defenses against incapacitating agents; (ww) security equipment testing; (xx) contingency procedures; (yy) night-vision devices and systems; (zz) mechanics of detention; (aaa) basic armed and unarmed defensive tactics; (bbb) response force deployment; (ccc) security alert procedures; (ddd) security briefing procedures; (eee) response force tactical movement; (fff) response force withdrawal; (ggg) response force use of support fire; (hhh) response to bomb and attack threats; (iii) response to civil disturbances (e.g., strikes, demonstrations); (jjj) response to confirmed attempted theft of SNM and/or radiological sabotage of facilities; (kkk) response to hostage situations; (lll) response to tampering events; (mmm) site-specific armed tactical procedures and operation; (nnn) security response to emergency situations other than security incidents; (ooo) independent spent fuel storage installation (if applicable - site specific); (ppp) armored vehicle operations (if applicable - site specific); (qqq) security limited access areas (if applicable - site specific); (rrr) remotely operated weapons systems (ROWS) (if applicable - site specific); and (sss) enhanced weapons (if applicable - site specific).
3.3 Training
of Personnel In accordance with Section VI, paragraph C.1 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all personnel who are assigned to perform any security-related duty or responsibility shall be trained and qualified to perform assigned duties and responsibilities to ensure that each individual possesses the minimum knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively carry out those assigned duties and responsibilities.
3.3.1 Personnel
should be trained and qualified to perform only those KSA elements applicable to the security duty position they will fulfill as identified in Section 3.1 of this RG. Personnel shall be re-qualified consistent with Section VI, paragraph D.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 and the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan.
DG-5043, Page 20 3.3.2 The licensee should use the same training methodology, delivery, and implementation to train and qualify non-security personnel on specific security-related KSAs as used to train security personnel in the performance of similar KSAs.
- 4. On-the-Job Training As described in the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee training and qualification program must include on-the-job training (OJT) performance standards and criteria to ensure that each individual demonstrates the requisite knowledge, skills, and abilities to effectively carry out assigned duties and responsibilities in accordance with the Commission-approved security plans, licensee protective strategy, and implementing procedures, before the individual is assigned the duty or responsibility. The licensee shall implement OJT to ensure that individuals have an adequate level of hands-on experience and knowledge in nuclear security functions before they are considered qualified and assigned duties and responsibilities. 4.1 Licensees may consider the use of a formalized OJT checklist to identify those duties and responsibilities associated with each duty position and job KSA. Typically, OJT is conducted by qualified security training instructors and field training officers and/or subject matter experts designated by the security training staff. 4.2 A security supervisor must attest to all OJT, and the records must be documented by a qualified training instructor and retained consistent with 10 CFR 73.55(q), "Records." As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, Individuals who are assigned duties and responsibilities related to implementing the safeguards contingency plan (e.g., response team leaders, alarm station operators, armed responders, and armed security officers designated as a component of the protective strategy) shall complete a minimum of 40 hours4.62963e-4 days <br />0.0111 hours <br />6.613757e-5 weeks <br />1.522e-5 months <br /> of OJT, in which each individual will be required to demonstrate his or her ability to effectively apply the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform assigned contingency duties and responsibilities in accordance with the approved safeguards contingency plan, other security plans, licensee protective strategies, and implementing procedures. OJT contingency activities and drills must, at a minimum, meet the criteria and objectives stated in regulations. 4.3 Trained and qualified security personnel reassigned or promoted to new or additional duties and responsibilities should receive OJT commensurate with the newly assigned duty positions. 4.4 Basic steps of an OJT training program using the SAT for each duty position include the following: (a) preparation/introduction, (b) demonstration, (c) practice, and (d) documentation of successful demonstration. 4.5 The licensee should identify each duty position separately within the OJT program. Each duty position should include applicable job KSAs or functions, to ensure that the trainee understands the knowledge, skills, and abilities required for effective implementation of the Commission-approved physical security plan, the safeguards contingency plan, and the licensee DG-5043, Page 21 implementing procedures. The KSAs associated with the following Primary Duty Positions and additional Site Specific Duty Positions are described in Attachment 1. Primary Duty Positions: (a) Armed security officer, (b) Armed Responder, (c) Central Alarm Station/Secondary Alarm Station Participants Alarm Station Operator, (d) Response Team Leader, and (e) Security Shift Supervisor. Additional Site Specify Duty Positions: (a) Access Control Officer, (b) Search Officer, (c) Escort Officer, and (d) Patrol Officer. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's OJT programs must include, but are not limited to, hands-on application of knowledge, skills, and abilities related to: (a) response team duties; (b) use of force; (c) tactical movement; (d) cover and concealment; (e) defensive positions; (f) fields-of-fire; (g) re-deployment; (h) communications (primary and alternate); (i) use of assigned equipment; (j) target sets; (k) tabletop drills; (l) command and control duties; and (m) licensee protective strategy. 4.6 Personnel assigned to provide OJT instruction and oversight should themselves possess and have demonstrated the requisite knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively meet the performance standards of the specific duties and r esponsibilities associated with the OJT. 4.7 On-the-Job Training Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraph C.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, OJT must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. 4.7.1 OJT trainers and evaluators conducting the training should implement a methodology that ensures each KSA has been completed satisfactorily. Licensees should ensure the trainee's completion of each element and KSA of the OJT documentation.
The OJT trainers and evaluators conducting the training should document on the form that the trainee has completed the OJT for that section and has achieved the knowledge standard. Once completed, the form would typically be DG-5043, Page 22 submitted to the qualified security training instructor for final assessment and documentation and a security supervisor must attest to the training. 4.7.2 Licensees may consider creating OJT documentation that identifies the critical attributes associated with each KSA required to perform the duties and responsibilities of all duty positions. A duty position may comprise multiple KSAs, and its description should indicate the appropriate level of knowledge standard required for each KSA. The OJT documentation for individuals who are assigned duties and responsibilities related to implementing the safeguards contingency plan may apply any documented process to log time associated with the performance of OJT to ensure that the trainee has met the program minimum OJT time (40 hours4.62963e-4 days <br />0.0111 hours <br />6.613757e-5 weeks <br />1.522e-5 months <br />).
- 5. Performance Evaluation Program As described in the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall develop, implement and maintain a Performance Evaluation Program that is documented in procedures and describes how the li censee will demonstrate and assess the effectiveness of their onsite physical protection program and protective strategy, including the capability of the armed response team to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities during safeguards contingency events. To satisfy the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.3 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must conduct security tactical response drills and force-on-force (FOF) exercises designed to demonstrate and assess the effectiveness of the licensee's physical protection program, and contingency event response by all individuals with responsibilities for implementing the safeguards contingency plan. These drills and exercises are vital components of a comprehensive training program that enables the security force to gain experience and test personnel performance abilities in tactics, the site's protective strategy, and individually assigned duties and group activities within the contingency response plan.
5.1 Tactical
Response Drills and Force-on-Force Exercises As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each member of each shift who is assigned duties and responsibilities that are required to implement the safeguards contingency plan and licensee protective strategy participates in at least one tactical response drill quarterly and one FOF exercise annually.
5.1.1 Individuals
designated as a component of the protective strategy may participate in any of the following roles to satisfy this requirement as a drill participant: security shift supervisor, response team leader, alarm station operator, armed responder, and armed security officer.
5.1.2 The triennial FOF exercise conducted by the NRC may be counted towards the annual FOF exercise(s) for those contingency response pe rsonnel that participate in the exercise.
5.2 Types
of Tactical Response Drills and Force-on-Force Exercises As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(d) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, tactical response drills and FOF exercises must be designed to challenge the site protective strategy against elements of the DBT and ensure that each participant assigned security duties and responsibilities identified in the Commission-approved security plans, the licensee protective strategy, and implementing procedures demonstrate the requisite knowledge, skills, and abilities. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3 of Appe ndix B to 10 CFR Part 73, drills and exercises are training activities that focus on maintaining and improving the knowledge, skills, and capabilities of DG-5043, Page 23 the individual or the group and thus must be part of the ongoing training provided to the security force personnel. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the scope of tactical response drills conducted for training purposes shall be determined by the licensee; must address site specific, individual or programmatic elements; and may be limited to specific portions of the site protective strategy. Drill plans and drill documentation must clearly identify the elements to be
evaluated.
5.2.1 Tactical
response drills provide a structured process to train personnel and evaluate key elements of the protective strategy by focusing on specific aspects of the strategy without conducting a fully integrated FOF exercise.
5.2.2 The types of drills may include the following: (a) Tabletop drills are performed to demonstrate the protective strategy using a mockup of the facility. Tabletop drills allow security force members to demonstrate their understanding of the protective strategy and their individual response requirements. This type of drill may also be used as an evaluation tool for the protective strategy. (b) Timeline drills are performed to demonstrate the response timelines established for the protective strategy. Drills can be used to test either the validity of the timelines established for the protective strategy or to test the ability of the security response personnel to respond to their assigned response position within the established timeline. (c) Limited-scope tactical response drills are performed to evaluate the ability of one or more security response force members to effectively implement their protective strategy responsibilities. These drills are conducted as needed for each individual, group, or shift to validate and test the protective strategy.
5.2.3 The structure of a drill or exercise must ensure that it provides a credible, realistic, and comprehensive test of the elements of the protective strategy objectives that the drill or exercise was designed to achieve. Tactical response drills, FOF exercises, and associated contingency response training shall be conducted under conditions that simulate, as closely as practicable, the site-specific conditions under which each member of the security organization will, or may be, required to perform assigned duties and responsibiliti es. The drill plan and scenarios used should ensure the satisfaction of the key program elements addressed in this section of the RG. Other program elements that support the key program elements should also be considered in the development of drill plans and scenarios to test, evaluate, and improve these areas. Section 5.4 of this RG gives examples of these elements.
5.2.4 FOF exercises are an integrated response exercise that includes the participation of the licensee's response force executing the protective strategy against an opposing force with the characteristics and attributes of the DBT. FOF exercises are designed to train and/or evaluate response force personnel on the complete implementation of the licensee's protective strategy and the evaluation and improvement of that strategy against the characteristics and attributes of the DBT.
5.2.5 Three
types of exercises are described below: a) fully integrated FOF exercises, b) security response FOF exercises, and c) limited scope FOF exercises. The fully integrated exercise is used to qualify the minimum number of response force personnel as identified in the site-specific security plan. Following participation as players and satisfying their qualification requirements in DG-5043, Page 24 the fully integrated exercise, these individuals can be credited for participation in security response and limited scope exercises to fulfill exercise and/or drill requirements for other positions they may be assigned. Individuals not participating as players in the fully integrated exercise are required to participate as players in security response exercises for the purpose of maintaining their qualifications. The limited scope exercise is applicable only to those few individuals not able to participate in fully integrated or security response exercises because of illness, family leave, military deployment, or other unavoidable circumstances keeping the individuals from fulfilling the requirements of Section 5.3 of this guide, which further discusses player participation in these drills. (a) Fully integrated FOF exercises. These exercises consist of a planned response effort across various plant disciplines (e.g., local law enforcement agency (LLEA), security, plant operations, and emergency preparedness) to minimize or mitigate the threat. (b) Security response FOF exercises. These exercises involve the full security response force and a mock adversary force without a planned response effort across various plant disciplines (e.g., LLEA, plant operations, and emergency preparedness) and focus primarily on security response. (c) Limited scope FOF exercises. These exercises focus on th e security response by using the minimum number of members of the response force and the mock adversary team
sufficient to execute the scenario being tested. They should be a credible, realistic, and thorough test of a portion of the site protective strategy and evaluate the key security program performance elements bounded by the DBT. The exercise provides scenario controls and exercise controllers and includes a post-exercise critique and required exercise documentation.
5.2.6 The licensee should ensure that at least one fully integrated site FOF exercise is conducted annually or more frequently, where the need is indicated, to ensure proficiency in integrated response for an actual event or NRC-evaluated exercise.
5.3 Defining
Participation As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each member of each shift who is assigned duties and responsibilities required to implement the safeguards contingency plan and licensee protective strategy must participate in at least one tactical response drill quarterly and one FOF exercise annually. In accordance with 10 CFR 73.55(d)(3), the licensee may not permit any individual to implement any part of the physical protection program unless the individual has been trained, equipped, and qualified to perform their assigned duties and responsibilities in accordance with Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 and the licensee's Training and Qualification Plan. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(h) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall document the scenarios and participants for all tactical response drills and annual FOF exercises.
5.3.1 Individuals
designated as a component of the protective strategy should participate in one of the following roles to satisfy the participation requirement as a player: security shift supervisor, response team leader, alarm station operator, armed responder, or armed security officer.
DG-5043, Page 25
5.3.2 Individuals
who are trained and qualified to perform contingency duties for multiple-response team duty positions must participate annually as a player in drills or exercises for each position for which they are qualified. This requirement can be satisfied by participating in each position during the course of four quarterly drills and one annual exercise during the year (e.g., a security force member can serve as a response team leader in the first quarter drill, a central or secondary alarm station operator during the second quarter drill, and an armed responder in the annual exercise). An armed security officer (who is also qualified as an armed responder) who has participated in the quarterly response drills and annual force-on-force exercise has met the requirements and need not participate in separate drill and exercises as an armed responder. During the 3-year training cycle, this participa tion should be rotated so that the security force member gains experience in each position in various drills and exercises.
5.3.3 Individuals
who do not participate as a player in scheduled annual FOF exercises because of illness, family leave, military deployment, or other circumstances can fulfill the annual FOF exercise participation requirement by one of the following: (a) completion of initial 40-hour protective strategy OJT and add itional site-specific protective strategy OJT for any additional qualified positions (alarm station operator, response team leader) as outlined in Section 4 of this guide, or (b) participation as a player in a limited scope FOF tactical exercise with the following characteristics:
(1) focuses only on the security response by using only the members of the response force and the mock adversary team sufficient to execute the scenario being tested; (2) credibly, realistically, and thoroughly tests a portion of the site protective strategy; (3) evaluates the key security program performance elements bounded by the DBT, as identified in Section 5.4.1.(a) through (f) of this guide; (4) includes appropriate additional program elements as identified in Section 5.4.2.(a) through (o) of this guide; (5) provides scenario controls and exercise controllers; and (6) includes a post-exercise critique and required exercise documentation.
Note: Response team member (player) resources used to support and achieve the objective of the limited scope exercise may receive credit for their annual force-on-force exercise requirement. Licensees may consider using additional response team members who are trained and qualified on multiple-response team duties to assist them or augment them in meeting their participation requirements.
5.3.4 When planning drills and exercises, personnel should be identified to fill each of the roles and response team duty positions and duty functions re quired to support the selected scenario and the type of drill or exercise being conducted.
DG-5043, Page 26 5.4 Key Program Elements 5.4.1 The licensee should use the following key program elements of the protective strategy in developing scenarios for tactical response drills and FOF exercises to demonstrate an effective protective strategy. (a) Responding with sufficient number of security personnel. The licensee has the required number of response personnel to effectively implement the protective strategy. (b) Responding within appropriate timelines. Response personnel have adequate time to reach their response positions in advance of the adversary timelines. (c) Responding to protected positions. Response personnel use appropriate protection and cover. (d) Providing defense-in-depth. Response personnel are able to protect the site from an adversary attack in accordance with the DBT and protect target set components from being sabotaged by an adversary force seeking to cause core damage and/or sabotage spent fuel. (e) Responding with appropriate armament. Response personnel are supplied with, or have readily available, the weapons and equipment necessary to execute their responsibilities and are appropriately trained and qualified in the use of the weapons and equipment. (f) Providing a command and control structure. Response personnel have appropriate communication capabilities to ensure that decisions and actions are coordinated and communicated in a timely manner to facilitate response.
5.4.2 To be an effective evaluation tool, each tactical response drill should include at least one of the key program elements identified in section 5.4.1(a) through (f) above. An FOF exercise should include all six key program elements. The following additional program elements also contribute to the successful demonstration of the key elements: (a) coordination and planning; (b) command and control; (c) communications; (d) alarm station operations; (e) individual responder tactics; (f) team response tactics; (g) use of deadly force as authorized by federal or state law; (h) alarm assessment and intrusion detection equipment; (i) access control and search equipment; (j) weapons handling and proficiency; (k) controller participation; (l) post-drill briefing and critiques; (m) integrated response (plant operations, LLEA, and/or Emergency Preparedness); (n) proper use of defensive positions; and (o) deployment of responders and equipment.
DG-5043, Page 27
5.5 Drill
and Exercise Scenario Development The effectiveness of a drill or exercise as an evaluation tool largely depends on the scenario development phase. To satisfy the requirements of Section VI, paragraph C.3.(d) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, "Performance Evaluation Program," the proposed scenario must be designed to ensure that it adequately challenges the selected program elements. With a properly planned scenario, the critique and evaluation can provide meaningful insights into the effectiveness of the protective strategy and any enhancements or corrections that may be needed. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must develop a scenario to support the c onduct of each drill or exercise.
5.5.1 The scenarios should be designed to encourage open decision-making consistent with the protective strategy. In some cases, the scope of a drill may be more narrowly focused and not involve an adversary team. In those cases, only the relevant planning elements need be included. During scenario planning, attention to the key program elements is essential to the effectiveness of the drill or exercise as an evaluation tool. The design of the scenarios must ensure that they evaluate the effectiveness of the licensee's protective strategy. Since drills or exercise scenarios are developed based upon the licensee's protective strategy, they are typically considered
Safeguards Information and controlled in accordance with 10 CFR 73.21.
5.5.2 The licensee should implement a process that ensure s changes to the configuration of established equipment and systems related to target set components are considered in the licensee's scenario development for drills and FOF exercises. The scenario package(s) should ensure that the licensee has designed and developed drills and exercises that take into account all modes of operation (i.e., operating at power, refueling, other major maintenance activities). In addition, the licensee should consider the impact that various modes of operation have on the licensee's protective strategy; specifically, the impact that these modes of operation have in the following areas: (a) responder timelines and positioning; (b) potential compensatory posts; (c) changes in the configuration of delay barriers; (d) temporary modifications to the security plan to support activities that impact the safety/security interface; (e) effects on fields of fire; or (f) changes to target sets.
5.6 Identification
of Target Sets
5.6.1 Drill
and exercise scenarios should also be developed with target sets as a basis for the scenario.
Target sets selected for a drill or exercise should pose the greatest challenge to the protective strategy. Target sets that have a small number of components, that are easily accessible, or whose component locations are in close proximity may be considered "attractive" target sets and may be an optimum choice for a drill or exercise scenario. Scenarios involving attractive targets generally can be the basis of improvements to physical protection systems and protective strategies.
5.6.2 The licensee may take credit for operator actions that protect a target set from destruction or disablement only if that operator action is listed as a component of the target set as described in 10 CFR 73.55(f), and is therefore consistent with the criteria of credible operator actions as DG-5043, Page 28 described in RG 5.81, "Target Set Identification and Development for Nuclear Power Reactors." A licensee may not take credit for actions or equipm ent outside of the predetermined target set for the purpose of determining the effectiveness of the protective strategy or the capability of security personnel to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities. Credit for operator actions within a target set will be given only if the following criteria are met: (a) sufficient time is available to implement these actions; (b) environmental conditions allow access where needed; (c) adversary interference is precluded; (d) any equipment needed to complete these actions is available and ready for use; (e) approved procedures exist; and (f) training is conducted on the existing proce dures under conditions similar to the scenario assumed.
5.7 Simulations
and Artificialities
5.7.1 Drill
and exercise scenarios should be developed to challenge the execution of the protective strategy during a variety of environmental and plant conditions. To replicate these conditions, it may be necessary to incorporate certain artificialities into the drill or exercise scenarios. Plant conditions identified in the scenario may range from operating at power to refueling or other major maintenance activities.
5.7.2 Environmental
conditions identified in the scenarios should include time of day or night, and, if possible, the drill or exercise should be conducted during the time identified to address relative daylight or darkness and various conditions of security readiness. If no acceptable artificialities are available for use or it is unsafe to incorporate the conditions into the drill or exercise scenario, a tabletop method may be used to simulate that condition, consistent with the licensee's site-specific analysis for how that specific condition affects implementation of NRC requirements.
5.7.3 The scenario may also need to include other intricate artificialities to simulate actions and activities that cannot actually be performed for reasons of practicality and the safety of personnel and plant equipment.
5.7.4 During
scenario development, activities such as the use of firearms with blank ammunition and the use of mock explosive devices,and the presence of drill or exercise participants in certain areas should be considered to ensure the continued safe operation of the plant and the safety of personnel. Drill and exercise scenarios should be developed to accommodate overall safety through the incorporation of acceptable artificialities to simulate the occurrence of these actions and activities (e.g., the inclusion of task times, timeouts, tabletop exercises). Additional discussion may be found in RG 5.74 (Ref. 13), "Managing the Safety/Security Interface."
5.7.5 Simulations
and artificialities may apply to both armed responders and mock adversaries and should be thoroughly integrated and accounted for during the planning process. To enable controllers to properly inject simulations a nd artificialities into the scenario and oversee the actions resulting from them, the licensee's drill and exercise scenario matrix should incorporate specific guidance for simulations and artificialities. The licensee should try to minimize the number of simulations and artificialities in the development of scenarios to ensure that each scenario provides an accurate performance standard.
DG-5043, Page 29
5.8 Cautions
and Restrictions
5.8.1 Certain
areas of the plant, such as the control room and areas where work is ongoing may be considered off limits to drill or exercise activity. Participants should receive this information at the drill or exercise briefing along with details of how the activities will be simulated or affected by these areas being off limits to drill or exercise activity. In addition, the following should be treated with special awareness during drill and exercise planning: (a) areas with sensitive plant equipment; (b) personnel safety; (c) radiological controls; (d) foreign material exclusion areas; and (e) confined space areas.
5.9 Communications
5.9.1 The means of communication for the drill or exercise activity should be designated during the preparation phase. Planning for communication needs should consider plant operations, the on-duty security force, the participants, the controllers, and the adversaries, as well as a means to communicate the conduct of the drill or exercise to all plant personnel.
5.10 Scheduling and Planning As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(2) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, planners must ensure that the drill or exercise scenario maintains consistency with the DBT of radiological sabotage established by the Commission. The mock adversary force used in either FOF or licensee exercises must replicate, as closely as possible, the adversary characteristics and capabilities of the DBT, and be capable of exploiting and challenging the licensee's protective strategy, personnel, command and control, and implementing procedures. 5.10.1 The licensee should consider developing and maintaining a schedule that supports the drill or exercise plan to ensure the efficiency and productivity of drills and exercises. In schedule development, the licensee should consider factors such as projected station outage schedules, requalification requirements, and FOF tactical exercise requirements. 5.10.2 An effective program schedule would provide a detailed listing of the following: (a) type of drills/exercises to be conducted; (b) when the drills/exercises will be conducted; (c) key program elements or evaluation standards to be satisfied by the planned evolution; and (d) the participants in the evolution. 5.10.3 The licensee should consider use of a structured plan to assist in the coordination, execution, and documentation of activities associated with the drill and exercise process. The plan can provide consistency to the process and help ensure satisfaction of all program requirements. The plan is also the foundation of the remainder of the drill or exercise documentation. The drill or exercise plan should address the following: (a) drill or exercise specifics (number, date, shift/personnel involved, location); (b) pre-notifications (operations, radiation protection, station management, etc.);
DG-5043, Page 30 (c) safety briefings; (d) radiological briefings; (e) specific drill objectives or key elements evaluated; (f) participants (players, controllers, adversaries); (g) adversary characteristics (equipment, tactics, actions taken, target, etc.); (h) scenario being used; (i) sequence of events (event description, anticipated response, estimated timelines); (j) development of a controller matrix (written scenario for controllers) to outline scenario events; (k) simulations and artificialities to be considered or integrated into the evolution safety review; (l) adversary briefings (providing details of the scenario, equipment used, routes, targets, etc., and allowing for intelligence-gathering from an insider); (m) controller/evaluator briefings (scenario, assignments, simulations, cautions, concerns, etc.); (n) equipment consideration; (o) initial plant/security status; and (p) what security personnel assignments are being tested. 5.10.4 In planning the drill or exercise, it is important for the integrity of the process that the confidentiality of the scenario be maintained.
5.11 Command and Control of Drills and Exercises 5.11.1 A system of command and control is necessary to ensure maintenance of an environment free of the recognized hazards associated with tactical drills and exercises. The command and control system helps to ensure that the rules of engagement are followed and hazards and safety concerns are appropriately addressed. Industry experience in the conduct of tactical drills and exercises as well as emergency preparedness exercises have demonstrated the need for a structured command and control process. This structure includes the reporting relationship of all controllers to the lead controller. 5.11.2 All tactical drills and exercise activities must be regulated by controllers and should be conducted under the guidance and supervision of a lead controller. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, drill and exercise controllers must be trained and qualified to ensure that each controller has the requisite knowledge and experience to control and evaluate exercises. 5.11.3 Licensees should ensure that the training program established for drill and exercise controllers includes a safety component that articulates the licensee's personnel safety considerations for drills and exercises. 5.11.4 An exercise command and control system depends on a cadre of qualified personnel selected and specifically trained to conduct tactical drills and exercises. In addition to being trained to oversee exercises, controllers should receive training commensurate with the scope, complexity, and special nature of the activity. 5.11.5 A controller's primary responsibility is ensuring safety during drill or exercise engagement. The controller organization should be structured in a manner that facilitates the control of all affected locations and the control and coordination of all events to be initiated during an exercise.
DG-5043, Page 31 5.12 Controller Training and Qualification Process As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, drill and exercise controllers must be trained and qualified to ensure that each controller has the requisite knowledge and experience to control and evaluate exercises.
The following sections provide a basic overview of an acceptable process to ensure consistent development and implementation of controller training and qualification. These sections also describe the training feedback process to ensure continual improvement in both industry wide and site-specific training programs. 5.12.1 The goals of the process are the following: (a) establish a common baseline of controller knowledge, skills, and abilities; (b) identify and respond to station and industry controller performance gaps; (c) facilitate peer sharing of controller resources for exercise activities; and (d) provide a feedback loop to support continual improvement in controller performance.
5.13 Controller Knowledge and Experience As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l
)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each controller shall have the knowledge and experience to control and evaluate exercises/drills. 5.13.1 This includes the ability to: (a) Provide timely and accurate information to drill players and participants to ensure consistent and orderly continuation of the drill or exercise in line with the scenario. (b) Evaluate the application of the no-play area (to include radiation boundaries) and control measures. (c) Evaluate tactical decisions and movements made by the mock adversary force to include alternate avenues of approach, entry points, targets of opportunity, and control measures and tools required to facilitate entry. (d) Evaluate the application of the use of cover and concealment to include natural and fabricated defensive positions by all exercise players. This includes defensive positions and/or re-deployment, if required by the exercise. (e) Evaluate the tactical use of exercise weapons comprising their effective range and capabilities, including fields-of-fire. (f) Evaluate the application of target identification, acquisition, and engagement by players. (g) Evaluate the tactical use of hand-carried explosive devices on equipment and personnel and their effects upon detonation. (h) Evaluate the effectiveness of body armor employed by players and its ballistic protection during the exercise. (i) Evaluate the effectiveness of gas masks, or other supplemental gear, employed during the conduct of the exercise.
DG-5043, Page 32 5.13.2 All controllers need to be aware of the entire exercise scenario, including the actions expected of the participant they are monitoring. The controller should evaluate actions that deviate from the expected scenario to ensure that th e intent of the exercise scenario is being realized. In addition, licensees should also consider requiring that controllers have knowledge and experience in the following areas: (a) the use and understanding of the dispersal and effects of chemical agents and smoke grenades; (b) the gas mask used and its limitations; (c) the overall procedure for conducting FOF exercises, including the use of Multiple Integrated Laser Engagement System (MILES) equipment; (d) applicable site-specific delay barriers and movement timelines; (e) the site's policy on use of deadly force; and (f) exercise and site safety procedures.
5.14 Training Design, Development, and Implementation As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all controllers shall complete controller training before participating as a controller in any drill or FOF exercise. As described in Section VI, paragraphs C.1.(b) and D.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, controllers shall complete initial or refresher training within the 12 months preceding their partic ipation in an annual FOF exercise to ensure currency of controller knowledge and familiarity with industry and station controller issues. 5.14.1 Licensees should develop controller training lesson plans and learning objectives for initial and refresher controller training. The controller training program should include, but not be limited to, the following: (a) procedures, guidelines, and references; (b) introduction/history; (c) safety and safe drill play; (d) communication (primary and alternate); (e) terminology; (f) command and control; (g) providing acquired information to players; (h) controller knowledge; (i) position and exercise pace; (j) rules of engagement and the use-of-force; (k) use and effects of explosives; (l) rules of conduct; (m) MILES equipment and limitations; (n) site exclusion areas; (o) temporary breaks in drill execution; (p) response team duties; (q) critique process; and (r) use and control of safeguards information. 5.14.2 The training, at a minimum, should include site-specific information (e.g., industrial safety requirements, weapons handling safety requirements, radiological safety, delay barrier movement timelines, and use of state laws related to use of deadly force). It should also include example DG-5043, Page 33 scenarios and/or practical demonstrations related to controller activities and calls such as the following: (a) drill timeline coordination (situational awareness and proper cue injects); (b) cover and concealment assessment; (c) MILES equipment usage and safety; (d) red (training) gun equipment usage, application, and safety; (e) use of assigned equipment; (f) target set equipment; (g) licensee protective strategy; (h) simulations related to gas masks; (i) simulations related to smoke or other chemical agents (e.g., CS gas (chlorobenzylidenemalononitrile), CN gas (chloroacetophenone)); (j) weapons/explosives capabilities and simulation methods; and (k) safety control. 5.14.3 Controllers should maintain proficiency by routine participation in station FOF exercises. 5.14.4 In addition to the described training, the selection of controllers for specific assignments must consider previous experience, skills, and physical abilities. For example, an adversary controller for a FOF exercise should have previously functioned in that position and have the physical capabilities to remain with the adversary force. The controller briefing for FOF exercises should include just-in-time training to remind controllers of specific situational calls, safety issues, and critical communications that they could encounter during the scenario. 5.14.5 The level of support needed for the conduct of a drill will be significantly less than for an exercise, depending on the complexity of the drill. The licensee may consider the following positions of responsibility and personnel when planning for drills and exercises: (a) Lead Controller - the exercise leader w ith an overall knowledge of security shift operations. This individual may be selected from the security staff or other organization as appropriate. (b) Controllers - designated individuals assigned to specific participants or areas that have the necessary training to observe, evaluate, and control the drill or exercise activities of their assigned participant or control area. (c) Adversaries - appropriately equipped and trained mock attackers with the required physical abilities to engage the licensee exercise participants in an armed attack to test their ability to defend against the DBT. Within the control and safety parameters established for the exercise, the adversary team will actually perform the normal physical and tactical activities (i.e., movement, communication, and carrying of simulated explosives and equipment) required to accomplish their assigned mission. To execute such operations and tactics, it is essential that adversary team members are trained in small-unit tactics and scenario planning. In addition, the adversary team should be provided with sufficient time to prepare for the mission (this includes scenario planning and rehearsal opportunities). Typically, the adversary force is from the licensee's security force, from other nuclear plants, or from local law enforcem ent tactical response units.
DG-5043, Page 34 (d) Insider - a knowledgeable individual who provides inside intelligence information to the mock adversaries. This individual could be a member of the plant technical staff, operations staff, or the security force. Before a drill or exercise, sufficient time should be allotted for the adversary team to gain intelligence information from the insider. (e) On-Duty Security Force - non-drill personnel who are used during an FOF tactical exercise to ensure that the exercise meets all requirements identified in the site-specific physical security plan and procedures. (f) Central Alarm Station (CAS)/Secondary Alarm Station (SAS) Participants - security force members stationed in the alarm stations who will perform CAS/SAS duties as drill participants during the drills and exercises. They will be briefe d on drill conditions as required. (g) Security Drill or Exercise Players - security responders who respond to the mock security contingency event (i.e., response team leaders, alarm station operators, armed responders, and armed security officers designated as a component of the protective strategy). (h) Plant Operations Participant(s) - individual(s) who would normally be assigned to a command and control function. Plant operations personnel should participate when significant simulated plant operations are expected from the scenario. Only plant operator actions listed in a target set should be used in determining whether an entire target set was compromised. If credit is taken for plant operator actions, an evaluation must be conducted to ensure that actions credited as part of the target set for mitigation or recovery are achievable under the postulated scenario conditions. 5.14.6 Licensees should ensure that sufficient documentation has been retained to demonstrate that training has been completed for exercise controllers.
5.15 Mock Adversary Force Member Training and Qualification Process 5.15.1 The following sections provide the training performance standards that are necessary to ensure that mock adversary force (MAF) performance is credible and sufficiently well-trained in order to participate in challenging FOF exercises that simulate, as closely as practicable, the specific conditions under which security personnel shall be required to perform assigned duties and responsibilities. These adversary performance standards are essential to creating realistic challenges as a basis for effective evaluation of a licensee's contingency response performance capabilities during FOF exercises. This secti on provides a basic overview of an acceptable process to ensure consistent development and impl ementation of MAF training and qualification. This section also describes the training feedback process to ensure continual improvement in both industry wide and site-specific training programs. The goals of the process are:
(a) establish a common baseline for MAF knowledge, skills, and abilities; (b) identify and respond to site and industry MAF performance gaps and generic issues; (c) facilitate peer sharing of MAF resources for exercise activities; and (d) support continual improvement in controller performance.
DG-5043, Page 35 5.15.2 The following physical qualifications should be maintained by MAF members: (e) Annual medical examination by a licensed physician to certify that the individual is physically fit and able to perform under high levels of stress in inclement weather and/or during strenuous physical exertions without undue foreseeable medical risks. (f) Each MAF member should report any known or suspected change in health or physical capabilities that might impair his or her mental or sensory capacity and/or agility or otherwise impact their safe and effective performance. (g) The MAF member should possess the mental, sensorial, and motor skills required to safely and effectively perform all assigned tasks. Medical qualifications should include (1) mental alertness and reliable judgment; (2) acuity of senses and ability of expression sufficient to allow accurate communication by written, spoken, audible, or other signals; and (3) motor power, range of motion, neuromuscular coordination, and dexterity. (h) After medical certification by a licensed physician, each MAF candidate should meet the physical fitness standards of being able to run (1) a mile in a maximum qualifying time of 8.5 minutes and (2) a 40-yard prone-to-run dash with a maximum qualifying time of 8 seconds. (i) The MAF should be physically capable of performing or simulating DBTs in an effective and timely manner.
5.16 Mock Adversary Force Member Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(2) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the MAF must replicate, as closely as possible, adversary ch aracteristics and capabilities of the DBT and be capable of exploiting and challenging the licensees protective strategy, personnel, command and control, and implementing procedures. 5.16.1 Each MAF member should have the knowledge, skills and abilities to do the following: (a) Demonstrate qualifications consistent with the requirements applicable to an Armed Responder as provided in Section VI of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73. The licensee should ensure that site-specific requirements needed to ensure individual MAF member performance or participation in site activities have been completed prior to performance or participation in any site activity. (b) Demonstrate competency in individual and team tactical movement under both day and night conditions and in various environmental conditions. (c) Demonstrate tactical communication skills (e.g., radio discipline, use of hand signals) that include providing timely and accurate information to the controllers to ensure consistent and orderly continuation of the drill or exercise in line with the scenario. This includes demonstration of techniques for authenticating human assets (e.g., authentication code, color-coded identification). (d) Understand the entire exercise scenario up to and including the DBT. This includes positioning and exercise/drill pace (timelines).
DG-5043, Page 36 (e) Understand the application of the no-play area (to include radiation boundaries), areas described in Section 5.8 of this RG, and control measures. (f) Implement adversary tactics, techniques, a nd tactical decisions to include alternate avenues of approach, entry points, targets of opportunity, and control measures and tools required to facilitate entry. This should include door breaching and dynamic room entries. (g) Demonstrate the application of the use of topical analysis (water, woodland, industrial) and tactical maneuvers in each of these environments, taking advantage of cover and concealment opportunities. This may include the use of smoke. (h) Demonstrate the tactical use of drill/exercise equipment and weapons, including their effective range and capabilities (including specialized equipment and weapons). (i) Understand target identification, acquisition, and engagement by players, including rules of engagement. (j) Demonstrate the tactical use of hand-carried explosive devices and grenades on equipment and personnel and their effects upon detonation. This should include the placement of door charges and equipment charges. (k) Understand the effectiveness of body armor employed by players and its ballistic protection during the exercise. (l) Understand the rapid, violent, individual and small-unit movement, maneuver, and attack characteristics. (m) Understand the techniques to test/defeat detection and assessment sensors and barriers, including microwave (mono and biostatic), E-field, buried sensors (e.g., seismic), infrared (active and passive), and video motion detector. (n) Understand the use, effects, and dispersal characteristics of chemical agents and smoke grenades. (o) Understand the gas mask being used and its limitations in a stressful environment. (p) Understand operational planning including the analysis of a site-protective posture and in planning a mission with available resources (e.g., collusion with an insider). (q) Understand the differences between the various types of insiders and how to use each type of insider effectively to obtain intelligence information and collect data. (r) Understand the use of MILES equipment. (s) Understand red gun equipment usage, application and safety. (t) Demonstrate firearms knowledge, including safety, marksmanship, and manipulation skills with all weapons described in the DBT, or that might reasonably be expected to be deployed. Training should include a course of fire to enhance proficiency to shoot on the DG-5043, Page 37 move and while wearing a gas mask. Firearms training should also include manipulation and malfunction-clearing techniques, fire discipline, and precision-shooting techniques. (u) Demonstrate firearms proficiency with a minimum of 80-percent accuracy with all types of weapons that might reasonably be employed during FOF exercises. The five types of firearms qualification courses for MAF are (1) semi-automatic rifle (both daylight and reduced lighting); (2) submachine gun (both daylight and reduced lighting); (3) light machine gun; (4) precision rifle (both daylight and reduced lighting); and (5) a shoot-on-the-move course with weapons included in the DBT. Refer to Section 11, "Firearms Qualification Courses," of this document for acceptable firearms qualification courses. (v) Understand applicable site-specific delay barriers and movement timelines. (w) Understand the site's policy on the use of deadly force. (x) Understand exercise and site safety procedures including procedures, guidelines and references, and the procedures for the use and control of safeguards information.
5.17 Mock Adversary Force Member Training Design, Development, and Implementation 5.17.1 The site adversary training program should build upon the following learning objectives: (a) The adversary force training, knowledge, and skills as described in 10 CFR 73.1; (b) Rules of engagement; and (c) Adversary characteristics as described in 10 CFR 73.1 and the DBT. 5.17.2 Licensees should develop MAF member training lesson plans and learning objectives for initial and refresher MAF training. (a) MAF training should include site-specific information, industrial safety requirements, weapons safety requirements, radiological safety, delay barrier movement timelines and use of deadly force. It should also include example scenarios and/or practical demonstrations related to MAF activities such as the following:
(1) drill timeline coordination (situational awareness and proper cue injects);
(2) cover and concealment assessment; (3) individual and team tactical movement; (4) physical security systems and barriers; (5) any specialized equipment; (6) MILES equipment usage and safety; (7) red gun equipment usage and safety; (8) weapons/explosives capabilities and simulation methods; (9) and safety control. (b) All MAF members should complete this basic MAF training before participating in a FOF exercise. Completion of the training should be documented. To ensure currency of MAF knowledge and familiarity with industry and station controller issues, MAF members should complete documented initial or refresher training within the 12 months preceding their participation in an annual FOF exercise. Additionally, MAF members should maintain proficiency by routine participation in station FOF exercises.
DG-5043, Page 38 (c) In addition to the described training, the selection of MAF members for specific assignments should consider previous experience, skills, and physical abilities. For example, a MAF member for an FOF exercise should have previously functioned in that position and should have the physical capabilities to remain with the MAF. The MAF briefing for FOF exercises should include just-in-time training to remind MAF members of specific situational calls, safety issues, and critical communications that they could encounter during the scenario.
5.18 Conduct of Drills and Exercises 5.18.1 Safety during the conduct of drills and exercises is a significant element of the security-training program. Regardless of the scale of the evolution, preparation, coordination, and control are key elements to the effectiveness of a drill or exercise. 5.18.2 To ensure exercise safety and provide consistent and effective performance, the licensee should consider the following criteria when conducting drills or exercises: (a) Weapons/Ammunition Safety-Weapons and ammunition safety is paramount. It is crucial that proper attention is given during exercise planning and performance to ensure that drill participants do not carry or have available live-fire weapons or ammunition. The adversaries and the response force team should use training weapons that are easily identifiable as such. Weapons should be marked so they can be easily identified as training weapons. Live-fire weapons should not be used during drills or exercises. If a live-fire weapon is used, it should be rendered safe and incapable of firing. (b) Exercise Participant Safety-The following criteria should be part of the safety briefing for exercise participants:
(1) Physical contact should occur only after a participant has been disabled, surrendered, or neutralized and only with the approval of a controller.
(2) No attempt should be made to disarm an opponent in any way.
(3) All ascents and descents from elevated positions will involve a ladder, stairway, or other safe method.
(4) There should be no jumping from one elevation to another.
(5) All exercise controllers and participants will be briefed on the radiological and industrial safety restrictions and concerns.
(6) Participants should monitor thei r own condition for overexertion.
(7) Anyone who observes an injured or ill participant should immediately call a timeout, render assistance, and notify a c ontroller/evaluator or call the CAS or SAS. (8) The lead controller should discuss plant and weather conditions before the start of each exercise and address limitations on running, jogging, or walking.
(9) All participants should use personal protective equipment unless otherwise determined by a controller.
(c) Initiation and Termination - The lead controller should initiate the exercise with the concurrence of the on duty security supervisor and operations shift manager/supervisor, if applicable. The initiation of the exercise should be communicated on appropriate radio frequencies and/or the plant paging system. The lead controller should conduct radio checks as appropriate to ensure that all controllers are prepared for the initiation or DG-5043, Page 39 resumption of the drill or exercise. The exercise will be terminated when one or more of the following occur:
(1) all adversaries are neutralized or have given up the mission; (2) a complete target set has been destroyed; (3) it is determined that an actual condition exists that cannot be quickly corrected or is of such magnitude as to preclude the continuation of the drill; (4) a condition adverse to personnel or plant safety exists; or (5) the lead controller directs that the exercise stop. 5.18.3 Participant Responsibilities The licensees should consider including the following criteria in the briefing for participants on their duties and responsibilities associated with the exercise: (a) Each participant is personally responsible for his or her safe conduct. (b) Each participant should monitor his or her condition. (c) Participants who hear an announcement to stop the exercise should immediately stop all exercise activity and maintain their position until they receive additional instructions. (d) Participants will comply with all plant operations, security, and radiation protection requirements. The pre-exercise safety briefing will address radiation protection entry and exit procedures. (e) All participants should follow controller commands and requests. Participants should maintain contact with their assigned controller. If during the conduct of the drill or exercise the participant identifies that there is no longer a controller monitoring drill or exercise activity, they should stop and contact the lead controller. The post-exercise critique should address differences in interpretations of scenario evolutions. (f) After the conclusion of the drill or exercise a nd before the critique, all participants should have an opportunity to document their participation in the drill or exercise so that their actions may be discussed and reviewed in the critique process. 5.18.4 Rules of Conduct The licensees should consider the following rules of conduct as part of the briefing for participants on the conduct of the drill or exercise: (a) Safety is paramount. The safety of participants, controllers/evaluators, plant personnel, and the plant should never be compromised. (b) If identifying clothing or items such as armbands are assigned, participants should wear them at all times during the drill or exercise. (c) Participants will follow all instructions given by a controller. (d) Any participant may stop the drill or exercise for safety reasons. The lead controller should determine the resumption of the drill or exercise.
DG-5043, Page 40 (e) If the drill or exercise is temporarily halted, all participants should stop at their locations, cease all firing and movement, and wait for direction. (f) Once neutralized, a participant should immediately cease all firing, movement, and communications. The participant should remain in place until the drill or exercise is terminated or the controller directs otherwise. (g) Alarm station operators and/or participants may not engage in pre-drill or pre-exercise intelligence gathering. Participants who attempt to circumvent the rules will be removed from the drill or exercise. (h) The controllers/evaluators observing and evaluating the activity should determine all neutralizations. Training equipment, such as MILES gear, can be used to assist in this determination. (i) At the conclusion of each drill or exercise, par ticipants should ensure that all radiological boundary controls are intact and that security doors involved in the drill or exercise are secure. (j) The announcement "this is a drill" should be transmitted immediately preceding the first drill activity once the drill window is opened. This announcement should also be transmitted periodically throughout the drill and before any drill event after a long period of inactivity. (k) To be successful during an exercise, the MAF should actually perform or simulate all actions necessary (including placing simulated explosives at doors, gates, and inside the target areas). If possible, the MAF should perform or simulate all actions necessary (including placing explosives) at the specific location where the equipment damage is intended to occur. If the actual equipment cannot be reached, the MAF may provide specific detail as to exactly where it intended to perform the action (or place the explosive and the amount to be placed). (l) On-duty security force personnel should not assist or impede the participants in any fashion unless the circumstance pertains to a safety-related issue or to a real security situation or response. (m) Participants should observe the deadly force rules of engagement as authorized by federal or state law and as defined by station policy. In addition, Section 8.2 of this RG provides further guidance regarding the proper use of force within the force continuum. (n) At no time should drill or exercise participant(s) manipulate any plant component. It should be stressed that extreme caution is to be used near plant equipment. Backpacks, mock weaponry, and associated drill or exercise equipment should be kept clear of plant equipment. (o) Controllers/evaluators ensure that drill or exercise participants do not voluntarily or accidentally touch plant equipment, controls, or instrumentation. If at any time inadvertent contact is made with plant equipment, controls, or instrumentation, the controller/evaluator should immediately notify operations of the incident.
DG-5043, Page 41 (p) The MAF and the insider must replicate, as closely as possible, the specific characteristics or requirements detailed in the DBT. (q) Sufficient time should be allotted for the MAF to gain intelligence information from the insider. (r) The MAF's familiarity with the plant should consist of only what the force has developed through information obtained from the insider or from public tours of the facility. (s) The MAF should begin the exercise from the point where they would first have the potential for identification by or interaction with the licensee's security program measures. (t) As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(2) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, during the conduct of drills/exercises, the MAF is required to carry mock equipment with them similar in size, shape, and weight to the equipment indicated within the scenario matrix. (u) As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(l)(2) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the MAF will adhere to the equipment and explosive weight limitations detailed in the DBT. (v) When penetrating barriers (i.e., fences, doors, walls, etc.), the mock adversaries' entire task time (e.g., set time, time to achieve standoff distance, time to recover the standoff distance, and traverse the barrier) should be factored into the act. Proper care should be given to personal safety and protection when making entry. If portable blast protection is used, this equipment may be considered as part of the equipment carried in by the adversary team. (w) Incapacitation criteria detailed in the DBT for weapons such as fragmentation devices, smoke grenades, and distraction devices will be followed during the exercise.
5.19 Critique and Evaluation 5.19.1 The licensee's protective strategy may be considered successful or effective if the adversary is detected, assessed, interdicted, and neutralized before successfully disabling all target set components within a single target set. The licensee may take credit for operator actions that protect a target set component or components from destruction or disablement only if that operator action meets all six criteria of a credible operator action as identified in RG 5.81. A licensee may not take credit for actions or equipment that are outside of the predetermined target set for the purpose of determining the effectiveness of the protective strategy or the capability of security personnel to carry out their assigned duties and responsibilities. Pursuant to 10 CFR 73.55(b)(10), the licensee shall enter identified drill or exercise programmatic deficiencies that adversely affect or decrease the protective strategy and physical protection program into the plant's corrective action program or training program and correct the identified deficiencies. Licensees should review the programmatic deficiencies for information that meets the protection requirements of 10 CFR 73.21 and 10 CFR 73.22. 5.19.2 Members of the armed response team should be evaluated on all aspects of response, including but not limited to timeliness, use of cover and concealment, tactical movement and firing techniques, assessment, and communication. Alarm station personnel should be evaluated for assessment, communication, coordi nation, LLEA notification/coordination, and other aspects of DG-5043, Page 42 their duties under emergency situations. The response team leader should be evaluated for performance in demonstrating command and control and making sound and timely decisions for direction of response personnel to interdict and neutralize the threat. Controllers should be evaluated for accurately assessing the individual and overall security force response to a contingency event. 5.19.3 The critique process is a crucial aspect of the drill and exercise program. This process involves evaluation of participant performance through specific critique criteria, participant self-assessment, and observations by controllers/evaluators. The critique criteria should support the evaluation standards and performance criteria identified for the scenario.
5.20 Critique and Evaluation Material As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(g) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each tactical response drill and FOF exercise shall include a documented post-exercise critique in which participants identify failures, deficiencies, or other findings in performance, plans, equipment and strategies. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(i) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, findings, deficiencies, and failures identified during tactical response drills and FOF exercises that adversely affect or decrease the effectiveness of the protective strategy and physical protection program shall be entered into the licensee's corrective action program to ensure that timely corrections are made to the appropriate program areas. 5.20.1 The following criteria should be considered when developing critique material for drill or exercise evaluation purposes: (a) Each position and participant should be evaluated. (b) The ability of each participant to satisfy the performance criteria associated with his or her position should be evaluated. (c) Criteria not evaluated should be indicated on the critique. Evaluators should consider using "NE" (not evaluated) instead of "NA" (not applicable). (d) The form should indicate whether the individual satisfied the performance criteria. (e) Any issues identified as a result of the individual's performance should be documented. Issues should be correlated to their respective evaluation standards. (f) Controller/evaluator performance evaluation comments should be solicited. (g) The critique material should give participants the opportunity to critique their own actions and to provide feedback on the drill or exercise. (h) The critique should include an overall assessment of the success of the drill or exercise in meeting the key program elements identified. (i) Security equipment performance and security system performance should be evaluated as it relates to the licensee's protective strategy.
DG-5043, Page 43 5.20.2 At the conclusion of a drill or exercise, the lead controller should facilitate the critique. All controllers/evaluators, adversaries, and participants should normally participate. These critiques give the participants the opportunity to receive direct feedback from the controllers/evaluators. In addition, they allow the participants to provide direct input to the critique process. (a) At the conclusion of a drill or exercise, the lead controller should facilitate the critique.
All controllers/evaluators, adversaries, and participants should normally participate. These critiques give the participants the opportunity to receive direct feedback from the controllers/evaluators. In addition, they allow the participants to provide direct input to the critique process. The following format can be an effective means of performing critiques:
(1) All participants in the drill or exercise should attend.
(2) The scenario, including goals and objectives, should be reviewed with the participants. A projector can be useful in providing this overview.
(b) Each participant and corresponding controller/evaluator who had an engagement during the drill or has pertinent feedback will summarize his or her actions and should consider the following when providing an action summary:
(1) If a participant took action that resulted in his or her neutralization or the neutralization of an adversary or adversar ies, then the participant and controller report should provide specific details of the actions taken. The participant/controller information should include engagement distance, number of adversaries engaged, number of rounds fired and number of seconds, the probability of neutralizing the adversary (high, medium, or low), and if the neutralization(s) resulted from MILES.
(2) If a participant took action that resulted in friendly fire, then the participant and controller report should provide speci fic details of the actions.
(3) A controller/evaluator whose participant had no interaction with the adversary force and had no effect on the outcome of the drill or exercise should participate (provide lessons learned feedback) to the extent of his or her direct observation
of the exercise or drill.
(4) A controller/evaluator whose participant was actively involved in the outcome of the drill or exercise and who interdicted the adversaries should concur with the player's comments if applicable. If the controller/evaluator does not concur, he or she should provide details.
(5) At the conclusion of critiques, the lead c ontroller should review the results of the drill or exercise and discuss the positive and negative aspects of the activities.
(6) During the review of the results, participants should be asked for suggestions for correcting issues and concerns, and these suggestions should be discussed.
(7) As a conclusion to the critique, the lead controller should review the goals, objectives, and key program elements of the drill or exercise and discuss how each was or was not met.
DG-5043, Page 44 (8) Any participant or controller/evaluator that identifies a deficiency in the licensee's protective strategy (e.g., equipment, system or performance failure), regardless whether that participant took action in the drill or exercise, should provide specific details during the critique.
5.21 Drill or Exercise Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraphs C.3.(g), (h), and (i), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the results of a tactical response drill or FOF exercise shall be documented and en tered into the licensee's corrective action program. 5.21.1 The following information shall be part of the drill or exercise documentation: (a) lead controller; (b) controllers; (c) MAF; (d) scenario description; (e) key elements and evaluation criteria in the drill; (f) failures, deficiencies, or other findings in performance, plans, equipment, or strategies; (g) actions taken on failures, deficiencies, or other findings; (h) corrective actions (plant corrective action or training program) and the timeframe or priority given for resolution and identification of the individual responsible for resolution; and (i) which participants took part in the exercise(s). 5.21.2 The following information should be part of the drill or exercise documentation, and is in addition to the information described in Section 5.21.1: (a) date and time; (b) drill/exercise number or other identifier; (c) plant conditions, security system status, and weather conditions; (d) program or process strengths identified; and (e) whether the goals, objectives, and key program elements of the drill or exercise were or were not met. 5.21.3 The drill-planning package developed for the evolution should be attached to the report. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(j) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must protect deficiencies identified during a drill or exercise consistent with the requirements of 10 CFR 73.21 and 10 CFR 73.22. 5.21.4 The training program normally addresses issues or deficiencies related to training and human performance. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(i) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all program element deficiencies shall be entered in the licensee's corrective action program. 5.21.5 After the final critique results are prepared, the licensee can determine the disposition of each deficiency. 5.21.6 Identification of issues from the drills or exercises is only the first step in the corrective action process. Management should thoroughly review each deficient item identified and promptly DG-5043, Page 45 develop and take corrective action. To ensure resolution of issues, the licensee should regularly review the corrective actions identified through the drill and exercise process and evaluate their effectiveness. 5.21.7 It is important that drill and exercise activities are properly documented to ensure appropriate levels of review and resolution of issues. Not all documents generated in the process of performing drills or exercises must be maintained as records. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3, of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, and 10 CFR 73.55(q), the licensee shall retain the following documents: (a) scenarios; (b) participation records showing which security force personnel participated in tactical drills and FOF tactical exercises; (c) completed critique material, including chronologies; (d) final drill or exercise report; and (e) resolution or proposed resolution of critique items. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3 (h), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall retain an attendance roster for all drill- and exercise-related training and briefings. 5.21.8 Documents that are to be retained as records should be legible and completed appropriately. They must be maintained consistent with NRC regulations, including 10 CFR 73.70, 73.21, and 73.22. 6. Duty Qualification and Requalification As described in Section VI, paragraphs C and D of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must ensure that all individuals assigned duties and responsibilities in the Commission-approved physical security plan or safeguards contingency plan are, before assignment, trained and qualified to perform these duties and responsibilities consistent with the Commission-approved plans, licensee protective strategy, and implementing procedures.
Consistent with site procedures and 10 CFR 73.55(b)(10), the licensee shall ensure that the site corrective action program includes deficiencies identified in the training and qualification program.
6.1 Written
Examination As described in Section VI, paragraph D.1.(b)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed and unarmed individuals assigned security duties and responsibilities shall demonstrate the required knowledge, skills and abilities by completing a written exam as identified in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. The written exams shall require a minimum score of 80 percent to demonstrate an acceptable understanding of assigned duties and responsibilities, to include the recognition of potential tampering involving both safety and security equipment and systems.
DG-5043, Page 46 6.2 Hands-On Performance Demonstration As described in 10 CFR 73.55(b)(5) and Section VI, paragraph D.1.(b)(2) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed and unarmed individuals assigned security duties and responsibilities shall demonstrate the ability to perform their assigned duties and responsibilities through a practical hands-on performance demonstration of required tasks. The hands-on performance demonstration must ensure that theory and associated learning objectives for each required task are c onsidered and that each individual demonstrates the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to effectively perform the task.
6.2.1 With the exception of elements or critical tasks categorized as M (Must Perform), the demonstration should be performed annually and is not subject to change using the SAT process.
6.3 Annual
Written Examination As described in Section VI, paragraph D.1.(b)(3) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall administer an annual examination for armed individuals to verify that they have the required knowledge, skills, and abilities to carry out assigned duties and responsibilities as an armed member of the security organization as identified in the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. Personnel must achieve a minimum score of 80 percent to demonstrate an acceptable understanding of assigned duties and responsibilities.
6.3.1 This examination should, at a minimum, include the following elements:
(1) role of security personnel in supporting safe operations of the facility; (2) the use of deadly force, including the principles involved in the application, escalation, and de-escalation of force; (3) 10 CFR Part 73 requirements for the protection of safeguards information; (4) the authority of private security personnel; (5) knowledge of who has power of arrest and authority to detain; (6) authority to search individuals and seize property; (7) offsite law enforcement response; (8) tactics and force that an adversary group might use to achieve its objectives; and (9) response force deployment, tactical movement withdrawal, and use of support fire. 6.4 Requalification Section VI, paragraph D.1.(a), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 requires armed and unarmed individuals to requalify at least annually, consistent with the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan.
6.4.1 The periodicity of task requalification may be determined by applying an analysis of the training program similar to the SAT process. Personnel may demonstrate and be evaluated on knowledge, skills, and abilities during routine performance as part of normal duties or by requalification in a manner similar to the initial qualification, with the exception of M (Must Perform) elements. The individual should actually perform the indicated task under the supervision of a qualified individual. This element or critical task must be performed annually and is not subject to change using the SAT process.
DG-5043, Page 47 6.4.2 If unable to achieve the requisite requalification, the individual must not return to security duties until he or she has successfully remediated. Requalification completion must be documented in the individual's training record.
6.4.3 The qualification of each individual to perform assigned duties and responsibilities must be documented by a qualified training instructor and attested to by a security supervisor. As described in Section VI, paragraphs A.7 and D.1.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requalification requirements must be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity (also referred to as the baseline qualification date). The actual scheduled da te (baseline) for the requalification of an annual requirement can be changed (re-baselined) by conducting training earlier than the originally scheduled (baseline) date. The next scheduled date for requalification, from that point forward, must be nominally 12 months from the new (re-baselined) qualification date. Licensees must ensure that, when applying this short-cycle provision to the training schedule for their annual requirements, their schedule for weapons range activities still meets the nominal 4-month periodicity identified in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73.
- 7. Certifications of Instructors and Armorers
7.1 Security
Training Instructors As described in Section VI, paragraphs D.2.(b) and E.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each licensee should establish a formal program for training and qualifying security instructors.
7.1.1 The program should include guidance on instructor development and qualification. Security instructors who implement the security-training program should be included in the station's existing instructor training program.
7.1.2 When using contract instructors or trainers, the licensee should either include those personnel in the station's instructor training program or establish comparable criteria to be met by the vendor's program. 7.2 Initial Instructor Qualification
7.2.1 Initial
security training instructor qualifications may include the following skills: (a) Presentation skills such as vocal inflection, voice analysis, gestures, eye contact, verbal communication, and nonverbal communication. (b) Instructional skills such as introducing a lesson, presenting content, monitoring performance, providing feedback, summarizing a lesson, applying adult learning theory, conducting practical demonstrations, maintaining and using individual trainee records and training program records, designing training programs, planning and developing lessons, selecting, developing, and modifying training materials, presenting laboratory instruction, managing individualized instruction, conducting walkthroughs and plant tours, conducting simulator training, and supervising OJT. (c) Facilitation skills such as establishing a positive climate, setting up a classroom, starting a course, maximizing learner confidence and self-esteem, increasing participation and involvement, managing classroom time, motivating learners, addressing individual needs, managing small group activities, promoting transfer of skills, managing group dynamics, DG-5043, Page 48 facilitating discussions, applying questioning techniques, handling resistance, and handling difficult learners.
7.3 Continuing
Training for Security Instructors 7.3.1 Continuing training for security instructors is recommended and should be conducted consistent with the station's existing instructor training program. 7.3.2 Training needs analysis, feedback on training performance, and other inputs as defined in the following sections should be the basis of continuing training programs. Qualified instructors should review the initial instructor training elements to enhance their knowledge, skill, and ability. 7.4 Subject Matter Experts Subject matter experts may or may not be qualified security instructors. Subject matter experts should be fully proficient in the tasks they are assigned to instruct and evaluate. At a minimum, they should have the following attributes: (a) field knowledge, skill, and ability; (b) effective interpersonal communication skills; (c) effective observation skills; (d) acceptance of self-development; and (e) professionalism.
7.5 Firearms
Instructor As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, firearms instructors must be trained and certified by a state or nationally recognized entity for each weapon type (handgun, rifle, shotgun, remote operated weapons, and enhanced wea pons) for which the individual will be providing instruction. Firearms instructors must follow the recertification criteria set by the certifying entity, but recertification must occur at least every 3 years.
7.5.1 A certified firearms instructor must train and qualify members of the security organization for the use and maintenance of each assigned weapon to include, but not be limited to: marksmanship, assembly, disassembly, cleaning, storage, handling, clearing, loading, unloading, and reloading.
7.5.2 Examples
of a recognized entity may be the National Rifle Association's law enforcement firearms instructor courses and those offered by a federal, state, or state-certified LLEA.
7.6 Armorer
As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armorers, whether licensee employees or a contracted service, must be certified. If the licensee does not employ a certified armorer, it may send the weapons to a certified offsite armorer for required maintenance and certification of operability.
DG-5043, Page 49
- 8. Weapons Training
8.1 General
Firearms Training As described in Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed security personnel must complete firearms training to demonstrate basic skills and the safe handling of assigned firearms. The objective is to conduct firearms training drills and courses of fire to teach the necessary skills and abilities to armed security personnel. As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(d) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan must include, but is not limited to, the following areas: (a) mechanical assembly, disassembly, weapons capabilities, and fundamentals of marksmanship; (b) weapons cleaning and storage; (c) tactical weapons training, day and night; (d) safe weapons handling; (e) clearing, loading, unloading, and reloading; (f) firing under stress; (g) zeroing duty weapon(s) and weapons sighting adjustments; (h) target identification and engagement; (i) weapons malfunctions; (j) cover and concealment; and (k) weapons familiarization.
8.2 Mechanical
Assembly, Disassembly, Weapons Capabilities, and Fundamentals of Marksmanship As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(b)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each armed member of the security organization shall be trained and qualified by a certified firearms instructor for the use and maintenance of each assigned weapon to include but not limited to, marksmanship, assembly, disassembly, cleaning, storage, handling, clearing, loading, unloading, and reloading, for each assigned weapon. 8.2.1 Training on weapons capabilities should include the maximum effective range and the penetration capabilities of all licensee-issued firearms and ammunition. Armed security personnel must participate in training on the fundamentals of marksmanship (grip, stance or position, trigger control, sight alignment, sight picture, breathing, follow through) to emphasize the development of shooting skills.
8.3 Weapons
Cleaning and Storage As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's firearms maintenance program must include instruction in the care, cleaning, and storage of firearms. Section 13 of this RG discusses firearms maintenance.
8.4 Day and Night Tactical Weapons Training As described in Section VI, paragraph F.3 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the firearms qualification shall be performed both during the night and during the day.
DG-5043, Page 50
8.4.1 Armed
officers should be trained in weapons practices used in combat situations (e.g., firing on the move, double tapping). The goal of this type of weapons training is to teach weaponry techniques to achieve a level of conditioning that provides the officer w ith enhanced firearms shooting skills.
8.4.2 Training
for tactical firing should focus on the armed officer's ability to identify the opportunities that exist in the contingency environment and to take decisive and effective advantage of them.
8.4.3 Additional
considerations for training at night may include, but are not limited to, use of an appropriate flashlight, use of night devices and/or thermal devices (worn or weapons mounted), limited illumination, and additional range safety measures.
8.4.4 Night
training may be simulated through a variety of techniques, such as, but not limited to, the use of indoor firing ranges or the use of tinted eyewear. This training may also be conducted as dry-fire training or as FOF training with the use of MILES, simulated weapons systems, paintball systems, or other techniques.
8.4.5 This training may need to be adjusted to be cons istent with applicable local, state, and federal laws or agreements regarding the use of firearms. Licensees may consider the following in the development of the tactical weapons training: (a) Assessment; (1) (before engagement) situational awaren ess and surveillance of the operator's horizon and identification of cover and concealment, and (2) (after engagement) adversary status, communications, wea pons condition, and ammunition management. (b) Identification; (1) identification of friend or foe and the decision to engage, (2) threat management (from immediate to impending threats), and (3) situational training (threat amidst non threat-related targets). (c) Target acquisition; (1) from the ready, holster, or carry (safety circle), (2) rapid acquisition techniques (initial ac quisition and adjusted acquisition), (3) single threat or a single threat amidst non threat-related targets, (4) multiple threat or a multiple threat amidst non threat-related targets, and (5) threat management (from immediate to impending threats, sequential acquisition). (d) Engagement; (1) use of cover and concealment, (2) techniques of effective rapid fire (all weapons), (3) recovery from malfunctions (immediate action/feedway clearance), (4) weapons transitions, (5) shooting while moving (advancing, evading, and lateral movement), (6) stationary and moving threat, (7) threat management (engagement of immediate to impending threat, sequential fire), (8) multiple threat (sequential fire) or multiple threat amidst non threat-related targets, DG-5043, Page 51 (9) recovery from engagement (back to assessment) and continuation of mission, and (10) close-quarter firing.
8.5 Safe Weapons Handling As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(b)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, training in safe weapons handling skills shall be developed for each type of weapon assigned to the licensee's armed security personnel.
8.5.1 This training should incorporate the following firearms safety rules: (a) Treat all firearms as loaded at all times. (b) Always keep the firearm's muzzle pointed in the safest direction and never intentionally cross anything you are not prepared to shoot. (c) Always keep your trigger finger straight on the firearm's frame unless you are prepared to shoot. (d) Never place the selector level in the fire position unless you are ready to fire. (e) Verify the position of the firearm's selector lever if your weapon is bumped. (f) Never handle firearms if you are taking any prescription or nonprescription drugs that could affect your ability to safely handle or fire a firearm. (g) Always load and unload firearms in the designated loading and unloading area. (h) Never handle any firearm by the barrel.
8.5.2 The firearms training program should include, but is not limited to, the following range safety guidelines: (a) Firearms range safety rules should be followed at all times. (b) Firearms range safety guidelines should incorporate industry operating experience and other related events. (c) Firearms range safety guidelines should also address armed officer safety. (d) Range safety rules should be reviewed before conducting any range activities.
8.6 Clearing, Loading, Unloading, and Reloading As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(b)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, clearing, loading, unloading, and (tactical and speed) reloading procedures for each assigned firearm must be practiced.
8.6.1 Training
for the retention of unused ammunition during tactical reloads should be considered.
8.7 Firing
Under Stress As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(d)(6) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, firearms training programs shall include training exercises that induce physical and mental stress.
8.7.1 The following are examples of elements that can be introduced into the weapons training environment to induce stress: (a) time limitations (exercise completion times, reduced target exposure times); (b) physical activity (running, climbing stairs); (c) loud audible noise (simulated sm all arms fire, explosions);
DG-5043, Page 52 (d) weapon malfunctions (immediate action, feedway clearance, weapons transitions); (e) limited lighting conditions at night; (f) simulated equipment failures (primary sighting system inoperable, magazine fails to feed); (g) simulated incapacitation (incapacitation exercises, non-dominant (support) hand firing); (h) simulated use of chemical agents; and (i) donning of a gas mask.
8.8 Zeroing
Weapons and Weapons Sighting Adjustments As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(d) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the firearms training programs shall include instruction for armed personnel to understand basic zeroing and adjustment of weapon sighting mechanisms for all assigned weapons and to perform these functions, if appropriate, and as described in site procedures.
8.8.1 The NRC recognizes that some weapons do not allow a shooter to manually perform zeroing without specialized tools. Sighting systems should be inspected daily to ensure that they are operable (e.g., front/rear sights not bent or broken, glass in-scope-type systems not cracked, batteries replaced if needed, night sights illuminate, sighting systems mounted properly and not loose) using appropriate safety rules for weapons handling.
8.9 Target
Identification and Engagement As described in Section VI, paragraph C.3.(k)(3) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, target identification and engagement training shall be conducted to reflect the environment and conditions the security force would encounter when exercising the licensee's protective strategy (e.g., while moving, in the open, from cover).
8.9.1 Training
in target identification and engagement should be designed to enhance the armed security officer's ability to identify adversarial threats. Target identification and engagement training should focus on the development of the following: (a) assessment (situational awareness and su rveillance of the operator's horizon); (b) identification (identification of friend or foe and the decision to engage); (c) target acquisition (from the ready, holster, or carry (safety circle)); and (d) engagement (adequate for ne utralization and recovery and mission continuation).
8.10 Weapons Malfunctions As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(d)(9) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's weapons training program must include training for weapons malfunctions. 8.10.1 The training should include weapons-clearing techniques such as immedi ate action, as well as weapons feedway clearances. 8.10.2 The prescribed method for causing malfunctions during training may include the use of inert training ammunition commonly referred to as "dummy rounds" or simulated weapons systems.
DG-5043, Page 53 8.11 Cover and Concealment As described in Section VI, paragraphs C.2.(c)(4) and E.1.(d)(10) of Appendix B for 10 CFR Part 73, armed personnel must be trained to recognize and effectively use cover and concealment. 8.11.1 Training should include methods of approaching, moving, and shooting around various forms of cover and concealment. Cover is an object offering protection from weapons fire (i.e., concrete walls, steel beams, large trees, heavy metal machine parts, large pipes, etc.). 8.11.2 Cover can deteriorate rapidly under weapons fire and should be considered consumable. Concealment is provided by vegetation, terrain features, terrain relief and drainage, manmade structures, weather conditions (such as fog and precipitation), and darkness. Proper evaluation of these aspects differentiates concealment from cover. Concealment is effective only when individuals do not disclose their location by fire or maneuver.
8.12 Weapons Familiarization As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(d)(11) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the objective of firearms familiarization training is to conduct initial and annual firearms drills and courses of fire to improve the skill and ability of armed security personnel. 8.12.1 Firearms familiarization, at a minimum, should include the following: (a) firearms handling drills; (b) clearing, loading, unloading, and reloading procedures for each firearm; (c) training for engaging potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event; (d) drills that demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another; (e) drills that demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds); (f) cover and concealment drills; (g) nonlethal weapons training and drills; and (h) cleaning and maintenance procedures for each firearm. 8.12.2 The licensee should also consider these topics: (a) weapons nomenclature (safety features, cer tain design characteristics such as gas operating system); (b) weapons functioning (cycle of operation, the action of all working parts); (c) dry-fire range familiarization (stressing range safety procedures); (d) live-fire range familiarization (e.g., familiarization with the report and recoil of the weapon); (e) firing positions (e.g., prone, kneeling, sitting); and (f) timed-fire exercises (e.g., from ready, carry, or holster using firing positions such as prone or kneeling). 8.12.3 Advanced training for weapons familiarization should be considered for all assigned weapons systems and should include the following advanced skills: (a) rapid fire techniques; (b) non-dominant (support) hand fire; DG-5043, Page 54 (c) shooting while moving (laterally, advancing, and evading); (d) shooting from elevated positions; and (e) firing with field gas mask donned.
8.13 Use of Deadly Force As described in 10 CFR 73.55(k)(3), a licensee shall train each armed member of the security organization to prevent or impede attempted acts of radiological sabotage by using force sufficient to counter the force directed at that person, including the use of deadly force when the armed member of the security organization has a reasonable belief that the use of deadly force is necessary in self-defense or in the defense of others, or any other circumstances as authorized by applicable state or federal law. As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(e) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each licensee shall ensure that all armed members of the security or ganization are instructed on the proper use of the force continuum, including the use of deadly force as authorized by applicable state law. Each member of the security organization, commensurate with his or her assigned duties, must thoroughly understand the proper use of the force continuum. 8.13.1 Armed members of the security organization should be instructed on the proper use of deadly force in various situations and circumstances that could justify it in protecting power reactors. For additional information, Information Notice No. 89-05, "Use of Deadly Force by Guards Protecting Nuclear Power Reactors Against Radiological Sabotage" provides some situations and circumstances that could justify the use of deadly force in protecting power reactors. Examples of situations and circumstances that could justify the use of deadly force are as follows: (a) Defending Against Violent Armed Assault. Use of deadly force could be justified in defending a power reactor against a determined violent armed assault. (b) Defending Against Armed Attack by Stealth. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting armed intruders who have penetrated the protected area and are attempting to break into an area containing vital equipment, ignoring defenders' challenges and warnings to stop. (c) Defending Against Attackers Employing Explosives and/or Incendiaries. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting intruders placing explosives or incendiary devices near vital equipment if the intruders ignore defenders' warnings to stop. (d) Defending Against Perceived Armed Attack. Use of deadly force could be justified for defenders intercepting heavily armed intruders who enter the protected area ignoring challenges and warnings. 8.13.2 Under these and similar conditions, security personnel do not have to abandon cover and concealment or their defensive positions, or wait for the adversaries to fire the first shot. Such actions may expose the security personnel to casua lties and jeopardize their ability to defeat or contain the attacking forces.
8.14 Range Periodicity As described in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization must participate in range activities on a nominal 4-month periodicity. The DG-5043, Page 55 activities may be conducted up to 5 weeks before or 5 weeks after the scheduled date, but the next scheduled date must be 4 months from the original scheduled date. 8.14.1 This provision is intended to account for unexpected site-specific circumstances that may delay an individual's ability to participate in range activities on a specified date.
- 9. Weapons Qualifications and Requalification In accordance with Section VI, paragraphs D.2, E.1.(b), and F.5.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization shall be qualified a nd requalified on assigned weapons or weapon types. 9.1 Qualifications should be accomplished with the weapon and ammunition assigned for use while on duty or their equivalent (i.e., similar in recoil). 9.2 Non-duty ammunition (i.e., frangible ammunition) may be used in lieu of the duty ammunition for firearms qualifications provided that the ammunition meets the requirements in Section VI of Appendix B to10 CFR Part 73 and the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan. 9.3 If unable to achieve a requisite qualification or requalification, an individual must not be assigned or returned to armed duty until the individual has completed qualification or been remediated on the requalification item. 9.4 Licensees may provide remedial training for personnel requiring additional firearms instruction to qualify on the specific firearms qualification course. Typical remedial firearms training could include the following: (a) one-on-one instruction on basic fundamentals of marksmanship beginning with dry-firing exercises, if applicable, advancing to live-fire practice, and culminating in a qualification attempt; and
(b) analysis of all results with the shooter to remedy the identified problem(s). 9.5 A qualified training instructor must document, with input from other qualified training organization personnel, as appropriate, and a security supervisor must attest to, the qualification and requalification of each individual.
- 10. Alternate Firearms Qualification Programs 10.1 Licensees may utilize a firearms qualification program other than those listed in Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 if the licensee documents how the alternative firearms qualification program satisfies NRC requirements. 10.2 Once the qualification courses have been designed, licensees may submit them to any recognized entity listed in Section 11 below, for certification before the courses are implemented. The licensee may use current qualification courses developed and certified by these entities; however, such courses may not be modified for use unless re-certified.
DG-5043, Page 56
- 11. Firearms Qualification Courses In accordance with Section VI, paragraph E.1.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all armed personnel assigned duties and responsibilities involving the use of weapons must be qualified on each weapon type that the individual will be assigned. In accordance with Section VI, paragraph F.4 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed personnel shall qualify by achieving the standards and scores established by a federal- or state-approved law enforcement qualification course or an equivalent nationally recognized course. Examples of equivalent nationally recognized courses include courses recognized by the National Rifle Association, U.S. Department of Defense, the International Association of Law Enforcement Firearms Instructors, and the firearms qualification courses described in Appendix H, "Weapons Qualification Criteria," to 10 CFR Part 73. 11.1. Handgun As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.3.(a) and (b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall conduct handgun qualification courses for daylight and night fire to evaluate the shooter's marksmanship and firearm manipulation skills under both daylight and reduced-light conditions. The minimum qualifying score for each course must be 70 percent of the maximum obtainable target score. 11.1.1 Qualification courses should include a predetermined amount of ammunition, type of target(s), and scoring system to be used (e.g., 60 rounds fired at a B-27-type target with the maximum score of 300 points divided by 3). 11.1.2 Licensees should develop a typical daylight handgun qualification course which includes the following: (a) moving from one shooting position to another (e.g., standing to kneeling, standing to prone) before, or during, a course of fire; (b) reloading; (c) dominant (firing) hand and non-dominant (supporting) hand shooting; (d) timed stages of fire (e.g., two rounds in 3 seconds, two rounds in 5 seconds, depending on distance from target) and multiple rounds fired at the target (stationary or turning) during the stage of fire (e.g., two rounds, four rounds, eight rounds, and reload); (e) shooters engaging the targets from multiple distances, starting from a close or distant proximity to the target and gradually increasing or decreasing distance from the target (i.e., 7, 10, 15, and 25 yard lines or 25, 15, 10, and 7 yard lines); (f) shooters engaging the targets from the standing, kneeling, and prone positions; and (g) shooters engaging the targets while drawing the firearm from the holster.
DG-5043, Page 57 11.2 Semi-Automatic Rifle As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.3.(a) and (b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall conduct semi-automatic rifle qualification courses for daylight and night fire to evaluate the shooter's marksmanship and firearm manipulation skills under daylight and reduced-light conditions. The minimum qualifying score for each course must be 80 percent of the maximum obtainable target score. As described in Section VI, paragraph C.1.(b)(3) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, security personnel must be trained and qualified in the use of all necessary devices. Accordingly, all armed members of the licensee's security organization that use multiple sighting systems must qualify with the primary sighting system and successfully complete familiarization training with applicable weapons using each secondary sighting system (i.e., optics, thermal scope, iron sights) as required to implement the site's protective strategy. 11.2.1 The use of multiple brands and models of primary sights may require multiple qualifications. If a documented evaluation determines that the magnification and minutes of angle of different brand and model sights are sufficiently similar, then a separate qualification with each sight is not required. 11.2.2 Qualification courses should include a predetermined amount of ammunition, type of target(s), and scoring system to be used (e.g., 60 rounds fired at a B-27-type target with the maximum score of 300 points divided by 3). For range facilities that cannot accommodate firing at increased distances, licensees may use smaller targets to simulate increased distances consistent with the target manufacturer's specifications (e.g., a 50-percent reduction in target size will increase the distance by a factor of 2). 11.2.3 Licensees may develop a typical daylight semi-automatic rifle qualification course which includes the following: (a) moving from one shooting position to another (e.g., standing to kneeling, standing to prone); (b) re-loading; (c) timed stages of fire (e.g., two rounds in 5 seconds depending on distance from target) and multiple rounds fired at the target (stationary or turning) during the stage of fire (e.g., two rounds, four rounds, eight rounds, and reload); (d) shooters engaging the targets from multiple distances between 25 and 200 yards or up to the maximum distance of the range and/or defensive strategy requirements for engagement with adversaries; (e) shooters engaging the targets from the standing, kneeling, and prone positions; and (f) use of rifle slings and/or bipods or tripods for shooting support (if used on duty).
11.3 Shotgun As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.3.(a) and (b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall conduct shotgun qualification courses for daylight and night firing to evaluate a shooter's marksmanship and firearm manipulation skills under daylight and reduced-light conditions. The minimum qualifying score for each course must be 70 percent of the maximum obtainable target score. 11.3.1 Typically, when the target is scored for a shot gun qualification course, any projectile impression or cutting of the silhouette of the human form is scored as one point.
DG-5043, Page 58 11.3.2 Typical qualification courses should quantify a shooter's ability to accurately discharge his or her firearms in a controlled environment. Licensees should develop and conduct qualification courses as a performance-based, critical-task test of each shooter's ability to meet the requirements in the licensee's approved Training and Qualification plan. Qualification courses should include a predetermined amount of ammunition, type of target(s), and scoring system to be used (i.e., 8 rounds of 00 buckshot fired at a B-27-type target with the maximum score of 72 points or a minimum of 10 rounds of rifle slugs fired at a B-27-type target with the maximum score of 10 points). 11.3.3 Licensees may develop a typical daylight shotgun qualification course, which includes the following: (a) moving from one shooting position to another (i.e., standing to kneeling) before, or during, a course of fire; (b) re-loading; (c) strong hand and support hand (non-dominant, commonly known as weak hand) shooting; (d) timed stages of fire (i.e., two rounds in 3 seconds, two rounds in 5 seconds, depending on distance from target) and multiple rounds fired at the target (stationary or turning) during the stage of fire (i.e., two rounds, four rounds, and reload); (e) shooters engaging the targets from multiple distances, starting from close or distant proximity to the target and gradually increasing or decreasing distance from the target (i.e., 10, 15, or 25 yards or beyond for buckshot and out to 50 or 100 yards for slugs, (f) shooters engaging the targets from the standing and kneeling positions, and (g) shooters engaging the targets from the ready/carry positions (i.e., weapon in shooter's hands with no sight alignment attained) 11.4 Low-Light Qualifications 11.4.1 Reduced-light (night-fire) qualification courses should be developed to include some of the elements listed above for the daylight qualification course. Night-fire qualifications should apply conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss-of-lighting conditions at the site. Licensee light-level standards and procedures should be used during periods of reduced-light range activities and are site specific. Licensee procedures would normally address these requirements.
Qualification courses should include a predetermined amount of ammunition, type of target(s), and scoring system to be used (e.g., 60 rounds fired at a B-27-type target with the maximum score of 300 points divided by 3). 11.4.2 A heightened level of safety should be maintained during reduced-light qualification. Training to familiarize personnel with operations in reduced-light training should be provided. Substituting commercially available light-reducing equipment (e.g., welder's goggles or dark-light simulator eyewear) should not be allowed when conducting reduced-light qualification. 11.4.3 Control of range activities during reduced-light qualification is critical for the overall safety of all personnel. Firearms instructors may consider the use of lighting devices to identify themselves, as well as shooters, during reduced-light qualification. Firearms instructors may consider the preservation of all personnel's night vi sion when using these lighting devices. 11.4.4 The security staff of licensees that approve the use of flashlights for range activities should become familiar with the equipment. Licensees should develop specific reduced-light courses of fire that include shooting both with and without flashlights.
DG-5043, Page 59 11.4.5 Licensee light-level standards and procedures should be used during periods of reduced-light range activities and are site specific. Licensee procedures would normally address these requirements.
11.5 Tactical Weapons Qualification Course As described in Section VI, paragraph F.2, of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, a tactical qualification course must be conducted for each weapon type or model used by an armed member of the licensee's security organization. The licensee's de veloped tactical qualifi cation and requalification courses must describe the performance criteria needed to include the site-specific conditions (i.e., lighting, elevation, fields-of-fire) under which assigned personnel shall be required to carry out their assigned duties. 11.5.1 The course should assess the shooter's ability to perform realistic and simulated aspects of the site's protective strategy with all contingency equipment. The design of the tactical qualification course would exercise and evaluate a shooter's ability to perform required armed officer skills and marksmanship fundamentals while experiencing stress from performing non routine tasks, such as tactically moving, pivoting, engaging multiple targets, recovering from simulated weapons malfunctions (using dummy rounds), using available cover, or firing after donning a gas mask. Each site may determine its own specific tactical requirements (e.g., barrier or fence, specific no-shoot areas, or devices) and incorporate them into the course. Since range facilities differ from site to site, the courses may be modified to accommodate the safety requirements for each range. 11.5.2 The tactical qualification course emphasizes armed officer and marksmanship skills relating to assessment and identification, tactical engagement and movement, and advantageous use of environment and resources while facing multiple threats (targets). The licensee should consider designing the course to replicate licensee defensive positions (e.g., size of shooting ports, elevations), distance or yardage of shots, and potential site situations. As described in Section VI, paragraph F.3.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the minimum qualifying score for the tactical qualification course must be a score of 80 percent of the maximum obtainable score. 11.5.3 The licensee's protective strategy should be considered in developing the course of fire. The course should reflect specific implementation aspects that the licensee identifies in its contingency plan, licensee Training and Qualification plan, and implementing procedures. 11.5.4 The tactical qualifications course should be conducted consistent with all firearms safety instructions and applicable site-specific safety instructions. Limitations on range use must be observed and all tactical shooting courses should be conducted with a ratio of at least one instructor to one shooter. For all tactical firing courses, the firearms should be loaded in the standard duty configuration and ca rried consistent with the site security plans and implementing procedures. 11.5.5 The annual tactical qualification course includes the combined use of the handgun and shoulder-fired weapons employed in a contingency event at the site. Each shooter must achieve an overall combined qualifying score of 80 percent that accounts for all weapons systems used. 11.5.6 The scoring for this course should incorporate proficiency criteria from both weapons operations and marksmanship as well as physical and tactical ability.
DG-5043, Page 60 11.5.7 Qualification standards should be based on the percentage derived from the number of targets successfully engaged and the successful completion of the course within the specified time. To determine the qualifying score, the licensee should establish a basis for the maximum achievable score/percentage for the weapons operation and marksmanship aspect of the course (e.g., 100/100 percent). A point value should be assigned to each target consistent with the total number of targets within the course that equals the maximum achievable score/percentage (e.g., 25 targets at four points each equals 100/100 percent). The licensee should then establish a basis for the maximum allowable time to successfully complete the course. For this aspect of the qualification criteria, the licensee should use known timelines consistent with the implementation of its protective strategy for movement, tactics, and the negotiation of obstacles within the course. The standard should also include reasonable consideration for the time duration of firing engagements (target exposure time), range equipment operations (delays in target system operations), and safety (any measure instituted to increase safety). The standard for the maximum allowable time to successfully complete the course could be associated with a percentage of score or a pass/fail in the form of a time limitation. 11.5.8 Each licensee should document its methodology for determining that successful completion of its tactical qualification course demonstrates acceptable proficiency. The expectation for the qualification criteria of this course must not be less than the minimum total of 80 percent and a time that is less than the maximum allowable time limit as identified in the licensee Training and Qualification plan and implementing procedures. A qualifying score of less than 80 percent or a course completion time in excess of the maximum allowable time limit, as identified in the licensee Training and Qualification plan, would require remedial training and subsequent requalification.
11.6 Course of Fire Requirements for the Tactical Qualification As described in Section VI, paragraph F.5, of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, armed members of the security organization shall be re-qualified for each assigned weapon at least annually in accordance with Commission requirements and the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan, and the results documented and retained as a record. 11.6.1 The courses of fire for the training of armed security personnel should as minimum include the following: (a) the combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons employed during a contingency event according to the site's protective strategy; (b) firing from a reasonable and representative facsimile of licensee defensive positions, elevations, and distances; (c) appropriate levels of stress and physical demands (e.g., engaging targets while on the move); (d) proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets; (e) the ability to transition from one type of firearm to another; (f) the ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds); (g) adherence to the safe handling of firearms during simulated courses of fire; (h) firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a protective mask; (i) non-dominant (support) hand shooting; and (j) use of the minimum quantity of combined handgun and shoulder-fired weapon ammunition necessary to demonstrate the ability to effectively implement the licensee's protective strategy.
DG-5043, Page 61 11.6.2 The amount of ammunition distributed among all weapons and fired during the course should be consistent with the licensee's protective strategy (i.e., it must match the standard ammunition load carried by the armed responder), as identified in the licensee's contingency plan and implementing procedures. If the protective strategy identifies ammunition resupply points, the tactical course of fire may include them as well. 11.6.3 When developing the tactical qualification course, licensees should rely on the experience and expertise of trained and qualified firearms instructors. Certified instructors should use available resource material (internal and external), including firearms manuals and best practices benchmarked throughout the industry. A list of additional resources that may assist a licensee in the development of the tactical course of fire appears at the end of this guidance document within the Bibliography section. 11.6.4 A tactical course of fire should challenge the tactical knowledge, skill, and ability of the shooter at various stages of practical demonstration when performing simulated but realistic aspects of the site's protective strategy. The course should reflect specific implementation aspects that the licensee identifies in its contingency plan and implementing procedures and that the licensee's Training and Qualification plan and implementing procedures must support. For example, in its contingency response plan and implementing procedures, a licensee identifies towers that are located at the perimeter for the interdiction of adversaries approaching the protected area (consistent with the licensee's use of force continuum). The licensee should consider the development of a stage of fire within its tactical course of fire that addresses this aspect. The licensee's implementing procedures for training would also have to address this aspect, including existing documentation demonstrating that the shooter received (at a minimum) familiarization training in this area. 11.6.5 The course of fire should include specific pieces of equipment staged throughout the range that are designed to provide the shooter with simulated, but realistic, aspects of the site's protective strategy. The equipment should include barricades to simulate walls or sides of buildings found inside the protected area, or actual or replicated pieces of plant equipment (e.g., piping or pumps that have been retired or replaced and plant stairwells) staged throughout the range for added realism. The range design should include replicas or reasonable facsimiles of towers and defensive positions found inside the protected area. The licensee should assess the impact of the changes to the range configuration for shooter safety and overall range safety.
11.7 Course of Fire Stages for the Tactical Qualification Course 11.7.1 As with any live firearms training or qualification evolutions, certain aspects of an actual firearms engagement cannot be demonstrated as they might actually occur because of safety concerns. It is also understood that a trained and qualified firearms instructor may have to specifically control certain aspects of a firearms qualification course to cause a shooter to demonstrate all required skills as well as to ensure safety. Actions that address safety and the complete demonstration of all required skills must be considered and implemented in the development and conduct of a tactical qualification course. 11.7.2 Licensees should attempt to minimize instructor controls and interaction during the conduct of tactical qualification courses to ensure that the shooter has the ability to operate in a contingency environment while demonstrating all skills required of an armed officer.
DG-5043, Page 62 11.7.3 Safety is paramount during all stages of the tacti cal qualification course. Some stages within the course of fire may require the shooter to have all contingency equipment donned (or available) to demonstrate the ability to effectively implem ent the NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, site contingency procedures, and site implementing procedures. The following guidance for a tactical course of fire is provided below to demonstrate an acceptable approach to address each element of a tactical qualification course. (a) Element 1, Objective: Combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons employed during a contingency event. The requirements contained in Section VI, paragraph F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, "Tactical weapons qualification," state, in part, that licensee developed tactical qualification courses must describe the performance criteria to carry out assigned duties.
(1) The licensee should describe the conditions under which the shooter would be expected to carry or have available, all handguns and shoulder-fired weapons necessary to meet the performance criteria for a tactical weapon s qualification course, and describe the successful completion of the course of fire designed to meet the site's protective strategy as described in the Commission-approved Safeguards Contingency Plan.
(2) The shooter may use any weapon at any stage of the course to effectively engage the required number of targets.
(3) If the licensee uses more than one type of shoulder-fired weapon as described in its training and qualification plan, contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures (e.g., M-4 and AR-15 or M-4 and shotgun), the licensee should describe how the performance criteria is achieved for each type of shoulder-fired weapon used in the tactical course of fire.
(4) All weapons included in the tactical course of fire should be used in the course of fire consistent with their use and identification in the licensee's training and qualification plan, contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures (e.g., AR-15 in fixed posts, M 4 for armed responders).
(5) Sighting system configuration and use in the tactical course of fire should be consistent with that identified by the licensee as the primary sighting system for the particular weapon system, as employed and identified in the licensee's contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures.
(6) If a gas mask is required to implement the licensee's defensive strategy, the licensee's familiarization firearms training and marksmanship qualification courses should also include the use of secondary sighting systems or other sighting systems for specific applications while wearing a gas mask.
(7) The use of sighting systems other than those identified by the licensee as the primary sighting system for the specific weapon during the conduct of the tactical qualification course is left to the discretion of the licensee.
(8) The shooter would not have to carry more than one shoulder-fired weapon at any one time unless required to do so by the site protective strategy.
DG-5043, Page 63 (9) Additional shoulder-fired weapons could be located at other stages of the course of fire, and the shooter could transition to those weapons in some situations, at a time specified by the certified firearms instructor or at a predetermined time during the course of fire.
(10) Range designs and range safety should be considered to determine the use of specific contingency or enhanced equipment or weapons (e.g., considering yard line or distance of target engagement and backstop configuration for the safe use of each weapon) during each stage within the course of fire. (b) Element 2, Objective: Firing from a reasonable and representative facsimile of licensee defensive positions, elevations, and distances. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(1) The licensee's tactical course of fire should have reasonable facsimiles of licensee defensive positions, elevations, and fields of fire and include those facsimiles as a stage or stages in the course of fire.
(2) To provide reasonable assurance of his or her ability to effectively execute the duties required by the protective strategy, the shooter should demonstrate the application of performance criteria needed to negotiate the course and engage the required targets.
(3) The facsimile of the defensive positions should be constructed out of alternate materials and built with the objective of giving the s hooter a similar perspective of elevations, fields of fire, and distances that exist in the actual defensive positions used for the protective strategy inside the protected area.
(4) The elevations and distances of the defensive position facsimiles do not have to exactly match the actual ones in the protected area.
(5) The design of the facsimiles should include consideration of actual protected area shooting positions, shooting port size, and approximate fields of fire, and should reasonably replicate the height, distance, and angle on a representative scale to produce similar effects. Firearms training resource manuals and documents for elevated position
design and angle calculations are useful in this task. Smaller targets can be used to simulate distance and distant target acquisition for the shooter.
(6) If the licensee's protective strategy requires the armed responder to engage moving targets from ground defensive positions and elevated defensive positions to defend the facility, then the tactical course of fire should include stages for moving target engagement both from ground and elevated positions, to demonstrate how the performance criteria for adversary engagement satisfies the licensee's protective strategy,.
(7) Each licensee should be able to articulate in writing its methodology for replicating and simulating the actual defensive positions used in the training conducted at the firing range
for the tactical qualification course. (c) Element 3, Objective: Appropriate levels of stress and physical demands (e.g., engaging targets while on the move).
DG-5043, Page 64 The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs B and E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(1) The course of fire should include, as described in E.1.(d)(6), levels of stress and, as described in B.4.(b)(1) physical demands representative of the site's protective strategy.
(2) Physical stress inducers, such as running, can be used to mimic the actual physical stress a responder experiences during a contingency event in the protected area. If running is used to induce stress, the specific distance associated with the most demanding timeline should be used.
(3) Physical stress may be induced by actually running the predetermined distance or running in place for a specific period of time before negotiating the course or engaging targets.
(4) Mental stress inducers (e.g., having the shooter simulate communication with the CAS or demonstrating tactical reloads) can add realism and should be included during the course of fire. (5) In addition, physical and mental stress can be simulated by having the shooter engage targets while on the move between positions of cover. This demonstration or stage would require the shooter to implement reactionary measures such as engaging the target in the open while advancing to cover, or obtaining cover rapidly and returning fire.
(6) The course of fire should also include the performance criteria associat ed with target set engagement and cover and concealment as described in E.1.(d)(8) and E.1.(d)(10), (e.g., moving from multiple positions of cover, out of the prone and kneeling positions, or up and down elevated positions or stairwells) that reflect the plant environment and the implementation of the licensee's protective strategy. (d) Element 4, Objective: Proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets.
The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(1) To successfully complete the course of fire, the shooter should be able to recognize and then use proper techniques for cover and concealment as described in E.1.(d)(10).
(2) The shooter should demonstrate the performance criteria associated with methods of approaching, moving from, and using cover and concealment while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and situational or decision-making targets (i.e., threat versus non threat-related).
(3) Although the determination of the proper application of this aspect is subjective, licensees should consider some method of accountability for improper application of cover and concealment objectives that may negatively affect the shooter's qualification score. (e) Element 5, Objective: The ability to transition from one type of firearm to another (in the event of a weapons malfunction or change in deployment technique).
DG-5043, Page 65 The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs E and F.2 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(1) The licensee tactical weapons qualifications course of fire should be constructed such that the shooter demonstrates the performance criteria as described in E.
1.(d)(4), associated with the ability to safely and effectively transition from one type of weapon to another during the course of fire (e.g., transition from rifle to handgun).
(2) The actual weapons transition should take place without the assistance or direction of the certified firearms instructor.
(3) The certified firearms instructor should always be able to react to safety concerns or unsafe conditions when warranted during the course of fire.
(4) A common practice to achieve adequate safety controls for this type of firearms drill is to have an instructor/safety officer accompany each shooter through the course on a one-on-one basis. Safety officers may be other qualified and experienced armed security officers, security supervisors, or other security staff.
(5) Acceptable methods for this stage of fire include a built-in weapon malfunction scenario during the course or an instructor-induced weapon malfunction at a certain stage which would require the shooter to transition to another firearm. This transition may be demonstrated with or without the use of cover or concealment.
(6) Audible commands such as "gun down" or "malfunction" are not recommended as signals for a simulated weapon malfunction as they are inconsistent with the physical stimuli experienced during an actual weapon stoppage or malfunction.
(7) The use of dummy rounds exactly replicates a weapons stoppage or malfunction through the physical stimuli associated with the even
- t. Exact and realistic re-creation of this event develops the shooter's sense of recognition and reactionary response to actual weapons stoppages or malfunctions.
(8) The weapon failure or malfunction can be accomplished by causing the shooter to perform a retention or tactical reload with a magazine possessing one, two, or three live rounds at the top followed by a dummy round that would cause the malfunction.
(9) As an alternative, the instructor can provide the magazine to the shooter at the position of cover just before the stage, or the magazine may be color-coded and carried by the officer with pre-designated instructions to use it at the proper stage in the course. This will ensure that the malfunction will occur at the proper stage in the course.
(10) Alternatively, all of the shooters' magazines could be loaded to have a dummy round in either the second, third, or fourth position (each magazine would be different) to ensure that a malfunction occurs on each magazine at the desired stage without the officer's absolute knowledge.
(11) If the shooter performed an immediate ac tion instead of a weapons transition and continued with the primary weapon system, the stage of fire for the weapons transition requirement would be lost.
DG-5043, Page 66 (12) All reloads for this stage of fire should be performed at a position of cover before negotiating this particular part of the course. (f) Element 6, Objective: The ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds). The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(1) The course of fire should, as described in E.1.(d)(9), give the shooter an opportunity to demonstrate the performance criteria for the appropriate immediate action for failures or malfunctions occurring with each weapon type used during the course of fire.
(2) Recovery also includes the shooter's ability to reacquire the target after the weapon malfunction is cleared or when the shooter transitions to another weapon. This should be accomplished through the use of dummy rounds that are preloaded in the ammunition magazines before the start of the course.
(3) At a minimum, one dummy round should be loaded in each magazine before the beginning of the course and should be staggered to minimize predictability. (g) Element 7, Objective: Adherence to the safe handling of firearms during simulated courses of fire. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph E of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(1) Throughout the various stages of the course of fire, the shooter should, as described in E.1.(d)(4), demonstrate the ability to handle each weapon type safely.
(2) This includes consideration of muzzle control, safe movement with loaded, charged, and drawn weapons, trigger finger placement, and properly clearing and restoring all weapons to a safe condition.
(3) A demonstrated disregard for the safe handling of firearms and range safety should cause the instructor/safety officer to stop the course, provide the officer with remedial training on the safe handling of firearms, and require the officer to perform the course again in its entirety. (h) Element 8, Objective: Firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask. The requirements of Section VI, paragraphs F.2 and G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(1) The course of fire should give the shooter an opportunity to demonstrate the performance criteria associated with the shooter's ability to use the gas mask described in G.2.(b)(1).
(2) While wearing the gas mask, the shooter should engage a minimum of two targets and demonstrate a reload. For example, a licensee tactical qualification course may require DG-5043, Page 67 the shooter to don his or her gas mask and fire at multiple targets while loading and reloading with the contingency weapon.
(3) This same tactical qualification course does not have to include the use of the gas mask with the handgun. However, the use of a gas mask with the handgun should be demonstrated in another area of the training program (e.g., firearms familiarization).
(4) The certified firearms instructor can initiate the shooter's use of the gas mask by giving the audible warning of "gas, gas, gas," or the shooter can begin using the mask at a predetermined stage within the course signaled by the deployment of smoke in the immediate vicinity of the shooter.
(5) The gas mask, as one element of the personal equipment described in G.2.(a), should be deployed as issued to the individual, or from its ready access location as described in the licensee protective strategy, and within an acceptable timeline identified for the specific mask type consistent with the manufacturer's specifications, and the licensee's Training and Qualification plan and implementing procedures.
(6) During this stage of fire, it is important to en sure that officers do not break the seal of the gas mask to accommodate stock-to-cheek weld when firing shoulder-fired weapons.
(7) This stage of the course should require the shooter to demonstrate the ability to communicate while wearing the gas mask. (i) Element 9, Objective: Non-dominant (support) hand shooting. The requirements of Section VI, paragraph F of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73 are applicable to this element.
(8) Once an individual has demonstrated the required level of proficiency with dominant hand shooting, and during any stage of fire within the course, the shooter should, as described in the procedures implemented by the licensee, demonstrate the use of the supporting or non-dominant hand to fire.
(9) The purpose of this element is for the shooter to gain familiarity with shooting and handling the assigned weapon(s), including reloading and target acquisition, with the supporting or non-dominant hand when aspects of the site's protective strategy or an injury cause the shooter to use this technique to engage a threat.
(10) This objective may be met by requiring the shooter to engage targets with the shoulder-fired weapon(s), the handgun, or both using the support or non-dominant hand technique.
(11) Licensees that develop tactical qualification courses that require support or non-dominant hand firing using only one of the weapons systems carried by their response force members should ensure that this technique is demonstrated for the remaining weapons systems in another area of their training programs (e.g., firearms familiarization). (j) Element 10, Objective: Use of the minimum quantity of combined handgun and shoulder-fired weapon ammunition necessary to demonstrate the ability to effectively implement the licensee's protective strategy.
DG-5043, Page 68 NEI 03-12, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]" provides the following guidance that is acceptable for use in meeting this objective:
(1) The amount of ammunition distributed among all weapons and fired during the course should be consistent with the amount of ammunition described in the licensee's security plan.
(2) The shooter should carry the minimum amount of duty ammunition required by the protective strategy at the site during the conduct of the tactical qualification course.
(3) The standard ammunition load identified in the licensee's contingency plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures for armed responders should be carried during the tactical course of fire. The total number of rounds includes dummy rounds.
11.8 General Implementation Guidance 11.8.1 Typically, a tactical qualification course should be a timed evolution for the shooter and consist of a combination of all the elements required in the licensee's contingency response plan, protective strategy, and implementing procedures, which must be consistent with the licensee's Training and Qualification plan. 11.8.2 The elements should be presented in a continuous evolution (i.e., elements should not be broken out into discrete training evolutions or other courses of fire), with various stages of fire that constitute a single course. All elements and stages of the tactical qualification course should consider range safety. 11.8.3 The time given to a shooter for completion of the tactical qualification course should be consistent with response timelines in the protective strategy and include the time needed to complete each stage of the course and range safely. Each licensee should document and be able to articulate its methodology for determining an acceptable time interval for safe and successful completion of the course of fire. 11.8.4 If a firing range malfunction or a weapon or equipment malfunction beyond the shooter's ability to safely resolve hinders the shooter's ability to complete the tactical qualification course, the shooter should be allowed to continue after resolution of the problem (if feasible) or repeat the course. If such incidents occur, range safety should always be addressed by first ensuring weapons safety (e.g., by clearing and unloading the weapon and practicing muzzle discipline) and then resolving the specific problem. The shooter's time should also be stopped and the shooter held in place while the issue is resolved. Once the issue has been resolved and the firing range is considered clear, the instructor/safety officer should cause the shooter to load and ready the weapons and then continue the course (along with the shooter's time) when directed.
11.9 Weapons Requalification Schedule As described in Section VI, paragraphs F.5 of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requirements shall be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity. Annual requirements may be completed up to 3 months before or 3 months after the scheduled date. However, the next annual training must be scheduled 12 months from the previously scheduled date rather than from the date the training was actually completed.
DG-5043, Page 69 11.10 Short-Cycle Requalification As described in Section VI, paragraph D.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, annual requalification must be scheduled at a nominal 12-month periodicity. 11.10.1 The actual scheduled date (baseline) for the requalification of an annual requirement can be changed (re-baselined) by conducting training earlier than the originally scheduled (baseline) date. The next scheduled date for requalification, from that point forward, must be nominally 12 months from the new (re-baselined) qualification date. 11.10.2 Licensees must ensure that, when applying this short-cycle provision to the training schedule for their annual requirements, their schedule for weapons range activities still meets the nominal 4-month periodicity identified in Section VI, paragraph E.1.(f), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73.
- 12. Weapons, Personal Equipment, and Maintenance As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee must ensure that each individual is equipped or has ready access to all personal equipment or devices required for the effective implementation of the Commission-approved security plans, the licensee's protective strategy, and implementing procedures.
12.1 Weapons 12.1.1 The security shift supervisor, or another individual designated by the licensee, should conduct weapons and ammunition inspections daily, and at a frequency that ensures the proper care and serviceability of the weapons and ammunition and provides assurance that the weapons and ammunition will operate as in tended, and when needed. 12.1.2 The licensee should provide contingency weapons and ammunition that, at a minimum, meet the following specifications:
(1) Semi-automatic rifles: (a) .223 caliber, (b) muzzle velocity of 1,980 feet per second, (c) muzzle energy of 955 foot-pounds, (d) magazine or clip load of 10 rounds, (e) magazine reload of less than 10 seconds, and (f) operable in any environment in which it will be used.
(2) 12-gauge shotguns: (a) four-round pump or semi-automatic, (b) operable in any environment in which it will be used, and (c) full or modified choke.
(3) Semi-automatic pistols or revolvers: (a) .354 caliber, (b) muzzle energy of 250 foot-pounds, (c) full magazine or cylinder reload capability of less than 6 seconds, (d) muzzle velocity of 850 feet per second, (e) full cylinder or magazine capacity of six rounds, and (f) operable in any environment in which it will be used.
DG-5043, Page 70 (4) Ammunition: (a) two fully loaded licensee-issued handgun magazines per handgun or three fully loaded revolver speed-loaders (minimum of 18 rounds), (b) 100 rounds per semi-automatic rifle, and (c) three basic magazine loads of 00 gauge or slug rounds per shotgun (e.g., a 6 round capacity magazine would have a total of 18 shotgun rounds). 12.1.3 The minimum quantity of ammunition available on site should be twice the amount stated above, or as described in the Commission approved physical security plan, for each weapon. 12.1.4 Ammunition should be readily available for armed personnel to resupply if necessary during a contingency event.
12.2 Personal Equipment As stated in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall ensure that each individual is equipped or has ready access to all personal equipment or devices required for the effective implementation of the NRC-approved security plans, the licensee's protective strategy, and implementing procedures. As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, licensees shall provide armed security personnel, at a minimum, with the following:
(1) Gas Mask, full face; (2) Body Armor (bullet-resistant vest);
(3) Ammunition/Equipment Belt; and (4) Two-Way Portable Radio.
12.3 Gas Mask, Full Face 12.3.1 Licensees that issue respiratory protection equipment for the purpose of complying with Commission-approved security plans should establish a respiratory protection program consistent with 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection." 12.3.2 Licensees should develop and implement a written respiratory protection program that outlines specific procedures and elements required for gas mask use. A suitably trained program administrator should manage the program. Licensee respiratory protection programs should include the following program elements:
(1) proper selection of respirators, (2) medical evaluation and fit testing, (3) care and maintenance, (4) training program, and (5) program evaluation.
12.4 Body Armor, Bullet Resistant Vest DG-5043, Page 71 12.4.1 The National Institute of Justice certifies body armor levels. Based on extensive laboratory tests, body armor is designated as meeting one of six levels (I, IIA, II, IIIA, III, and IV). Level I body armor offers the lowest level of protection, and Level IV offers the highest. The type of weaponry a particular type of body armor can guard against is often used to determine its level. The lowest level body armor can be relied on only to protect against bullets with relatively low energy, which tend to have less force on impact. Some higher level body armor can protect against higher energy bullets (i.e., .44 magnum and .357 magnum). Body armor at Levels I through IIIA is soft and can be concealed. At Levels III and IV, body armor uses hard or semi rigid plates to defeat high-energy rifle rounds. 12.4.2 Licensees that issue body armor equipment fo r the purpose of complying with Commission-approved security plans should ensure that the training program clearly describes the distinction between the level of protection offered by body armor and the level of protection offered by a Bullet Resisting Enclosure defensive position, for providing a level of protection commensurate with the DBT.
12.5 Ammunition/Equipment Belt 12.5.1 Ammunition used for live-fire training and qualification, blank ammunition for Engagement Simulation System training, and ammunition for other nonlethal training (e.g., dye-marking cartridges) should be of suitable quality for the intended use. Reloaded, reprocessed, or military surplus ammunition should not be used for dut y or qualification. Licensees should conduct quality assurance verifications of blank or live ammunition to identify ammunition that does not meet manufacturer specifications. 12.5.2 Ammunition may also have an adverse impact on weapon performance. The licensee should verify that ammunition is properly stored and rotated. Ammunition stored in a high-temperature area, such as a turbine building, may degrade over time. In addition, ammunition handled daily may also degrade. Therefore, licensees should factor the rotation of ammunition into the overall assessment of weapon functionality and reliability. 12.5.3 Many types of ammunition pouches, belts, and tactical vests are availabl e to licensees. Multiple individuals should field test all equipment issued to security officers to ensure its practicality and durability. All individuals must be trained and qualified in the use of the equipment before its issuance. Individuals must configure the issued equipment during range activities as if they are performing assigned security duties.
12.6 Two-Way Portable Radio As stated in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(b) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, each two-way radio shall have a minimum of two channels for security operations; one for operating and one for emergencies. As described in 10 CFR 73.55(j), the licensee shall establish and maintain continuous communication capability with onsite and offsite resources, as required, to ensure effective command and control during both normal and emergency situations. Each on-duty security officer, watch person, vehicle escort, and armed response force member must be capable of maintaining continuous communication with an individual in each alarm station. As described in 10 CFR 73.55(j)(6), alternate means of communication (e.g., plant paging system, telephone) shall be provided for use in areas of the facility where radio communication is not possible because of radio transmission interference or in situations when it is not advisable.
DG-5043, Page 72 12.6.1 "Dead spots" created by manmade or natural objects can cause transmission interference. Radio transmissions will reflect off any large object located between the transmitter and the receiver or repeater. This commonly occurs when radio transmission is attempted from inside buildings with thick, reinforced concrete walls or at subterranean levels. Cellular telephones are typically used in these instances. Hardwired telephones or intercom systems can also be used, although they create their own set of tactical disadvantages. In many cases, however, dead spots can be eliminated to a degree by installing radio repeaters in appropriate locations. 12.6.2 Radio transmissions have the potential to create problems with solid-state electrical components. The impact of radiofrequency interference (RFI) on electrical components of nuclear power plants should be evaluated to determine where RFI should be avoided. To prevent potential mishaps, areas where RFI has been determined to have a negative impact on electrical components should be identified. The licensee's safety/security interface program should address the shielding of vital electrical components. 12.6.3 Radio transmissions should be avoided when in the proximity of any known or suspected explosive device. Explosive initiators are often designed to use RFI to actuate the explosive train. Cellular and cordless telephones also produce RFI and their use should be avoided under similar circumstances.
12.7 Additional Personal Equipment As described in Section VI, paragraph G.2.(c) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, and on the basis of its protective strategy and the specific duties and responsibilities assigned to each individual, the licensee should provide, as appropriate, the following additional equipment: 12.7.1 Flashlights and Batteries 12.7.1.1 When choosing a flashlight, licensees should ensure that the flashlight be dependable, strong, and provide sufficient illumination. Armed responders should be trai ned and qualified to operate the flashlight while conducting firearms activities. 12.7.1.2 Spare batteries should be available and a battery replacement schedule should be created. 12.7.2 Baton or Other Nonlethal Weapons 12.7.2.1 Licensees should provide the necessary training for each nonlethal weapon (e.g., baton), electroshock weapon (e.g., stun guns or Tasers), mace, or oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray before issuance. Nonlethal weapons instructors should be certified by an organization recognized nationally (e.g., National Rifle Association, Federal Bureau of Investigation, the military) or by the state (e.g., Police Officer Standards and Training). 12.7.2.2 Certifications described in 12.7.2.1 should specify the nonlethal weapon type(s) that the instructor is qualified to teach. The licensee's instructors should be recertified consistent with the standards recognized by a national or state entity at intervals not to exceed 3 years. The licensee should document the training in accordance with the KSA matrix of the Commission-approved plans. 12.7.3 Handcuffs DG-5043, Page 73 12.7.3.1 Handcuffing is a common method of restraint within the law enforcement community and is used to inhibit an individual's upper body mobility, thereby preventing individuals from using their arms to cause harm to themselves or another individual. Handcuffing may fall into more than one level of the force continuum, depending on the situation and how the techniques are applied. 12.7.3.2 Compliance handcuffing techniques are normally associated with the restraint of a compliant individual who is receptive and cooperative when given verbal commands. Caution should always be exercised when applying compliance handcuffing techniques because a compliant individual may become combative. Because of the lack of physical force associated with compliance handcuffing, it may be associated with soft physical techniques within the force continuum. 12.7.3.3 Noncompliant handcuffing is the act of forceful physical restraint against the will of an individual who has demonstrated combative characteristics by actively attempting to escape, evade, or engage other individuals in a harmful or offensive manner. Extreme caution should be used before and during the application of noncompliant handcuffing techniques to ensure the safety of all involved. Because of the physical force associated with noncompliant handcuffing (i.e., defensive tactics such as blows, strikes, takedowns), it is normally associated with hard physical techniques within the force continuum. 12.7.3.4 It is recommended that licensees include both compliant and noncompliant handcuffing techniques and associated defensive tactics in their training programs to ensure the safety of the security force and other plant personnel. Licen sees should also consider including in their training programs situational training (live scenarios and exercises) that includes the application of the force continuum and the measures within the force continuum (e.g., OC spray, defensive tactics, baton, handcuffing). Before issuing defensive equipment, licensees should be sure that personnel have been trained by a qualified instructor. 12.7.4 Security Enhancements (Other Equipment) 12.7.4.1 Licensees should consider the use of other equipment to augment the equipment they possess and to enhance the capabilities of their physical protection programs. Equipment such as binoculars, night vision aids, illumination devices (i.e., hand-fired flares, remote-operated spotlights), and remote-operated duress alarms may be used to enhance detection, assessment, and identification capabilities. 12.7.4.2 Licensees may use other enhancements, such as nonlethal gas (incapacitating agents) through various delivery methods, to delay the approach of adversaries to vital areas and potential targets within the protected area.
- 13. Firearms Maintenance Program To satisfy the requirements in 10 CFR 73.55(n) and Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall develop and implement a firearms maintenance and accountability program for all licensee-assigned firearms. In order to ensure that firearms function as designed by the manufacturer, no modifications should be made to any firearms, firearm accessories (magazines, sights, holsters), or contingency equipment that is not approved by the firearm or equipment manufacturer. A qualified armorer or DG-5043, Page 74 gunsmith should make all modifications to any firearm. At a minimum, the licensee must implement the maintenance program described below.
13.1 Semiannual Test Firing for Accuracy and Functionality As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(1) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, all firearms, whether licensee- or contractor-owned, must be test fired semiannually. 13.1.1 A qualified armorer or a qualified training instructor should conduct or observe the test firing, consistent with procedures and criteria approved by a qualified armorer to ensure accuracy and reliability. The test firing shall be conducted semiannually (a nominal 6-month period). The semiannual test fire should include the discharge of 10 or more rounds, at a minimum, to determine the functionality, reliability, and accuracy of each weapon. The assessment should also consider seasonal conditions. 13.1.2 Testing activities can be satisfied during scheduled range activities. 13.1.3 Weapons that are unassigned and those that have not been cycled through the range activities within a 6-month period should be test fired and the results documented. As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(3), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's firearms maintenance program must include program activity documentation. Licensee implementing procedures should detail a method for documenting test-firing results.
13.2 Firearms Maintenance and Cleaning Schedule As described in 10 CFR 73.55(n) and Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(2), of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall develop firearms maintenance procedures, which shall, at a minimum, document the licensee's cleaning schedules and cleaning requirements. 13.2.1 Licensee weapons maintenance requirements should be consistent with the firearms manufacturer's recommendations for proper maintenance. Procedures should outline a regular schedule for inspections, types of preventive maintenance, the name of the individual who completed the inspection, the date of the inspection, whether repair is needed, and what actions are necessary before the firearm can enter service (i.e., test fire, function check). If repairs are performed, a new test firing should be completed before the firearm returns to service. 13.2.2 Cleaning procedures should ensure that all licensee owned firearms are operational and can implement the site's protective strategy. 13.2.3 Firearms should be cleaned consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations. A cleaning schedule should be implemented to ensure that all licensee firearms are maintained in a reliable operating condition. All firearms should be cl eaned after firing. Additional cleaning and maintenance regimes should be considered for fi rearms that are stored or carried in a high-humidity environment (i.e., rain, snow, heavy fog) to reduce the possibility of corrosion. 13.2.4 Licensee implementing procedures should establish that all firearms must be unloaded before cleaning. Unloading should be performed in an authorized area. Firearms cleaning procedures should include, but are not limited to, the following activities: (a) removing magazine or ammunition source (unloading of firearm);
DG-5043, Page 75 (b) inspecting the magazine well area of the weapon; (c) locking open the action of the weapon (lock slide to rear or bolt to rear) and opening the action mechanism to the rear; (d) inspecting the chamber to ensure that no ammunition is present; (e) disassembling the firearm consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations for standard operator maintenance; (f) using solvents, oils, and lubricants recommended by the manufacturer(s); (g) using cleaning tools that match the caliber of the firearm to avoid damage to the surface areas, barrel, and muzzle areas; (h) cleaning all areas of the firearm with a cloth and/or brush treated with a small amount of cleaning solvent consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations, (i) removing all traces of powder residue and fouling from the barrel of the firearm; (j) lubricating the firearm according to the manufacturer's specifications; (k) assembling the firearm consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations; and (l) conducting a function check for the operability of the assembled firearm. 13.2.5 Once cleaned, the exterior of the firearm should be wiped with an oily rag to remove surface fingerprints. The acid content in fingerprints can result in surface rusting. Spray-type oil solutions (e.g., mixtures that are both penetrating and lubricating in design) should never be applied to loaded firearms because of the potential for the oil to penetrate the primers and cartridges which may make them incapable of discharging.
13.3 Program Activity Documentation As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(3) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's firearms maintenance program shall include program activity documentation. Acceptable program activity documentation includes the following: 13.3.1 Licensees should maintain and retain documentation of firearms testing and maintenance for each of its firearms employed consistent with Commission-approved security plans and in a manner similar to that for other security equipment that is relied on for effective implementation of the licensee's physical protection program. 13.3.2 The documentation should positively identify each weapon. The documentation should also identify any weapons that malfunction or are in an inoperable condition. The documentation should be detailed enough to determine the nature of the malfunction or inoperable condition, when it occurred, when the weapon was taken out of service, and demonstrate how the problem was resolved and by whom, and when the weapon was returned to service. 13.3.3 The licensee should consider retaining the firearms maintenance records for the life of the firearm to assist in evaluating the performance and dependability of the firearm in case of programmatic problems.
13.4 Weapons and Ammunition Control and Accountability As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(4) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall implement a system of accountability for all firearms and ammunition. 13.4.1 Firearms and ammunition should be stored in areas with access limited to personnel who are qualified to perform maintenance on or carry firearms.
DG-5043, Page 76 13.4.2 Licensees should account for all in-service firearms and duty ammunition daily and periodically account for out-of-service firearms and additional ammunition. The phrase "account for" means to provide a satisfactory record or explanation of the location or disposition of each firearm and all ammunition through visual or physical verification. 13.4.3 Licensees should account for firearms that cannot be visually or physically accounted for because of their location (e.g., those that have been shipped offsite for maintenance or other reasons) by verifying the documentation for the disposition of the firearm. 13.4.4 Accountability for firearms that are stored in weapon safes or other tamper-proof containers, which are sealed with approved tamper-indicating devices (i.e., tamper seals), can be achieved by physically inspecting the integrity of the seal. 13.4.5 Licensees should account for all protective strategy ammunition once per shift. Protective strategy ammunition (the ammunition the licensee requires for the effective implementation of the site's protective strategy) could be stored in the following locations: (a) on the bodies of individual response and supplemental force personnel (i.e., in pouches, belts, and vests); (b) in pouches, belts, vests, or containers lo cated in defensive posts or in other licensee-approved locations throughout the site; and (c) in additional contingency weapons staged for use during a contingency event. 13.4.6 Visual or physical verification of sealed boxes, loaded magazines, or loose ammunition by licensee personnel assuming post responsibilities is acceptable for part of daily shift accountability. Licensees should consider placing a portion of additional ammunition in appropriate weapon(s) magazines. Ammunition should be readily available for armed personnel to resupply if necessary during a contingency event.
13.5 Firearm and Ammunition Storage As described in Section VI, paragraph G.3.(a)(5) of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee's firearms maintenance program shall include the licensee's firearms storage requirements. 13.5.1 Licensees should consider storing weapons and ammunition in approved storage areas or containers that prevent tampering or unauthorized possession and offer a high degree of assurance of safety and reliability. Storage areas or containers should provide easy access for the authorized person(s) to retrieve the wea pons and ammunition expeditiously. 13.5.2 The primary considerations for storage are that the weapon does not sustain any damage, particularly to its sights, and that performance is not adversely impacted. In assessing a weapons storage area or container, the licensee should consider the potential impact of temperature, moisture, and particles (i.e., dust and sand) on the weapon(s). The storage area or container should also prohibit unauthorized access to a weapon.
13.6 Records As required by Section VI, paragraph H to 10 CFR Part 73, and consistent with the requirements of 10 CFR 73.55(q), the licensee must retain all reports, records, or other documentation required.
DG-5043, Page 77 13.7 Authorized Simulation Weapons Licensees should consider implementing a similar firearms maintenance program for their exercise simulation system equipment.
- 14. Audits and Reviews As described in Section VI, paragraph I of Appendix B to 10 CFR Part 73, the licensee shall review the Commission-approved Training and Qualification plan in accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 73.55(m).
DG-5043, Page 78 D. IMPLEMENTATION The purpose of this section is to provide information on how applicants and licensees 1 may use this guide and information regarding the NRC's plans for using this RG. In addition, it describes how the NRC staff complies with 10 CFR 50.109, "Backfitting" and any applicable finality provisions in 10 CFR Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants." Use by Applicants and Licensees Applicants and licensees may voluntarily 2 use the guidance in this document to demonstrate compliance with the underlying NRC regulations. Methods or solutions that differ from those described in this RG may be deemed acceptable if they provide sufficient basis and information for the NRC staff to verify that the proposed alternative demonstrates compliance with the appropriate NRC regulations. Current licensees may continue to use guidance the NRC found acceptable for complying with the identified regulations as long as their current licensing basis remains unchanged. Licensees may use the information in this RG for actions which do not require NRC review and approval, such as changes that meet the requirements of 10 CFR 50.54(p). Changes that require NRC review and approval before implementation shall be submitted under 10 CFR 50.90. Licensees may use the information in this RG or applicable parts to resolve regulatory or inspection issues. Use by NRC Staff The NRC staff does not intend or approve any imposition or backfitting of the guidance in this regulatory guide. The NRC staff does not expect any existing licensee to use or commit to using the guidance in this regulatory guide, unless the licensee makes a change to its licensing basis. The NRC staff does not expect or plan to request licensees to voluntarily adopt this regulatory guide to resolve a generic regulatory issue. The NRC staff does not expect or plan to initiate NRC regulatory action which would require the use of this regulatory guide. Examples of such unplanned NRC regulatory actions include issuance of an order requiring the use of the regulatory guide, requests for information under 10 CFR 50.54(f) as to whether a licensee intends to commit to use of this regulatory guide, generic communication, or promulgation of a rule requiring the use of this regulatory guide without further backfit consideration. During regulatory discussions on plant specific operational issues, as one acceptable means of meeting the underlying NRC regulatory requirement, the staff may discuss with licensees various actions consistent with staff positions in this regulatory guide. Such discussions would not ordinarily be considered backfitting even if prior versions of this regulatory guide are part of the licensing basis of the facility. However, unless this regulatory guide is part of the licensing basis for a facility, the staff may not represent to the licensee that the licensee's failure to comply with the positions in this regulatory guide constitutes a violation. If an existing licensee voluntarily seeks a license amendment or change and (1) the NRC staff's consideration of the request involves a regulatory issue directly relevant to this new or revised regulatory 1 In this section, "licensees" refers to licensees of nuclear power plants under 10 CFR Parts 50 and 52; and the term "applicants," refers to applicants for licenses and permits for (or relating to) nuclear power plants under 10 CFR Parts 50 and 52, and applicants for standard design approvals and standard design certifications under 10 CFR Part 52.
2 In this section, "voluntary" and "voluntarily" means that the licensee is seeking the action of its own accord, without the force of a legally binding requirement or an NRC representation of further licensing or enforcement action.
DG-5043, Page 79 guide and (2) the specific subject matter of this regulatory guide is an essential consideration in the staff's determination of the acceptability of the licensee's request, then the staff may request that the licensee either follow the guidance in this regulatory guide or provide an eq uivalent alternative process that demonstrates compliance with the underlying NRC regulatory requirements. This is not considered backfitting as defined in 10 CFR 50.109(a)(1) or a violation of any of the issue finality provisions in 10 CFR Part 52. Additionally, an existing applicant may be required to comply with new rules, orders, or guidance if 10 CFR 50.109(a)(3) applies. If a licensee believes that the NRC is either using this regulatory guide or requesting or requiring the licensee to implement the methods or processes in this regulatory guide in a manner inconsistent with the discussion in this Implementation section, then the licensee may file a backfit appeal with the NRC in accordance with the guidance in NUREG-1409, "Backfitting Guidelines," (Ref. 14) and the NRC Management Directive 8.4, "Management of Facility-Specific Backfitting and Information Collection" (Ref. 15).
DG-5043, Page 80 GLOSSARY action - functional parts of a firearm that move together to place a cartridge in the chamber or otherwise ready a cartridge for firing.
automatic - a firearm using gas pressure or force of recoil and mechanical spring action for repeatedly performing the entire firing cycle (i.e., fire, unlock, extract, eject, cock, feed, chamber, and lock) with a single press of the trigger.
barrel - the part of the firearm, usually made from iron or steel, through which the projectile(s) pass(es) when the firearm is fired.
barricade - a linear structure used as an obstacle or as support during the firing of a firearm.
bolt - a metal cylinder or block that drives the cartridge into the chamber of a firearm, locks the breech, and usually contains the firing pin and extractor.
bore - the interior of the barrel, the diameter of which determines the caliber or gauge of the firearm.
breech - the part of the firearm to the rear of the bore that accepts ammunition.
bullet - the projectile that is expelled from a firearm when it is fired.
caliber - the diameter of the bore of a firearm or diameter of a bullet.
cartridge - a single piece of firearm ammunition consisting of casing, powder, primer, and projectile.
chamber - the part of the barrel's bore that holds the cartridge or a compartment in the cylinder of a revolver.
charge - to cause the action of a firearm to move, resulting in a cartridge being placed in the chamber and readied for firing.
clear - to ensure that a firearm has no cartridge in the chamber, cylinder, or loading mechanism and, if magazine fed, that the magazine is also removed.
clip - a device used to hold multiple cartridges together. It is used as an aid in loading firearms magazines or cylinders. It has no moving parts and is usually not retained in the firearm.
CN gas (chloroacetophenone) - a tear gas that is weaker than CS gas but lasts longer. close-quarter battle - intensive combat situations at distances less than 21 feet, generally with multiple participants with firearms, other weapons, or hand-to-hand combat.
contraband - firearms, explosives, incendiary devices or other items that may be carried or concealed by personnel, packages, materials, or vehicles and could be used to commit radiological sabotage.
cover - protection from incoming projectiles. CS gas (chlorobenzylidenemalononitrile)
- a tear gas that is stronger than CN gas but wears off faster; can be deployed by grenades or cluster bombs; can cause skin burns and fatal pulmonary edema.
DG-5043, Page 81 cylinder - the rotating chambers of a revolver that hold the cartridges.
draw - to bring out a firearm, usually a handgun, from a holster worn on the body and direct it toward a target. dry fire - to manipulate a firearm and practice firing with no live cartridges or to use inert ammunition (dummy rounds).
enhanced weapon - any short-barreled shotgun, short-barreled rifle, or machine gun. Enhanced weapons do not include destructive devices as defined in 18 U.S.C. 921(a).
fire - to discharge a firearm.
firearm - a weapon from which a projectile(s) is discharged by gun powder, particularly small arms such as rifles or handguns. firearm course - an orderly progression of manipulating and shooting a firearm through specified stages and strings designed to exercise and evaluate firearm manipulation and shooting skills. force continuum (use of force continuum) - a standard that provides individuals with guidelines as to how much force may be used against a resisting or combative subject in a given situation.
gauge - a measuring system used to determine the bore diameter of a shotgun barrel based upon the number of balls of bore diameter that can be produced from a pound of lead.
grip - (verb) to place one or more hands on a firearm to permit effective firing. (noun) The portion of a firearm designed for holding it in order to fire. hammer - the part of a firearm that strikes the primer, firing pin, or percussion cap, causing the firearm to fire a projectile.
handgun - a firearm capable of being held and fired with one hand. independent spent fuel storage facility - a complex designed and constructed for the interim storage of spent nuclear fuel; solid, reactor-related, greater than Class C waste; and other associated radioactive materials. A spent fuel storage facility may be considered independent, even if it is located on the site of another NRC-licensed facility. magazine - a component in some types of firearms (occasionally a detachable metal box) in which cartridges are placed. The magazine contains a spring and a follower and is part of the mechanism by which cartridges are fed into the chamber. mock adversary force (MAF) - a group of tactical operators to role-play as terrorist adversaries to facilitate rigorous performance testing of the licensee's protective strategy. muzzle - the discharge end of a barrel.
other items-items that have an apparent primary use as a weapon (e.g., crossbow, brass knuckles, swords, nunchaku, etc.) or destructive devices as defined in 26 U.S.C. § 5845(f) intended for use in the commission of radiological sabotage. Other items do not include ordinary tools or materials routinely used in the operation and maintenance of a commercial nuclear power reactor facility that could potentially be used in a manner for which they are not intended.
DG-5043, Page 82 pistol - a handgun with a chamber that is integral with the barrel.
player - individuals must participate in one of the following roles to satisfy this requirement as a player response team leaders, alarm station operators, armed responders, armed security officers designated as a component of the protective strategy.
print - perforation on a target caused by a projectile.
projectile - a fired, projected object, such as a bullet or pellet having no capacity for self-propulsion, directed toward a nuclear power plant that could cause concern for the plant's continued operability, reliability, or personnel safety.
physician assistant - a healthcare professional who is trained to practice medicine under the direction/supervision of a physician and is licensed, as appropriate, as a physician's assistant in the state in which the physician's assistant practices.
quarterly - should be scheduled at a nominal 13-week periodicity. Performance may be conducted up to four weeks before to four weeks after the scheduled date. The next scheduled date is 13 weeks from the originally scheduled date.
red gun - a training replica of a weapon (e.g., handgun, rifle, shotgun, etc.) that may be detailed to the look and feel of the real equipment. remotely operated weapons system (ROWS) - a weapon system that is operated from a remote location and typically includes a support structure and operator control station.
revolver - a handgun with a cylinder of multiple chambers brought successively into line with the barrel and discharged by the same hammer.
rifle - a shoulder-fired firearm with a rifled barrel designed for single shot, semi-automatic, or full automatic firing.
round - common term for a single cartridge.
scope - an optical instrument used to aid the human eye in sighting a firearm. semi-automatic - a firearm using gas pressure or force of recoil and mechanical spring action to complete one cycle of the firing sequence (fire, unlock, extract, eject, cock, feed, chamber, lock) with a single pull of the trigger. The trigger must be released and re pressed to begin a second firing sequence.
shot - a projectile, such as a bullet or pellet, from a firearm. This term typically refers to small, round pellets fired from a shotgun.
shotgun - a smooth bore shoulder-fired firearm for firing single (slug) or multiple projectiles (pellets), usually at moderate distance.
sight alignment - correct positioning of the front sight within the center space of the rear sight. For firearms equipped with a scope, the scope must be aligned with the bore before shooting.
sight picture - correct alignment of the target with the correctly aligned sight(s) to ensure that a projectile strikes the target at the point of aim.
DG-5043, Page 83 slug - an elongated projectile of bore diameter for a shotgun that may have a hollow base and spiral driving bands (rifling) on its surface.
stage - a segment of a firearms qualification course, which may consist of one or more strings using similar techniques at a specified distance.
string - a segment of a stage in a firearms course, usually a continuous series of shots fired within a specified time limit.
tampering - deliberately damaging, disabling, or altering equipment necessary for safe shutdown or security equipment necessary for the protection of the facility in order to defeat their function and/or prevent them from operating.
training cycle - a period over which the continuing training program is conducted and evaluated (normally over a three year period).
zero - to adjust a firearm's sighting mechanism(s) to cause a projectile to strike a target at the point of aim. This term may also refer to the number before 1.
DG-5043, Page 84 REFERENCES 3 1. U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), "Physical Protection of Plants and Materials," Part 73, Title 10, "Energy."
- 2. CFR, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utiliza tion Facilities," Part 50, Chapter 1, Title 10, "Energy."
- 3. CFR, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants," Part 52, Title 10, "Energy."
- 4. NRC, Regulatory Guide 5.76, "Physical Protection Programs at Nuclear Power Reactors," Washington, DC.
- 5. NRC, Regulatory Guide 5.81, "Target Set Identification and Development for Nuclear Power Reactors," Washington, DC.
- 6. Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI), NEI 03-12, Revision 7, "Template for the Security Plan, Training and Qualification Plan, Safeguards Contingency Plan, [and Independent Spent Fuel Installation Security Program]."
4 7. Institute of Nuclear Power Operations, INPO-AP-921, "Principles of Training System Development," June 1997, Atlanta, GA.
5 8. International Atomic Energy Agency, Nuclear Security Series No. 13, "Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities (INFCIRC/255/Revision 5), IAEA, Vienna, Austria, 2011.
- 9. International Atomic Energy Agency, "Experience in the Use of Systematic Approach to Training (SAT) for Nuclear Power Plant Personnel," IAEA-Tecdoc-1057, Vienna, Austria, 1998.
6 10. Lautenberg Amendment (1996) to the Gun Control Act [Public Law 104 208, 18 U.S.C. § 922(g)(9)].
3 Publicly available documents from the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) are available electronically through the NRC Library on the NRC's public Web site at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/. The documents can also be viewed on-line for free or printed for a fee in the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR) at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415 3548; and e-mail pdr.resource@nrc.gov. 4 Publications from the Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI) are available at their Web site: http://www.nei.org/ or by contacting the headquarters at Nuclear Energy Institute, 1776 I Street NW, Washington DC 20006-3708, Phone: 202-739-800, Fax 202-785-4019.
5 Copies of Institute of Nuclear Power Operations (INPO) documents are available at Website http://www.inpo.info/ or by contacting the headquarters of Institute of Nuclear Power Operations, 700 Galleria Parkway, SE, Suite 100,Atlanta, GA 30339-5943 6 Copies of International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) documents may be obtained through their Web site: WWW.IAEA.Org/ or by writing the International Atomic Energy Agency P.O. Box 100 Wagramer Strasse 5, A-1400 Vienna, Austria. Telephone (+431) 2600-0, Fax (+431) 2600-7, or E-Mail at Official.Mail@IAEA.Org DG-5043, Page 85
- 11. Violent Crime Control Act of 1994 (Public Law 103 322, H.R. 3355).
- 12. CFR, "Fitness for Duty Programs," Part 26, Chapter 1, Title 10, "Energy"
- 13. NRC, Regulatory Guide (RG) 5.74, "Managing the Safety/Security Interface," Washington, DC.
- 14. NRC, NUREG-1409, "Backfitting Guidelines," July 1990, NRC, Washington, D.C.(ADAMS Accession No. ML032230247)
- 15. NRC, Management Directive 8.4, "Management of Facility-Specific Backfitting and Information Collection," NRC, Washington, D.C.
DG-5043, Page 86 BIBLIOGRAPHY U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Documents Regulations 7 10 CFR Part 50, "Domestic Licensing of Production and Utilization Facilities," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, D.C.
10 CFR Part 52, "Licenses, Certifications, and Approvals for Nuclear Power Plants," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, D.C. 10 CFR Part 73, "Physical Protection of Plants and Materials," U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington, D.C.
Final Rule Federal Register, Vol. 74, No. 58 (March 27, 2009): 13926-13993, "Power Reactor Security Requirements; Final Rule." Federal Register, Vol. 79, No. 122 (June 25, 2014): 36100-36104, "Guidelines on the Use of Firearms by Security Personnel." Information Notices NRC Information Notice 89-05, "Use of Deadly Force by Guards Protecting Nuclear Power Reactors Against Radiological Sabotage," January 19, 1989. Miscellaneous NSIR Documents 8 NSIR/STD-2004/15-001, "Composite Adversary Force Performance Standards for Force-on-Force Exercises," Revision 1, May 2005. SFAQ-05-10, "Tactical Qualification Course of Fire." SFAQ-10-02, "Qualification of Armed Responders during Security Drills." SFAQ-10-13, "Security Shift Supervisor."
SFAQ-12-03, "NEI 03-12, Revision 7 - Hostage Training & Qualification."
7 Publicly available documents from the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) are available electronically through the NRC Library on the NRC's public Web site at http://www.nrc.gov/reading-rm/doc-collections/. The documents can also be viewed on-line for free or printed for a fee in the NRC's Public Document Room (PDR) at 11555 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD; the mailing address is USNRC PDR, Washington, DC 20555; telephone (301) 415-4737 or (800) 397-4209; fax (301) 415 3548; and e-mail pdr.resource@nrc.gov
.. 8 These documents are Official Use Only - Security-Related Information (OUO-SRI) and withheld from public disclosure pursuant to 10 CFR 2.390, "Public inspections, exemptions, request for withholding." If access is desired, please contact the Technical Lead listed on page 1 of this guide or follow the information in link: http://pbadupws.nrc.gov/docs/ML1315/ML13151A355.pdf
DG-5043, Page 87 SFAQ-12-04, "NEI 03-12, Revision 7 - Watchperson Definition, Duty Position & Task Matrix."
Additional Technical Basis Documents The documents listed in the attached bibliography were used to support the development and as a basis for elements of this RG. (a) 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection," (b) 71130.03, "Contingency Response FOF Testing," (c) Colt Carbine and Rifle Armorer Manual, (d) DOE Standard, DOE-STD-1047-2008, "Safety Functions and Other Features of Remotely Operated Weapon Systems (ROWS)," September, 2008, (e) Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, Firearms Training Lesson Plan, Annex F, "Special Shooting Situations," (f) Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, Firearms Training Lesson Plan, Annex D, "Observational Techniques," (g) Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, Firearms Training Lesson Plan, "Marksmanship Fundamentals," (h) International Atomic Energy Agency, IAEA-Tec Doc-1392, "Development of Instructors for Nuclear Power Plants Personnel Training," June 2004, (i) Langevin Learning Services (instructor certification), (j) Lesson learned from NRC security baseline inspection program (industry best practices), (k) Marine Rifle Company/Platoon FMFM 6-4, (l) National Rifle Association, "Law Enforcement Handgun/Shotgun Instructor Manual," (m) National Rifle Association, "Law Enforcement Patrol Rifle Instructor Manual," (n) National Institute of Justice Standard 0101.04, "Ballistic Resistance of Personal Body Armor," (o) Sigarms Armorer Certification Training Program, (p) U.S. Department of the Army, FM 23-9, "Rifle Marksmanship," (q) U.S. Department of the Army, Pamphlet 385-63, "Range Safety," (r) U.S. Marine Corps, MCRP 3-01A, "Rifle Marksmanship," and (s) U.S. Marine Corps, MCRP 3-01B, "Pistol Marksmanship."
DG-5043, Page 88
Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-1 ATTACHMENT 1: Critical Knowledge, Skills and Abilities Matrix Licensees are not expected to have job position titles that are specifically commensurate with the job titles in this Attachmen
- t. This guidance applies to the knowledge, skills and abilities associated with job positions or duty functions with in positions and, therefore, the guidance assumes no nexus to job title. Licensees are guided by the performance code definitions provided in Section C.1 item 7 of this Regulat ory Guide. The minimum critical task(s) required for each duty position are identified in the most current revision of NEI 03-12, Appendix B, Critical Task Matrix. Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 1. Perform Critical Administrative Items: Perform administrative tasks associated with the conduct of security operations consistent with station procedures.
- Identify the role of security personnel in supporting safe operation of the facility [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Identify the 10 CFR 73.21 requirements for the protection of Safeguards Information [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Identify security chain of command [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Conduct shift turnover X X X P/S/D
- Conduct post turnover [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] P/S/D
- Prepare duty roster X X X P/S/D
- Verify inventory of security keys X X X X X P
- Verify inventory of security equipment X X X X X [X] P
- Perform pre-job briefing X X X P/S
- Inspect security posts X X X X X P/D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-2 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Issue vital area (VA) keys X X X X X P/S/D
- Identify/perform reportability X X X X X [X] P/S/D
- Change VA keys and cores/safeguards combinations
[X] [X]
P/S
- Evaluate individuals for the symptoms, contributing factors, and effects of fatigue X X P/S/D
- Perform emergency plan security positions [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] P/D
- Complete annual station-specific training [X] X X X X X X X X X X A M 2. Perform Visitor Access Control: Verify identification, authorization for entry, appropriate badge and/or key card, and presence of an escort before allowing entry to the protected area (PA), consistent with site security plans and implementing procedures.
- Verify identification of individuals authorized unescorted access and visitors [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] A M
- Verify that visitors are not on the denied access list [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] A M
- Identify access badges [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] D
- Issue visitor badges [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] A M
- Issue escort badge and escort instructions [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] S/D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-3 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 3. Control Personnel Access to Protected and Vital Areas: Verify identity and authoriza tion of individual seeking ingress and permit or deny entry accordingly; communicate required logging information to the alarm station operator or record data, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Control access to VA [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] [X] S/D
- Control access to PA [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] [X] S/D
- Control access to remote portals [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] [X] S/D
- Control PA/VA access during a declared emergency [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] D
- Test/operation of hand geometry/iris scan [X] [X] [X] [X] X X [X] [X] A M
- Respond to anti-pass back alarm [X] [X] [X] X X X [X] [X] S/D 4. Conduct Personnel Searches: Using special-purpose detectors, by means of visual observation, by hands-on techniques, or by combinations of these methods, complete search to detect or rule out the presence of unauthorized firearms, explosives and incendiary devices, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures, including excepted
situations.
- Use and test hand-held metal detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Monitor/operate walk-through metal detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Monitor/operate explosive detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-4 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Conduct hands-on search of personnel [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Recognize/detect contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- React to detection of contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A S/D
- Test access control equipment [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Operate portable explosive detector [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M 5. Perform Material Search: Complete package and material search requirements consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures, including excepted situations.
- Search/identify and properly handle cargo/package[X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Recognize/detect contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Monitor/operate X-ray machine [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Conduct package search [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- React to detection of contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A S/D
- React to detection of radioactive material [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D 6. Perform Vehicle Search: Verify/obtain access authorization; complete search requirements; prepare appropriate forms on vehicle; ensure driver is searched; determine need for escort and complete vehicle entry requirements, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures, including excepted situations.
- Search vehicle [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-5 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Operate explosive detector (e.g., Itemizer) [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- Control vehicle access to PA/owner-controlled area (OCA) [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D
- Recognize/detect contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A M
- React to detection of contraband [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X A S/D
- React to discovery of radioactive material [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D
- Log vehicles into and out of the PA [X] [X] [X] [X] X X X P/D 7. Perform Vehicle and Material Escort Functions: Demonstrate the ability to escort a vehicle and any material, to immobilize a vehicle if left unattended, and make reports, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Escort/disable vehicles [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] X S/D
- Escort vehicles with hazardous material [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] X S/D
- Escort excepted material [X] [X] [X] X X X S/D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-6 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 8. Conduct Security Patrols: Patrol and inspect assigned area to include PA, VA, and vehicle barriers and observe area of responsibility for suspicious events, obvious indications of tampering, or unauthorized persons, vehicles, materials, or activities, consistent with station procedures. Make or document appropriate reports in response to alarms and investigations, c onsistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing
procedures.
- Conduct OCA/PA/VA patrol X X X X X X P/D
- Inspect active/passive vehicle barriers X X X X X X P/D
- Inspect gates/locks/access portals and intrusion detection system X X X X X X P/D
- Observe employees/visitors for suspicious behavior[X] X X X X X X D
- Check for obvious indications of tampering during rounds X X X D
- Respond to confirmed tampering events X X X D 9. Conduct Security Communications: Demonstrate proper operation techniques to transmit and receive messages, consistent with N RC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Establish radio communications [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-7 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Establish alternate communications [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Identify security command and control communication structures during normal and contingency operations [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Understand in-plant areas where communications are difficult or non-existent [X] X X X X X X [X] A M
- Establish alternate communications where communications are difficult or non-existent [X] X X X X X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate an ability to establish alternate communication of primary unavailable [X] X X X X X 10. Communicate with Duress System: Determine appropriate conditions and initiate duress alarm or communications signal and respond to a duress alarm, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Use duress alarm(s) [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] P/S/D
- Initiate/receive/act on duress alarms [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D 11. Operate Perimeter Security Barriers: Identify perimeter barriers and operate them, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Demonstrate operation of active vehicle barrier(s) X X X X X [X] P/S
- Demonstrate motor-operated gate operation X X X X X [X] P/S
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-8 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 12. Test Intrusion Detection Equipment and Special-Purpose Detectors: Demonstrate the ability to properly test intrusion detection equipment and/or special-purpose detectors using appropriate test methods and test devices, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Test intrusion detection system [X] [X] [X] X X X [X] P/S
- Test special-purpose detection system [X] [X] [X] X X X [X] P/S 13. Provide Compensatory Measures: Locate and describe post locations, areas of responsibility, timing of actions and communication requirements for each assigned posting, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- React to loss of security lighting X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D
- React to loss of security computer X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D
- React to loss of communications X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D
- React to loss of intrusion detection X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D
- React to loss of closed-circuit television X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X]
S/D
- React to loss of PA/VA barrier X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D
- React to loss of vehicle barrier X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-9 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 14. Conduct Area Searches: Demonstrate appropriate search techniques to recognize and properly respond upon discovery of contraband and prohibited items, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Recognize contraband and prohibited items [X] X X X X X X [X] [X] [X] A M
- React to discovery of co ntraband and prohibited items[X] X X X X X X [X] [X] [X] P/S/D 15. Respond to Protected and Vital Area Alarms: On dispatch from the alarm stati on operator, proceed to the area in alarm within a specified timeframe and investigate the cause of alarm by using proper assessment procedures, and report to the alarm station operator, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing
procedures.
- Respond to alarms X X X X X [X] P/S/D 16. Determine Amount of Force Required To Prevent an Unauthorized Act: Demonstrate understanding of situation in which the use of force is authorized and demonstrate the appropriate degree and type of force necessary, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Conduct arrest/detention X X X X X [X] [X] S/D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-10 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Determine if a legal search may be performed X X X X X [X] [X]
- Determine if a legal arrest may be made X X X X X [X] [X]
- Field search an arrested person X X X X X [X] [X] S/D
- Determine when the use of nonlethal and lethal force is justified (force continuum) X X X X X [X] D
- Identify situations when search and seizure by private security personnel are legal X X X X X [X] [X] D
- Handcuff and search a suspect X X X X X [X] [X] P/S/D
- 17. Perform Central and Secondary Alarm Station Functions: Demonstrate routine alarm station functions and contingency response procedures, including communications, for alarm
stations, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Respond to alarm X X X [X] A M
- Encode and/or activate key card badges X X X A M
- Log vehicles into and out of the PA X X X P/D
- Initiate and monitor patrols X X X P/D
- Log on/log off security computer X X X A S
- Operate security computer system X X X A M
- Run required reports X X X A M
- Identify actions upon loss of intrusion detection system X X X P/D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-11 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Monitor personnel working in the isolation zone X X X [X] P/D 18. Operate the Base Station Radio and Security Communications Equipment:
Select the proper communications equipment on the appropriate frequency as required, operate equipment by using correct communications procedures, contact fixed posts, patrols, responders, and LLEA recording th e check, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Identify available LLEA communication channels X X X D
- Contact LLEA (primary and alternate) X X X P/S/D
- Use emergency call list X X X D
- Monitor/operate communication systems X X X A M 19. Operate and Monitor Access Control, Observation, Detection and Assessment Equipment: Operate and monitor access control, observation, detection, and assessment systems to verify operability, acknowledge any alarm
indication and initiate response within a specified timeframe, annotate appropriate records and complete other activities, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Operate card access system X X X A M
- Change status and monitor zones X X X A S
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-12 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Activate/deactivate alarm point X X X A S
- Respond to system errors X X X P/D
- Test intrusion detection system X X X P/D
- Monitor and respond to loss of power alarm(s) (e.g., uninterrupted power supply, backup, secondary) X X X P/D
- Operate and test video cassette recorder X X X A M
- Monitor/control cameras X X X [X] A M
- Operate video capture X X X A M
- Identify actions upon loss of video assessment system X X X [X] P/D 20. Respond to Contingency Events and Execute Defensive Strategy:
Within a specified timeframe, respond to contingency events as directed or required by communicating with alarm station(s),
using contingency equipment as directed, observing/reporting information; and correctly implementing supervisory directions and proper tactics, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Identify defensive positions X X X X [X] D
- Identify targets and target sets X X X X [X] D
- Identify offsite law enforcement response [X] X X X X X D
- Identify tactics and force that an adversary group might use to achieve its objectives X X X X [X] D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-13 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Identify response force deployment, tactical movement, withdrawal, and use of support fire X X X X [X] D
- Identify integrated response plan with LLEA and state and federal resources X X X X D
- Identify response timelines X X X X [X] D
- Conduct/report tactical observations [X] X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Identify safeguards contingency threat situations X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Identify/react to changes in threat level X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Participate in quarterly tactical drills X X X X [X] [X] Q M
- Participate in annual force-on-force exercise X X X X [X] [X] A M 21. Direct Response Team Activities:
Within a specified timeframe, implement security response to safeguards contingency events by instructing, directing, deploying, and coordinating individuals and teams, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Coordinate response team X X X S/D
- Redirect team to respond to threat X X X S/D
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-14 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 22. Comply with Physical Fitness Performance Requirements: Demonstrate the level of physical fitness necessary to perform assigned duties and responsibilities, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Demonstrate strength, endurance, and agility required to perform the assigned security-related duties X X X X X [X] [X] A M 23. React to Bomb, Hostage, and Civil Disturbance Situations:
Demonstrate the ability to execute station procedures and respond correctly to a potential bomb threat, hostage situation, or civil disturbance near the facility, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Execute mob and crowd control formations X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] S/D
- Don/use riot protective equipment X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Receive/react to a bomb/attack/extortion threat [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X]
S/D
- React to a hostage situation X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- React to civil disturbance situation X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] D
- Respond to a hostage or duress situation [X] X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A D
- Conduct an investigation and prepare a report X X X [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-15 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method** 24. Perform Nonlethal Defense Measures: Demonstrate proper use of nonlethal defensive measures, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Demonstrate the use of chemical agent X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate CS/CN smoke grenades X X X X X A M
- Demonstrate 37-millimeter gas launcher X X X X X A M
- Use shotgun as a gas launcher X X X X X A M
- Demonstrate the use of baton X X X X X A M
- Conduct unarmed self-defense X X X X X [X] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- 25. Demonstrate Proficiency with Handgun: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the defensive strategy, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Engage target with handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Clean/inspect/maintain handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Load/clear stoppage/unload/reload handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper firearms handling X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate weak-hand shooting using handgun X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate use of clearing trap X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-16 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate proficiency under simulated tactical situation X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Perform annual daylight Appendix B firearms qualification X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Perform annual night fire qualification with the handgun in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions that would occur because of loss of offsite power X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to load, unload, and clear all assigned weapons in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-17 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapon malfunctions and safe handling of firearms simulated as appropriate X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 26. Demonstrate Proficiency with 12-Gauge Shotgun: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the
defensive strategy, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Engage target with shotgun X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Clean/inspect/maintain shotgun X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Load/clear stoppage/unload/reload shotgun X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate use of clearing trap X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper firearms handling X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proficiency under simulated tactical situation X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-18 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds) X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Perform annual daylight firearms qualification X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Perform annual night fire qualification with the shotgun in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions that would occur because of loss of offsite power X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to load, unload, and clear all assigned weapons in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate firing from a reasonable and representative facsimile of defensive positions, elevations, and distances X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-19 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 27. Demonstrate Proficiency in Use of Semi-automatic Rifle: Satisfactorily achieve basic and advanced weapons qualification to demonstrate tactical use of assigned weapon in support of the
defensive strategy, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Engage target with rifle X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Clean/inspect/maintain rifle X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Load/clear stoppage/unload/reload rifle X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate use of clearing trap X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper firearms handling X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proficiency under simulated tactical situation X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-20 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds) X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Perform annual daylight Appendix B firearms qualification X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Perform annual night fire qualification with rifle in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions that would occur because of loss of offsite power X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to load, unload, and clear all assigned weapons in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate firing from a reasonable and representative facsimile of defensive positions, elevations, and distances X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-21 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 28. Demonstrate Use of Protective Equipment: Demonstrate proper donning and use of protective response equipment, consistent with NRC requirements, NRC-approved site security plans, and site implementing procedures.
- Inspect/use protective equipment X X [X] X X [X] A M
- Demonstrate use of gas mask X X [X] X X [X] A M 29. Demonstrate proficiency and use of ROWS
- Demonstrate proper ROWS operation, maintenance and safety in accordance with vendor requirements and recommendations X X X A M
- Demonstrate proficiency under simulated tactical situation X X X A M
- Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety X X X A M
- Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke and/or barriers/shields are encountered during a contingency event X X X A M
- Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions X X X A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-22 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate functional and operational understanding of safety/security interface related to fields of fire X X X 30. Demonstrate proficiency of [enhanced/other weapons]
- Engage target with [enhanced/other weapons] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Clean/inspect/maintain [enhanced/other weapons] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Load/clear stoppage/unload/reload [enhanced/other weapons] [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate use of clearing trap [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper firearms handling [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate proficiency under simulated tactical situation [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate principles of good marksmanship and weapons safety [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Engage potential targets when obstacles such as smoke, fencing, doors, and walls are encountered during a contingency event [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to recover from simulated weapons malfunctions (e.g., dummy rounds) [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate the proper use of cover and concealment [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Perform annual daylight Appendix B firearms qualification [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-23 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Perform annual night fire qualification with [enhanced/other weapons] in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions that would occur because of loss of offsite power [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to load, unload, and clear all assigned weapons in conditions that reasonably approximate expected loss of lighting conditions [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate combined use of handguns and shoulder-fired weapons [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate firing from a reasonable and representative facsimile of defensive positions, elevations, and distances [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate ability to perform under stress and physical demands [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate proper cover and concealment tactics while engaging multiple targets, moving targets, and decision-making targets [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate the ability to transition from one firearm type to another [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Demonstrate firing at multiple targets, loading, and reloading while wearing a gas mask [X] [X] [X] [X] A M
- Frequency: A = Annual Requirement, not subject to change using the SAT process Q = Quarterly ** Performance Method: M = Must Perform, not subject to change using the SAT process Attachment 1 to DG-5043, Page A-24 Critical Tasks/Duty Functions/Site Specific Duty Functions
[Watchperson] Armed Security Officer Armed Responder and Armed Security Officer's with Armed Res p onder Duties CAS/SAS Alarm Station Operator Response Team Leader Security Shift Supervisor [ROWS Operator] [Search Officer] [Access Officer] [Patrol Officer] [Escort Officer] Frequency* Performance Method**
- Demonstrate functional and operational understanding of the safety/security interface (fields of fire and destructive capability) [X] [X] [X] [X]